WO2020125779A1 - 8-substituted styryl xanthine derivatives and uses thereof - Google Patents

8-substituted styryl xanthine derivatives and uses thereof Download PDF

Info

Publication number
WO2020125779A1
WO2020125779A1 PCT/CN2019/127192 CN2019127192W WO2020125779A1 WO 2020125779 A1 WO2020125779 A1 WO 2020125779A1 CN 2019127192 W CN2019127192 W CN 2019127192W WO 2020125779 A1 WO2020125779 A1 WO 2020125779A1
Authority
WO
WIPO (PCT)
Prior art keywords
mmol
compound
title compound
alkyl
adenosine
Prior art date
Application number
PCT/CN2019/127192
Other languages
French (fr)
Inventor
Chuanfei JIN
Wenhe ZHONG
Tengfei XU
Yingjun Zhang
Original Assignee
Sunshine Lake Pharma Co., Ltd.
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Application filed by Sunshine Lake Pharma Co., Ltd. filed Critical Sunshine Lake Pharma Co., Ltd.
Publication of WO2020125779A1 publication Critical patent/WO2020125779A1/en

Links

Classifications

    • CCHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C07ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
    • C07DHETEROCYCLIC COMPOUNDS
    • C07D473/00Heterocyclic compounds containing purine ring systems
    • C07D473/02Heterocyclic compounds containing purine ring systems with oxygen, sulphur, or nitrogen atoms directly attached in positions 2 and 6
    • C07D473/04Heterocyclic compounds containing purine ring systems with oxygen, sulphur, or nitrogen atoms directly attached in positions 2 and 6 two oxygen atoms
    • C07D473/06Heterocyclic compounds containing purine ring systems with oxygen, sulphur, or nitrogen atoms directly attached in positions 2 and 6 two oxygen atoms with radicals containing only hydrogen and carbon atoms, attached in position 1 or 3
    • AHUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61PSPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P25/00Drugs for disorders of the nervous system
    • A61P25/30Drugs for disorders of the nervous system for treating abuse or dependence
    • A61P25/32Alcohol-abuse
    • AHUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61PSPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P11/00Drugs for disorders of the respiratory system
    • A61P11/06Antiasthmatics
    • AHUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61PSPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P19/00Drugs for skeletal disorders
    • A61P19/08Drugs for skeletal disorders for bone diseases, e.g. rachitism, Paget's disease
    • A61P19/10Drugs for skeletal disorders for bone diseases, e.g. rachitism, Paget's disease for osteoporosis
    • AHUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61PSPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P25/00Drugs for disorders of the nervous system
    • AHUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61PSPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P25/00Drugs for disorders of the nervous system
    • A61P25/04Centrally acting analgesics, e.g. opioids
    • AHUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61PSPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P25/00Drugs for disorders of the nervous system
    • A61P25/14Drugs for disorders of the nervous system for treating abnormal movements, e.g. chorea, dyskinesia
    • AHUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61PSPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P25/00Drugs for disorders of the nervous system
    • A61P25/14Drugs for disorders of the nervous system for treating abnormal movements, e.g. chorea, dyskinesia
    • A61P25/16Anti-Parkinson drugs
    • AHUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61PSPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P25/00Drugs for disorders of the nervous system
    • A61P25/24Antidepressants
    • AHUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61PSPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P25/00Drugs for disorders of the nervous system
    • A61P25/28Drugs for disorders of the nervous system for treating neurodegenerative disorders of the central nervous system, e.g. nootropic agents, cognition enhancers, drugs for treating Alzheimer's disease or other forms of dementia
    • AHUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61PSPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P9/00Drugs for disorders of the cardiovascular system
    • A61P9/10Drugs for disorders of the cardiovascular system for treating ischaemic or atherosclerotic diseases, e.g. antianginal drugs, coronary vasodilators, drugs for myocardial infarction, retinopathy, cerebrovascula insufficiency, renal arteriosclerosis
    • CCHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C07ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
    • C07DHETEROCYCLIC COMPOUNDS
    • C07D487/00Heterocyclic compounds containing nitrogen atoms as the only ring hetero atoms in the condensed system, not provided for by groups C07D451/00 - C07D477/00
    • C07D487/02Heterocyclic compounds containing nitrogen atoms as the only ring hetero atoms in the condensed system, not provided for by groups C07D451/00 - C07D477/00 in which the condensed system contains two hetero rings
    • C07D487/04Ortho-condensed systems

Definitions

  • novel 8-substituted styryl xanthine derivatives of the present invention can be used as a selective adenosine A 2A receptor antagonist for preventing, treating or lessening an adenosine A 2A receptor-related disease, especially Parkinson’s disease.
  • Parkinson’s disease is a common chronic degenerative disease of the nervous system, also known as tremor paralysis.
  • the elderly are more common, and the average age of onset is about 60 years old.
  • Parkinson's disease is less common in young people under the age of 40.
  • the prevalence of PD in China over 65 years old is about 1.7%.
  • Most patients with Parkinson's disease are sporadic cases, and less than 10%have a family history.
  • Parkinson's disease is insidious, and of slow progress.
  • the first symptom is usually the tremor or awkwardness of one limb, which in turn affects the contralateral limb.
  • the main clinical manifestations are resting tremor, bradykinesia, myotonia and posture gait disorder.
  • Parkinson's disease The main pathological change of Parkinson's disease is the degenerative death of dopamine (DA) neurons in the substantia nigra, which causes a significant decrease in the striatum DA content and causes disease. The exact cause of this pathological change is still unclear. Genetic factors, environmental factors, aging, and oxidative stress may be involved in the degenerative death of PD dopaminergic neurons.
  • DA dopamine
  • the current treatment of PD mainly includes surgical treatment and drug treatment.
  • Surgical treatment may have serious adverse reactions and high postoperative recurrence rate, which limits the widespread application of surgical treatment.
  • the drug treatment of PD is mainly divided into two categories: anticholinergic drugs and drugs that affect dopaminergic. Anticholinergic drugs can only improve symptoms as an adjunct.
  • Dopaminergic treatment for PD is mainly to reverse the lack of striatal dopamine caused by nigrostriatal damage (Obeso JA, Olanow CW, Nutt JG. Levodopa motor complications in Parkinson’s disease [J] . Trends Neurosci, 2000, 23 (10) : 2-7. ) .
  • Levodopa and other dopamine agonists are effective in controlling the symptoms of PD, especially in the early stages of the disease.
  • dopamine agonists have acute side effects such as hypotension, nausea, vomiting, and other symptoms that occur with the severity of the disease, including loss of drug effectiveness, mental symptoms, and dyskinesia.
  • New PD treatments should be effective throughout the disease, not only reducing the side effects of existing drugs of treatment, but also having neuroprotective effects that slow or prevent the progression of the disease.
  • the basal ganglia is an important subcortical center that regulates movement, and mainly includes two pathways: direct pathway (striatal-substantia nigra pars reticulata/globus pallidus internus-thalamus-cortical loop) , indirect pathway (striatum-lateral globus pallidus-subthalamic nucleus-substantia nigra pars reticulata/globus pallidus internus-thalamus-cortex circuit) .
  • direct pathway striatal-substantia nigra pars reticulata/globus pallidus internus-thalamus-cortical loop
  • indirect pathway striatum-lateral globus pallidus-subthalamic nucleus-substantia nigra pars reticulata/globus pallidus internus-thalamus-cortex circuit
  • the striatum acts on an efferent neuron in the direct pathway that contains dopamine D 1 receptors, and the striatum acts on efferent neurons of the indirect pathway, which contains dopamine D 2 receptors Activation of the direct pathway facilitates thalamic cortical neuron activity, while activation of the indirect pathway inhibits thalamic cortical neuron activity.
  • Dopamine has an excitatory effect on the D 1 receptor to activate the direct pathway, and an inhibitory effect on the D 2 receptor to inhibit the indirect pathway, keeping the direct and indirect pathways in balance.
  • Adenosine A 2A receptor is selectively expressed in basal ganglia and is related to motor behavior, mainly acts through the regulation of indirect pathways: (1) activating adenosine A 2A receptors of GABAergic neurons in the striatum can increase the excitability of GABAergic neurons in the striatum, thereby inhibiting the excitability of GABAergic neurons in external globus pallidus; (2) activating adenosine A 2A receptors at the axon end of the GABAergic neurons in the striatum can promote GABA release, inhibit the excitability of GABAergic neurons in external globus pallidus (Shindou T, Richardson PJ, Mori A et al. Adenosine modulates the striatal GABAergic inputs to the globus pallidus via adenosine A 2A receptors in rats. Neuroscience Letters, 2003, 352 (3) : 167-170. )
  • Adenosine A 2A receptor antagonists improve PD symptoms while slowing disease progression.
  • Adenosine A 2A receptor antagonist as non-dopamine target of basal ganglia may develop into new strategy for treating PD (Pinna A, Wardas J, Simola N, et al. New therapies for the treatment of Parkinson’s disease: Adenosine A 2A receptor antagonists [J] . LifeSci, 2005, 77 (26) : 3259 -67. ) .
  • adenosine A 2A receptor antagonists may become a new class of drugs for treating Parkinson's disease. How to find some drugs that have high affinity for adenosine A 2A receptors, can also play a good role in the body, and have few adverse reactions has become an important topic in the research of adenosine A 2A receptor antagonists.
  • Adenosine receptors represent a subclass of receptors of the coupling of purine nucleotides and nucleoside G protein receptors (called purine receptors) .
  • purine receptors There are four major adenosine receptor subtypes that differ in pharmacology, i.e. A 1 , A 2A , A 2B , and A 3 , respectively.
  • the major adenosine receptor subtypes in the brain are A 1 and A 2A .
  • adenosine A 1 receptors are distributed throughout the brain at high density, and the distribution of adenosine A 2A receptors is more restricted.
  • Adenosine A 2A receptors are present in the striatum (olfactory nodules, nucleus accumbens, lateral caudate nucleus) at high density, and are localized together with dopamine D 2 receptors on striatum efferent neurons. Adenosine A 2A receptors are mainly co-expressed with dopamine D 2 receptors in the medium spiny neurons (MSNs) of striatum-globus pallidus, but not co-expressed with dopamine D 1 receptors. (Fink JS, Weaver DR, Rivkees SA et al.
  • mOLECULAR Cloning of the rat A 2 adenosine receptor Selective co-expression with D 2 dopamine receptors in rat striatum. Brain Res Mol BRAIN rES, 1992, 14: 186-195. ) . Later, it was found that adenosine A 2A receptor and dopamine D 2 receptor were also co-expressed in the core and shell regions of olfactory nodules and the nucleus accumbens (Svenningsson P, Le Moine C, Kull B et al. Cellular expression of adenosine A 2A receptor messenger RNA in the rat central nervous system with special reference to dopamine innervated areas. Neuroscience, 1997, 80: 1171-1185.
  • adenosine A 2A receptor antagonists a potential therapy for symptoms of Parkinson's disease.
  • adenosine A 2A receptors and dopamine D 2 receptors can form heterodimer and/or hetero-oligomer, wherein heterodimer can reduce the activity of dopamine D 2 receptor: through the interaction between the carboxyl terminus of the adenosine A 2A receptor and the 5, 6 transmembrane region of the dopamine D 2 receptor, the epitope of the dopamine D 2 receptor is changed, and the affinity of dopamine D 2 receptor and its ligand is reduced; through the interaction between the carboxyl terminus of the adenosine A 2A receptor and N-terminal Part of I3 of the D 2 receptor (arginine-rich epitope) , the coupling of dopamine D 2 receptor and G protein is reduced, the effect of dopamine D 2 receptor activation to promote K + outflow and inhibit calcium inflow is reduced, thereby the activity of dopamine D 2 receptor is reduced.
  • Adenosine A 2A receptor agonists can promote heterodimer formation, while
  • Naturally occurring xanthine is the first generation of adenosine receptor antagonists, such as caffeine (1, 3, 7-caffeine) and theophylline (1, 3-dimethylxanthine, Daly et al., Cell. Mol. Neurobiol., 1983, 3, 67) .
  • these xanthines have been known to reverse motor deficits in various PD models.
  • epidemiological investigations suggest that caffeine and theophylline can reduce the incidence of Parkinson's disease.
  • research Feredholm BB. Connection between caffeine, adenosine receptors and dopamine. Coffee reduces the risk of Parkinson’s disease. Lakartidningen, 2004, 101 (34) : 2552-2555.
  • coffee is a non-selective adenosine A 2A receptor antagonist that works by blocking the adenosine A 2A receptor. Because they are non-selective and moderately effective, they have led to the development of selective adenosine A 2A receptor antagonists.
  • This difference in activity in vivo may be due to differences in pharmacokinetics, pharmacodynamics, metabolism and/or bioavailability (Kiec-Kononowicz et al., Pure and Appl. Chem., 2001, 73, 1411) .
  • Adenosine A 2A receptor antagonist as a new drug for the treatment of PD, has accurate effects, good safety and good tolerance, and has broad application prospect.
  • the following patent documents disclose compounds as adenosine A 2A receptor antagonists:
  • US 5484920 A discloses xanthine derivatives as selective adenosine A 2 receptor antagonists, their pharmaceutical compositions and their use, and application for preventing or treating PD.
  • RU 2480469 C1 discloses substituted 1, 3-diethyl-8-vinyl-7-methyl-3, 7-dihydropurine-2, 6-dione as selective adenosine A 2A receptor antagonists, their pharmaceutical compositions and their uses, and application for the prevention or treatment of diseases of the central nervous system (including PD) , tumors, viruses and bacterial diseases.
  • WO 2013058681 A2 discloses 8-phenoxyacetic acid and its esters and amide vinyl substituted 2, 6-dioxo-2, 3, 6, 7-tetrahydro-1H-purine as selective adenosine A 2A receptor antagonists, their pharmaceutical compositions and their uses, and application for the prevention or treatment of diseases of the central nervous system (including PD) .
  • WO 9523148 A1 discloses xanthine derivatives as selective adenosine A 2 receptor antagonists, their pharmaceutical compositions and their uses, and application for the prevention or treatment of PD, senile dementia, depression, asthma, osteoporosis and the like.
  • WO 9425462 A1 discloses an 8-substituted 1, 3, 7-trialkyl-xanthine derivative as selective adenosine A 2A receptor antagonists, their pharmaceutical compositions, and their uses, and application for the prevention or treatment of diseases related to A 2A receptors
  • CA 2112031 A1 discloses 8-substituted xanthine derivatives as selective adenosine A 2 receptor antagonists, their pharmaceutical compositions and uses, and application for preventing or treating PD, dementia, depression, asthma, osteoporosis and the like.
  • JP 2016003186 A discloses a dihydroisobenzofuran-containing xanthine derivative as a selective adenosine A 2A receptor antagonist, pharmaceutical compositions thereof, and uses thereof, and application for preventing or treating PD.
  • WO 2008077557 A1 discloses a 8-ethynyl-containing xanthine derivative as a selective adenosine A 2A receptor antagonist, pharmaceutical compositions thereof, and uses thereof, and application for preventing or treating PD, dementia, depression, asthma, osteoporosis and the like.
  • the present invention provides a novel 8-substituted styryl xanthine derivative as a selective adenosine A 2A receptor antagonist for treating an adenosine A 2A receptor-related disease, especially Parkinson’s disease.
  • the 8-substituted styryl xanthine derivative have stable properties, good safety, favorable pharmacodynamics and good pharmacokinetic properties, such as expected brain/plasma ratio, good bioavailability or good metabolic stability, and so on. Therefore, it has a good clinical application prospect.
  • the invention also provides a method for preparing the compound and a pharmaceutical composition containing the compound, and uses of the compound and the pharmaceutical composition containing the compound in the manufacture of a medicament.
  • R 0 is - (CH 2 ) m - (3-8 membered oxygen-containing heterocyclic ring) , wherein the 3-8 membered oxygen-containing heterocyclic ring is optionally substituted with 1, 2 or 3 R 9 groups;
  • n 0, 1, 2 or 3.
  • R 0 is wherein is optionally substituted by 1, 2 or 3 R 9 groups, x is 0, 1, 2 or 3, y is 1, 2 or 3;
  • R 0 is
  • R 1 , R 2 , R 3 , R 4 , R 5 , R 6 , R 7 , R 8 and R 0 are as defined herein.
  • composition comprising the compound of Formula (I) , (II) , (III) or (IV) .
  • the pharmaceutical composition disclosed herein further comprises a pharmaceutically acceptable excipient, a carrier, an adjuvant or a combination thereof.
  • the pharmaceutical composition according to the present invention further comprises an additional therapeutic agent, wherein the additional therapeutic agent is monoamine oxidase type B inhibitor, dopamine agonist, anticholinergic, glutamate antagonist, levodopa or any combination thereof.
  • the additional therapeutic agent is monoamine oxidase type B inhibitor, dopamine agonist, anticholinergic, glutamate antagonist, levodopa or any combination thereof.
  • the present invention relates to use of the compound represented by Formula (I) , (II) , (III) or (IV) or the pharmaceutical composition in the manufacture of a medicament for preventing, treating or lessening an adenosine A 2A receptor-related disease in a patient.
  • an adenosine A 2A receptor-related disease is Parkinson's disease, pain, depression, dementia, stroke, myocardial ischemia, asthma, alcohol withdrawal, dyskinesia syndrome, restless leg syndrome, dystonia, systemic stiffness, neurodegenerative disorders or osteoporosis.
  • the present invention relates to use of the compound represented by Formula (I) , (II) , (III) or (IV) or the pharmaceutical composition in the manufacture of a medicament for antagonizing adenosine A 2A receptor.
  • provided herein is a method of preparing, separating or purifying the compound of Formula (I) , (II) , (III) or (IV) .
  • any embodiment disclosed herein can be combined with other embodiments as long as they are not contradictory to one another, even though the embodiments are described under different aspects of the invention.
  • any technical feature in one embodiment can be applied to the corresponding technical feature in other embodiments as long as they are not contradictory to one another, even though the embodiments are described under different aspects of the invention.
  • grammatical articles “a” , “an” and “the” are intended to include “at least one” or “one or more” unless otherwise indicated herein or clearly contradicted by the context.
  • the articles are used herein to refer to one or more than one (i.e., at least one) of the grammatical objects of the article.
  • a component means one or more components, and thus, possibly, more than one component is contemplated and may be employed or used in an implementation of the described embodiments.
  • At least Z means Z or more, Z is an integer.
  • at least one means one or more than one, for example, 1, 2, 3, and so on.
  • Stereoisomers refers to compounds which have identical chemical constitution, but differ with regard to the arrangement of the atoms or groups in space. Stereoisomers include enantiomer, diastereomers, conformer (rotamer) , geometric (cis/trans) isomer, atropisomer, etc.
  • Chiral refers to molecules which have the property of non-superimposability of the mirror image partner, while the term “achiral” refers to molecules which are superimposable on their mirror image partner.
  • Enantiomers refer to two stereoisomers of a compound which are non-superimposable mirror images of one another.
  • Racemate or “racemic mixture” refers to an equimolar mixture of two enantiomers lacking optical activity.
  • Diastereomer refers to a stereoisomer with two or more centers of chirality and whose molecules are not mirror images of one another. Diastereomers have different physical properties, e.g. melting points, boling points, spectral properties and reactivity. A mixture of diastereomers may be separated under high resolution analytical procedures such as electrophoresis and chromatography such as HPLC.
  • d and l or (+) and (-) are employed to designate the sign of rotation of plane-polarized light by the compound, with (-) or l meaning that the compound is levorotatory.
  • a compound prefixed with (+) or d is dextrorotatory.
  • a specific stereoisomer may be referred to as an enantiomer, and a mixture of such stereoisomers is called an enantiomeric mixture.
  • a mixture of enantiomers with a ratio of 50: 50 is referred to as a racemic mixture or a racemate, which may occur where there has been no stereoselection or stereospecificity in a chemical reaction or process.
  • any asymmetric atom (e.g., carbon or the like) of the compound (s) disclosed herein can be present in racemic or enantiomerically enriched, for example the (R) -, (S) -or (R, S) -configuration.
  • each asymmetric atom has at least 50 %enantiomeric excess, at least 60 %enantiomeric excess, at least 70 %enantiomeric excess, at least 80 %enantiomeric excess, at least 90 %enantiomeric excess, at least 95 %enantiomeric excess, or at least 99 %enantiomeric excess in the (R) -or (S) -configuration.
  • the compounds can be present in the form of one of the possible stereoisomers or mixtures thereof, such as racemates and diastereoisomer mixtures, depending on the number of asymmetric carbon atoms.
  • Optically active (R) -and (S) -isomers may be prepared using chiral synthons or chiral reagents, or resolved using conventional techniques. If the compound contains a double bond, the substituent may be E or Z configuration. If the compound contains a disubstituted cycloalkyl, the cycloalkyl substituent may have a cis-or trans-configuration.
  • Any resulting mixtures of stereoisomers can be separated on the basis of the physicochemical differences of the constituents, into the pure or substantially pure geometric isomers, enantiomers, diastereomers, for example, by chromatography and/or fractional crystallization.
  • racemates of final products or intermediates can be resolved into the optical antipodes by methods known to those skilled in the art, e.g., by separation of the diastereomeric salts thereof.
  • Racemic products can also be resolved by chiral chromatography, e.g., high performance liquid chromatography (HPLC) using a chiral adsorbent.
  • HPLC high performance liquid chromatography
  • Preferred enantiomers can also be prepared by asymmetric syntheses. See, for example, Jacques, et al., Enantiomers, Racemates and Resolutions (Wiley Interscience, New York, 1981) ; Principles of Asymmetric Synthesis (2nd Ed. Robert E.
  • tautomer or “tautomeric form” refers to structural isomers of different energies which are interconvertible via a low energy barrier. Where tautomerization is possible (e.g. in solution) , a chemical equilibrium of tautomers can be reached.
  • protontautomers also known as prototropic tautomers
  • prototropic tautomers include interconversions via migration of a proton, such as keto-enol and imine-enamine isomerizations.
  • pharmaceutically acceptable refers to those compounds, materials, compositions, and/or dosage forms which are, within the scope of sound medical judgment, suitable for use in contact with the tissues of patients without excessive toxicity, irritation, allergic response, or other problem or complication commensurate with a reasonable benefit/risk ratio, and are effective for their intended use.
  • substituted refers to the replacement of one or more hydrogen radicals in a given structure or radical with a specified substituent. Unless otherwise indicated, a substituent may substitute at any substitutable position of a radical. When more than one positions of a given structure can be substituted with one or more specified substituents, the substituents may be either the same or different at each position.
  • the term “subject” refers to an animal. Typically the animal is a mammal. A subject also refers to for example, primates (e.g., humans, male or female) , cows, sheep, goats, horses, dogs, cats, rabbits, rats, mice, fish, birds and the like. In certain embodiments, the subject is a primate. In yet other embodiments, the subject is a human.
  • primates e.g., humans, male or female
  • the subject is a primate.
  • the subject is a human.
  • patient refers to a human (including adults and children) or other animal. In one embodiment, “patient” refers to a human.
  • substituents of compounds disclosed herein are disclosed in groups or in ranges. It is specifically intended that the invention include each and every individual subcombination of the members of such groups and ranges.
  • C 1 -C 6 alkyl is specifically intended to individually disclose methyl, ethyl, C 3 alkyl, C 4 alkyl, C 5 alkyl, and C 6 alkyl.
  • linking substituents are described. Where the structure clearly requires a linking group, the Markush variables listed for that group are understood to be linking groups. For example, if the structure requires a linking group and the Markush group definition for that variable lists “alkyl” or “aryl” then it is understood that the “alkyl” or “aryl” represents a linking alkylene group or arylene group, respectively.
  • D or “ 2 H” refers to a single deuterium atom.
  • halogen and “halo” can be used interchangeably, which refer to Fluoro (F) , Chloro (Cl) , Bromo (Br) , or Iodo (I) .
  • heteroatom refers to oxygen, sulfur, nitrogen, phosphorus and silicon, including any oxidized form of nitrogen, sulfur, or phosphorus; primary, secondary, tertiary amines and quaternary ammonium salts forms; or a substitutable nitrogen of a heterocyclic ring, for example, N (as in 3, 4-dihydro-2H-pyrrolyl) , NH (as in pyrrolidinyl) or NR’ (as in N-substituted pyrrolidinyl, wherein R’ is the substituent described herein) .
  • alkyl refers to a saturated linear or branched-chain monovalent hydrocarbon group of 1-20 carbon atoms, wherein the alkyl group is optionally substituted with one or more substituents described herein.
  • the alkyl group contains 1-6 carbon atoms.
  • the alkyl group contains 1-4 carbon atoms.
  • the alkyl group contains 1-3 carbon atoms.
  • alkyl examples include, but are not limited to, methyl (Me, -CH 3 ) , ethyl (Et, -CH 2 CH 3 ) , n-propyl (n-Pr, -CH 2 CH 2 CH 3 ) , i-propyl (i-Pr, -CH (CH 3 ) 2 ) , n-butyl (n-Bu, -CH 2 CH 2 CH 2 CH 3 ) , i-butyl (i-Bu, -CH 2 CH (CH 3 ) 2 ) , sec-butyl (s-Bu, -CH (CH 3 ) CH 2 CH 3 ) , tert-butyl (t-Bu, -C (CH 3 ) 3 ) , etc.
  • alkenyl refers to linear or branched-chain monovalent hydrocarbon radical of 2 to 12 carbon atoms with at least one site of unsaturation, i.e., a carbon-carbon sp 2 double bond, wherein the alkenyl radical may be optionally substituted with one or more substituents described herein, and includes radicals having “cis” and “trans” orientations, or alternatively, “E” and “Z” orientations.
  • the alkenyl contains 2 to 8 carbon atoms.
  • the alkenyl contains 2 to 6 carbon atoms.
  • the alkenyl contains 2 to 4 carbon atoms.
  • alkynyl refers to a linear or branched-chain monovalent hydrocarbon radical of 2 to 12 carbon atoms with at least one site of unsaturation, i.e., a carbon-carbon sp triple bond, wherein the alkynyl radical may be optionally substituted with one or more substituents described herein.
  • the alkynyl contains 2 to 8 carbon atoms.
  • the alkynyl contains 2 to 6 carbon atoms.
  • the alkynyl contains 2 to 4 carbon atoms. Examples of such groups include, but are not limited to, ethynyl (-C ⁇ CH) , propargyl (-CH 2 C ⁇ CH) , 1-propynyl (-C ⁇ C-CH 3 ) , and the like.
  • alkoxy refers to an alkyl group, as previously defined, attached to the parent molecular moiety via an oxygen atom. Unless otherwise specified, the alkoxy group contains 1-12 carbon atoms. In one embodiment, the alkoxy group contains 1-6 carbon atoms. In other embodiment, the alkoxy group contains 1-4 carbon atoms. In still other embodiment, the alkoxy group contains 1-3 carbon atoms. The alkoxy group may be optionally substituted with one or more substituents disclosed herein.
  • alkoxy examples include methoxy (MeO, -OCH 3 ) , ethoxy (EtO, -OCH 2 CH 3 ) , 1-propoxy (n-PrO, n-propoxy, -OCH 2 CH 2 CH 3 ) , 2-propoxy (i-PrO, i-propoxy, -OCH (CH 3 ) 2 ) , 1-butoxy (n-BuO, n-butoxy, -OCH 2 CH 2 CH 2 CH 3 ) , 2-methyl-1-propoxy (i-BuO, i-butoxy, -OCH 2 CH (CH 3 ) 2 ) , 2-butoxy (s-BuO, s-butoxy, -OCH (CH 3 ) CH 2 CH 3 ) , 2-methyl-2-propoxy (t-BuO, t-butoxy, -OC (CH 3 ) 3 ) , etc.
  • alkylthio refers to an alkyl group, as previously defined, attached to the parent molecular moiety via a sulfur atom. Unless otherwise specified, the alkylthio group contains 1-12 carbon atoms. In one embodiment, the alkylthio group contains 1-6 carbon atoms. In other embodiment, the alkylthio group contains 1-4 carbon atoms. In still other embodiment, the alkylthio group contains 1-3 carbon atoms. The alkylthio group may be optionally substituted with one or more substituents disclosed herein.
  • alkylthio examples include methylthio (MeS, -SCH 3 ) , ethylthio (EtS, -SCH 2 CH 3 ) , 1-propylthio (n-PrS, n-propylthio, -SCH 2 CH 2 CH 3 ) , 2-propylthio (i-PrS, i-propylthio, -SCH (CH 3 ) 2 ) , 1-butylthio (n-BuS, n-butylthio, -SCH 2 CH 2 CH 2 CH 3 ) , 2-methyl-l-propylthio (i-BuS, i-butylthio, -SCH 2 CH (CH 3 ) 2 ) , 2-butylthio (s-BuS, s-butylthio, -SCH (CH 3 ) CH 2 CH 3 ) , 2-methyl-2-propylthio (t-BuS, t-butylthio
  • alkylamino embraces “N-alkylamino” and “N, N-dialkylamino” , wherein an amino group is independently substituted with one or two alkyl radicals and wherein the alkyl group is as defined herein.
  • Suitable alkylamino radical may be monoalkylamino or dialkylamino.
  • Examples of the alkylamino radical include, but are not limited to, N-methylamino (methylamino) , N-ethylamino (ethylamino) , N, N-dimethylamino (dimethylamino) , N, N-diethylamino (diethylamino) , and the like. And wherein the alkylamino radical is optionally substituted with one or more substituents described herein.
  • hydroxy-substituted alkyl refers to an alkyl group substituted with one or more hydroxy groups, wherein the alkyl is as defined herein. Examples of such group include, but are not limited to, hydroxymethyl, 2-hydroxyethyl, 2-hydroxy-1-propyl, 3-hydroxy-1-propyl, 2, 3-dihydroxypropyl, and the like.
  • haloalkyl refers to an alkyl group substituted with one or more halogen atoms, wherein the alkyl is as defined herein. Examples of such group include, but are not limited to -CHF 2 , -CF 3 , -CHFCH 2 F, -CF 2 CHF 2 , -CH 2 CF 3 , -CHFCH 3 , -CH 2 CH 2 F, -CF 2 CH 3 , -CH 2 CF 2 CHF 2 , etc.
  • C 1 -C 6 haloalkyl contains C 1 -C 6 fluoroalkyl; in some embodiments, C 1 -C 4 haloalkyl contains C 1 -C 4 fluoroalkyl; in some embodiments, C 1 -C 2 haloalkyl contains C 1 -C 2 fluoroalkyl.
  • haloalkoxy refers to an alkoxy group substituted with one or more halogen atoms, wherein the alkoxy is as defined herein.
  • examples of such group include, but are not limited to -OCHF 2 , -OCF 3 , -OCHFCH 2 F, -OCF 2 CHF 2 , -OCH 2 CF 3 , -OCHFCH 3 , -OCH 2 CH 2 F, -OCF 2 CH 3 , -OCH 2 CF 2 CHF 2 , etc.
  • C 1 -C 6 haloalkoxy contains C 1 -C 6 fluoroalkoxy; in some embodiments, C 1 -C 4 haloalkoxy contains C 1 -C 4 fluoroalkoxy; in some embodiments, C 1 -C 2 haloalkoxy contains C 1 -C 2 fluoroalkoxy.
  • n is an integer, which typically describes the number of ring-forming atoms in a moiety where the number of ring-forming atoms is n.
  • a 5-10 membered heteroaryl means a heteroaryl consisting of 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, or 10 ring atoms.
  • piperidinyl is a heterocyclyl consisting of 6 atoms or a 6-membered heterocyclyl
  • pyridyl is a heteroaryl consisting of 6 atoms or a 6-membered heteroaryl.
  • carbocyclyl refers to a monovalent or multivalent, nonaromatic, saturated or partially unsaturated ring having 3 to 12 carbon atoms as a monocyclic, bicyclic or tricyclic ring system.
  • a carbobicyclyl group includes a spiro carbobicyclyl group or a fused carbobicyclyl group. Suitable carbocyclyl groups include, but are not limited to, cycloalkyl, cycloalkenyl and cycloalkynyl.
  • carbocyclyl group examples include cyclopropyl, cyclobutyl, cyclopentyl, 1-cyclopent-1-enyl, 1-cyclopent-2-enyl, 1-cyclopent-3-enyl, cyclohexyl, 1-cyclohex-1-enyl, 1-cyclohex-2-enyl, 1-cyclohex-3-enyl, cyclohexadienyl, cycloheptyl, cyclooctyl, cyclononyl, cyclodecyl, cycloundecyl, cyclododecyl, and the like. Wherein the carbocyclyl group is optionally substituted with one or more substituents described herein.
  • cycloalkyl refers to a monovalent or multivalent saturated ring having 3 to 12 carbon atoms as a monocyclic, bicyclic, or tricyclic ring system. and wherein the bicyclic or tricyclic ring system may include fused ring, bridged ring and spiro ring.
  • the cycloalkyl group contains 3 to 10 carbon atoms.
  • the cycloalkyl group contains 3 to 8 carbon atoms.
  • the cycloalkyl group contains 3 to 6 carbon atoms.
  • cycloalkyl group examples include, but are not limited to, cyclopropyl, cyclobutyl, cyclopentyl, cyclohexyl, and the like.
  • the cycloalkyl radical is optionally substituted with one or more substituents described herein.
  • heterocycle refers to a saturated or partially unsaturated and nonaromatic monocyclic, bicyclic or tricyclic ring system containing 3 to 12 ring atoms, wherein the bicyclic or tricyclic ring system may include a fused ring, bridged ring and spiro ring. Wherein one or more atoms on the ring each are independently replaced by heteroatom, the heteroatom is as defined herein.
  • the heterocyclyl group is monocyclic heterocyclyl having 3-8 ring members (e.g., 2 to 6 carbon atoms and 1 to 3 heteroatoms selected from N, O, P and S, wherein the S or P is optionally substituted with one or more oxogen atoms to give the groups like SO or SO 2 , PO or PO 2 ) ; in other embodiment, the heterocyclyl group is a monocyclic heterocyclyl consisting of 3 to 6 ring atoms (2 to 5 carbon atoms and 1 to 3 heteroatoms selected from N, O, P, S; wherein S or P is optionally substituted with one or more oxygen atoms to give groups like SO or SO 2 , PO or PO 2 ) ; in yet other embodiment, the heterocyclyl group is bicyclic heterocyclyl having 7-12 ring members (e.g., 4 to 9 carbon atoms and 1 to 3 heteroatoms selected from N, O, P and S, wherein the S or P is optionally substituted with one or
  • the ring atom of the heterocyclic group may be a carbon atom radical or heteroatom radical.
  • ring sulfur atoms may be optionally oxidized to form S-oxides
  • ring nitrogen atoms may be optionally oxidized to form N-oxides.
  • heterocyclyl group examples include oxiranyl, azetidinyl, oxetanyl, thietanyl, pyrrolidinyl, 2-pyrrolinyl, 3-pyrrolinyl, pyrazolinyl, pyrazolidinyl, imidazolinyl, imidazolidinyl, tetrahydrofuranyl, dihydrofuranyl, tetrahydrothienyl, dihydrothienyl, 1, 3-dioxolanyl, dithiolanyl, tetrahydropyranyl, dihydropyranyl, 2H-pyranyl, 4H-pyranyl, tetrahydrothiopyranyl, piperidinyl, morpholinyl, thiomorpholinyl, piperazinyl, dioxanyl, dithianyl, thioxanyl, homopiperazinyl, homopiperidinyl, oxe
  • oxidized ring sulfur atoms of the heterocyclyl group include sulfolanyl, 1, 1-dioxo-thiomorpholinyl, and the like.
  • the heterocyclyl group is optionally substituted with one or more substituents described herein.
  • oxygen-containing heterocyclic ring refers to a heterocyclic ring containing at least one oxygen atom, and the heterocyclic ring may contain other heteroatoms such as N, S, P, etc. Wherein the heterocyclyl group is as defined herein. Some non-limiting examples of oxygen-containing heterocyclyl include and the like.
  • aryl refers to monocyclic, bicyclic and tricyclic carbocyclic ring systems having a total of six to fourteen ring members, or six to twelve ring members, or six to ten ring members, wherein at least one ring in the system is aromatic, wherein each ring in the system contains 3 to 7 ring members.
  • the aryl group is generally, but not necessarily bonded to the parent molecule through an aromatic ring of the aryl group.
  • aryl and “aromatic ring” can be used interchangeably herein. Examples of aryl may include phenyl, indenyl, naphthyl and anthracenyl.
  • the aryl radical is optionally substituted with one or more substituents described herein.
  • heteroaryl refers to monocyclic, bicyclic and tricyclic ring systems having a total of five to twelve ring members, or five to ten ring members, or five to six ring members, wherein at least one ring in the system is aromatic, and in which at least one ring system contains one or more heteroatoms, and wherein each ring system contains a 5 to 7 members ring.
  • the heteroaryl group is generally, but not necessarily bonded to the parent molecule through an aromatic ring of the heteroaryl group.
  • heteroaryl may be used interchangeably with the term “heteroaryl ring” , “aromatic heterocyclic” or the term “heteroaromatic compound” .
  • the heteroaryl group is optionally substituted with one or more substituents disclosed herein.
  • a 5-10 membered heteroaryl comprises 1, 2, 3 or 4 heteroatoms independently selected from O, S and N.
  • heteroaryl rings include 2-furanyl, 3-furanyl, N-imidazolyl, 2-imidazolyl, 4-imidazolyl, 5-imidazolyl, 3-isoxazolyl, 4-isoxazolyl, 5-isoxazolyl, 2-oxazolyl, 4-oxazolyl, 5-oxazolyl, N-pyrrolyl, 2-pyrrolyl, 3-pyrrolyl, 2-pyridyl, 3-pyridyl, 4-pyridyl, 2-pyrimidinyl, 4-pyrimidinyl, 5-pyrimidinyl, pyridazinyl (e.g., 3-pyridazinyl) , 2-thiazolyl, 4-thiazolyl, 5-thiazolyl, tetrazolyl (e.g., 5-tetrazolyl) , triazolyl (e.g., 2-triazolyl and 5-triazolyl) , 2-thienyl, 3-thien
  • protecting group refers to a substituent that is commonly employed to block or protect a particular functionality while reacting with other functional groups on the compound.
  • an “amino-protecting group” is a substituent attached to an amino group that blocks or protects the amino functionality in the compound. Suitable amino-protecting groups include acetyl, trifluoroacetyl, t-butoxy-carbonyl (BOC, Boc) , benzyloxycarbonyl (CBZ, Cbz) and 9-fluorenylmethylenoxy-carbonyl (Fmoc) .
  • a “hydroxy-protecting group” refers to a substituent of a hydroxy group that blocks or protects the hydroxy functionality.
  • Suitable hydroxy-protecting groups include trialkylsilyl, acetyl, benzoyl, and benzyl.
  • a “carboxy-protecting group” refers to a substituent of the carboxy group that blocks or protects the carboxy functionality.
  • Common carboxy-protecting groups include -CH 2 CH 2 SO 2 Ph, cyanoethyl, 2- (trimethylsilyl) ethyl, 2- (trimethylsilyl) ethoxy-methyl, 2- (p-toluenesulfonyl) ethyl, 2- (p-nitrophenylsulfonyl) -ethyl, 2- (diphenylphosphino) -ethyl, nitroethyl and the like.
  • prodrug refers to a compound that is transformed in vivo into a compound of Formula (I) , (II) , (III) or (IV) . Such a transformation can be affected, for example, by hydrolysis of the prodrug form in blood or enzymatic transformation to the parent form in blood or tissue.
  • Prodrugs of the compounds disclosed herein may be, for example, esters. Some common esters which have been utilized as prodrugs are phenyl esters, aliphatic (C 1-24 ) esters, acyloxymethyl esters, carbonates, carbamates and amino acid esters. For example, a compound disclosed herein that contains a hydroxy group may be acylated at this position in its prodrug form.
  • Other prodrug forms include phosphates, such as, those phosphate compounds derived from the phosphonation of a hydroxy group on the parent compound.
  • a “metabolite” is a product produced through metabolism in the body of a specified compound or salt thereof.
  • the metabolites of a compound may be identified using routine techniques known in the art and their activities determined using tests such as those described herein. Such products may result for example from oxidation, reduction, hydrolysis, amidation, deamidation, esterification, deesterification, enzyme cleavage, and the like, of the administered compound.
  • the invention includes metabolites of compounds disclosed herein, including metabolites produced by contacting a compound disclosed herein with a mammal for a sufficient time period.
  • a “pharmaceutically acceptable salts” refers to organic or inorganic salts of a compound disclosed herein.
  • Pharmaceutically acceptable salts are well known in the art. For example, S. M. Berge et al., describe pharmaceutically acceptable salts in detail in J. Pharmaceutical Sciences, 1977, 66: 1-19, which is incorporated herein by reference.
  • Some non-limiting examples of pharmaceutically acceptable and nontoxic salts include salts of an amino group formed with inorganic acids such as hydrochloric acid, hydrobromic acid, phosphoric acid, sulfuric acid and perchloric acid or with organic acids such as acetic acid, oxalic acid, maleic acid, tartaric acid, citric acid, succinic acid and malonic acid or by using other methods used in the art such as ion exchange.
  • inorganic acids such as hydrochloric acid, hydrobromic acid, phosphoric acid, sulfuric acid and perchloric acid
  • organic acids such as acetic acid, oxalic acid, maleic acid, tartaric acid, citric acid, succinic acid and malonic acid or by using other methods used in the art such as ion exchange.
  • salts include adipate, alginate, ascorbate, aspartate, benzenesulfonate, benzoate, bisulfate, borate, butyrate, camphanic acid salt, camphorsulfonate, cyclopentanepropionate, digluconate, dodecylsulfate, ethanesulfonate, formate, fumarate, glucoheptonate, glycerophosphate, gluconate, hemisulfate, heptanoate, hexanoate, hydroiodide, 2-hydroxy-ethanesulfonate, lactobionate, lactate, laurate, laurylsulfate, malate, malonate, methanesulfonate, 2-naphthalenesulfonate, nicotinate, nitrate, oleate, palmitate, pamoate, pectinate, persulfate, 3-phenylpropylprop
  • Salts derived from appropriate bases include alkali metal, alkaline earth metal, ammonium and N+ (C 1-4 alkyl) 4 salts. This invention also envisions the quaternization of any basic nitrogen-containing groups of the compounds disclosed herein. Water or oil soluble or dispersable products may be obtained by such quaternization.
  • Representative alkali or alkaline earth metal salts include sodium, lithium, potassium, calcium, magnesium, and the like.
  • Further pharmaceutically acceptable salts include, when appropriate, nontoxic ammonium, quaternary ammonium, and amine cations formed using counterions such as halide, hydroxide, carboxylate, sulfate, phosphate, nitrate, C 1 -C 8 sulfonate or aryl sulfonate.
  • solvate refers to an association or complex of one or more solvent molecules and a compound disclosed herein.
  • solvent that form solvates include water, isopropanol, ethanol, methanol, dimethylsulfoxide (DMSO) , ethyl acetate, acetic acid, ethanolamine or a combination thereof.
  • DMSO dimethylsulfoxide
  • hydrate refers to the complex where the solvent molecule is water.
  • hydrate can be used when said solvent is water.
  • one water molecule is associated with one molecule of the compounds disclosed herein, such as a hydrate.
  • more than one water molecule may be associated with one molecule of the compounds disclosed herein, such as a dihydrate.
  • less than one water molecule may be associated with one molecule of the compounds disclosed herein, such as a hemihydrate.
  • all the hydrates of the invention retain the biological effectiveness of the non-hydrate form of the compounds disclosed herein.
  • treat refers in one embodiment, to ameliorating the disease or disorder (i.e., slowing or arresting or reducing the development of the disease or at least one of the clinical symptoms thereof) .
  • “treat” refers to alleviating or ameliorating at least one physical parameter including those which may not be discernible by the patient.
  • “treat” , “treating” or “treatment” refers to modulating the disease or disorder, either physically, (e.g., stabilization of a discernible symptom) , physiologically, (e.g., stabilization of a physical parameter) , or both.
  • “treat” , “treating” or “treatment” refers to preventing or delaying the onset or development or progression of the disease or disorder.
  • preventing refers to a reduction in risk of acquiring a disease or disorder (i.e., causing at least one of the clinical symptoms of the disease not to develop in a subject that may be exposed to or predisposed to the disease but does not yet experience or display symptoms of the disease) .
  • N-oxides of the compound disclosed herein are also included in the invention.
  • N-oxides of the compound of the invention can be prepared by oxidizing corresponding nitrogen-containing alkaline substances with common oxidants (such as hydrogen peroxide) under a rising temperature in the presence of an acid, such as acetic acid, or by reacting with peracid in a suitable solvent, e.g., by reacting with peracetic acid in dichloromethane, ethyl acetate or methyl acetate, or by reacting with 3-chloroperoxybenzoic acid in chloroform or dichloromethane.
  • common oxidants such as hydrogen peroxide
  • the compound of Formula (I) , (II) , (III) or (IV) can exist in salt forms.
  • the salt is a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof.
  • pharmaceutically acceptable refers to that the substance or composition must be chemically and/or toxicologically compatible with the other ingredients comprising a formulation, and/or the mammal being treated therewith.
  • the salt may not be a pharmaceutically acceptable salt, may be an intermediate used for preparing and/or purifying the compound of Formula (I) , (II) , (III) or (IV) and/or isolating an enantiomer from the compound of Formula (I) , (II) , (III) or (IV) .
  • the pharmaceutically acceptable salts of the present invention can be synthesized from a basic or acidic moiety, by conventional chemical methods.
  • such salts can be prepared by reacting free acid forms of these compounds with a stoichiometric amount of the appropriate base (such as Na, Ca, Mg, or K hydroxide, carbonate, bicarbonate or the like) , or by reacting free base forms of these compounds with a stoichiometric amount of the appropriate acid.
  • a stoichiometric amount of the appropriate base such as Na, Ca, Mg, or K hydroxide, carbonate, bicarbonate or the like
  • Such reactions are typically carried out in water or in an organic solvent, or in a mixture of the two.
  • use of non-aqueous media like ether, ethyl acetate, ethanol, isopropanol, or acetonitrile is desirable, where practicable.
  • any formula given herein is also intended to represent isotopically unenriched forms as well as isotopically enriched forms of the compounds.
  • Isotopically enriched compounds have the structure depicted by the general formula given herein, except that one or more atoms are replaced by atom (s) having a selected atomic mass or mass number.
  • isotopes that can be incorporated into compounds of the invention inc lude isotopes of hydrogen, carbon, nitrogen, oxygen, phosphorous, sulfur, fluorine, and chlorine, such as 2 H (deuterium, D) , 3 H, 11 C, 13 C, 14 C, 15 N, 17 O, 18 O, 18 F, 31 P, 32 P, 35 S, 36 Cl, 125 I, respectively.
  • an intermediate for preparing the compound of Formula (I) , (II) , (III) or (IV) is provided herein.
  • a pharmaceutical composition comprising the compound disclosed herein.
  • the pharmaceutical composition disclosed herein further comprises at least one of pharmaceutically acceptable carrier, excipient, adjuvant, solvent or a combination thereof.
  • the pharmaceutical composition can be liquid, solid, semi-solid, gel or spray.
  • the 8-substituted styryl xanthine derivatives, pharmaceutically acceptable salts, pharmaceutical formulations and compositions thereof disclosed herein can be used to antagonize adenosine A 2A receptors, and have potential therapeutic use for adenosine A 2A receptor-related diseases, especially PD (Parkinson's disease) .
  • the present invention further describes the synthetic method of the compound.
  • the compounds of the invention show good bioactivity.
  • R 1 , R 2 , R 3 , R 4 , R 5 , R 6 , R 7 and R 8 are as defined herein.
  • R 0 is - (CH 2 ) m - (3-8 membered oxygen-containing heterocyclic ring) , wherein the 3-8 membered oxygen-containing heterocyclic ring is optionally substituted with 1, 2 or 3 R 9 groups; wherein m and R 9 are as defined herein.
  • m is 0, 1, 2 or 3.
  • R 0 is wherein is optionally substituted by 1, 2 or 3 R 9 groups, x is 0, 1, 2 or 3, y is 1, 2 or 3; wherein m and R 9 are as defined herein.
  • R 0 is
  • provided herein is a compound having Formula (II) or a stereoisomer, a tautomer, an N-oxide, a hydrate, a solvate, a metabolite, a pharmaceutically acceptable salt or a prodrug thereof,
  • R 1 , R 2 , R 3 , R 4 , R 5 , R 6 , R 7 and R 0 are as defined herein.
  • R 1 , R 2 , R 3 , R 4 , R 5 , R 6 , R 8 and R 0 are as defined herein.
  • R 1 , R 2 , R 3 , R 4 , R 5 , R 7 , R 8 and R 0 are as defined herein.
  • the compound disclosed herein has one of the following structures or a stereoisomer, a tautomer, an N-oxide, a hydrate, a solvate, a metabolite, a pharmaceutically acceptable salt or a prodrug thereof, but is in no way limited to:
  • composition comprising the compound of Formula (I) , (II) , (III) or (IV) .
  • the pharmaceutical composition disclosed herein further comprises a pharmaceutically acceptable excipient, a carrier, an adjuvant or a combination thereof.
  • the pharmaceutical composition according to the present invention further comprises an additional therapeutic agent, wherein the additional therapeutic agent is monoamine oxidase B-type inhibitors such as selegiline and rasagiline, dopamine agonists such as bromocriptine, cabergoline, pergolide, pramipexole, ropinirole and rotigotine, anticholinergic drugs such as trihexphenidyl, benztropine, orfenadrine and procyclidine, glutamate antagonists such as amantadine, levodopa (optionally in combination with a carboxylase inhibitor such as carbidopa and benzylhydrazine, a COMT inhibitor such as tocapone and entacapone or both a carboxylase inhibitor and a COMT inhibitor) or any combination thereof.
  • the additional therapeutic agent is monoamine oxidase B-type inhibitors such as selegiline and rasagiline, dopamine agonists such as bromocriptine, cabergoline, per
  • the present invention relates to use of the compound represented by formula (I) , (II) , (III) or (IV) or the pharmaceutical composition thereof in the manufacture of a medicament for preventing, treating or lessening an adenosine A 2A receptor-related disease in a patient.
  • an adenosine A 2A receptor-related disease is Parkinson's disease, pain, depression, dementia, stroke, myocardial ischemia, asthma, alcohol withdrawal, dyskinesia syndrome, restless leg syndrome, dystonia, systemic stiffness, neurodegenerative disorders or osteoporosis.
  • the adenosine A 2A receptor-related disease is PD (Parkinson's disease) .
  • the present invention relates to use of the compound represented by formula (I) , (II) , (III) or (IV) or the pharmaceutical composition thereof in the manufacture of a medicament for antagonizing adenosine A 2A receptor.
  • the present invention relates to the compound represented by formula (I) , (II) , (III) or (IV) or the pharmaceutical composition thereof for use in preventing, treating or lessening an adenosine A 2A receptor-related disease in a subject.
  • an adenosine A 2A receptor-related disease is Parkinson's disease, pain, depression, dementia, stroke, myocardial ischemia, asthma, alcohol withdrawal, dyskinesia syndrome, restless leg syndrome, dystonia, systemic stiffness, neurodegenerative disorders or osteoporosis.
  • the present invention relates to the compound represented by formula (I) , (II) , (III) or (IV) or the pharmaceutical composition thereof for use in antagonizing adenosine A 2A receptor.
  • the present invention relates to a method of preventing, treating or lessening an adenosine A 2A receptor-related disease, which comprises administering a therapeutically effective dose of the compound represented by formula (I) , (II) , (III) or (IV) or the pharmaceutical composition thereof.
  • an adenosine A 2A receptor-related disease is Parkinson's disease, pain, depression, dementia, stroke, myocardial ischemia, asthma, alcohol withdrawal, dyskinesia syndrome, restless leg syndrome, dystonia, systemic stiffness, neurodegenerative disorders or osteoporosis.
  • the present invention relates to a method of antagonizing adenosine A 2A receptor, which comprises administering a therapeutically effective dose of the compound represented by formula (I) , (II) , (III) or (IV) or the pharmaceutical composition thereof.
  • provided herein is a method of preparing, separating or purifying the compound of Formula (I) , (II) , (III) or (IV) .
  • the invention provides a pharmaceutical composition containing a compound of formula (I) , (II) , (III) or (IV) or an independent stereisomer thereof, a racemic mixture or non-racemic mixture of the stereisomer thereof, or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt or solvent thereof.
  • the pharmaceutical composition further comprises at least one pharmaceutically acceptable carrier, adjuvant or excipient, and optionally other treating and/or preventing ingredients.
  • a suitable carrier, adjuvant or excipient is well known for the technical personnel in the field and was described in detail in Ansel H. C. et al., Ansel’s Pharmaceutical Dosage Forms and Drug Delivery Systems (2004) Lippincott, Williams &Wilkins, Philadelphia; Gennaro A. R. et al., Remington: The Science and Practice of Pharmacy (2000) Lippincott, Williams &Wilkins, Philadelphia; and Rowe R. C., Handbook of Pharmaceutical Excipients (2005) Pharmaceutical Press, Chicago.
  • “Pharmaceutically acceptable excipient” as used herein means a pharmaceutically acceptable material, composition or vehicle involved in giving form or consistency to the pharmaceutical composition. Each excipient must be compatible with the other ingredients of the pharmaceutical composition when commingled, such that interactions which would substantially reduce the efficacy of the compound of the invention when administered to a patient and would result in pharmaceutically unacceptable compositions are avoided. In addition, each excipient must be of sufficiently high purity to render it is pharmaceutically acceptable.
  • Suitable pharmaceutically acceptable excipients will vary depending upon the particular dosage form chosen.
  • suitable pharmaceutically acceptable excipients may be chosen for a particular function that they may serve in the composition.
  • certain pharmaceutically acceptable excipients may be chosen for their ability to facilitate the production of uniform dosage forms.
  • Certain pharmaceutically acceptable excipients may be chosen for their ability to facilitate the production of stable dosage forms.
  • Certain pharmaceutically acceptable excipients may be chosen for their ability to facilitate the carrying or transporting the compound of the present invention once administered to the patient from one organ, or portion of the body, to another organ, or portion of the body.
  • Certain pharmaceutically acceptable excipients may be chosen for their ability to enhance patient compliance.
  • excipients examples include lactose, glucose, sucrose, sorbitol, mannitol, starch, arabic gum, calcium phosphate, alginate, xanthate, gelatin, calcium silicate, microcrystalline cellulose, polyvinylpyrrolidone, cellulose, water, syrup and methyl cellulose.
  • Suitable pharmaceutically acceptable excipients further include the following types: diluents, fillers, binders, disintegrants, lubricants (such as talc powder, magnesium stearate and mineral oil) , glidants, granulating agents, coating agents, wetting agents, solvents, co-solvents, suspending agents, emulsifiers, sweetners, flavoring agents, flavor masking agents, coloring agents, anticaking agents, humectants, chelating agents, plasticizers, viscosity increasing agents, antioxidants, preservatives (such as methyl hydroxybenzoate and propyl hydroxybenzoate) , stabilizers, surfactants-and buffering agents.
  • diluents fillers, binders, disintegrants, lubricants (such as talc powder, magnesium stearate and mineral oil) , glidants, granulating agents, coating agents, wetting agents, solvents, co-solvents, suspending agents,
  • certain pharmaceutically acceptable excipients may serve more than one function and may serve alternative functions depending on how much of the excipient is present in the formulation and what other ingredients are present in the formulation.
  • the compounds of the invention can be prepared by known methods in the field so that the active components will be released rapidly, continuously or controllably after administration in patients.
  • Skilled artisans possess the knowledge and skill in the art to enable them to select suitable pharmaceutically acceptable excipients in appropriate amounts for use in the invention.
  • resources that are available to the skilled artisan which describe pharmaceutically acceptable excipients and may be useful in selecting suitable pharmaceutically acceptable excipients. Examples include Remington's Pharmaceutical Sciences (Mack Publishing Company) , The Handbook of Pharmaceutical Additives (Gower Publishing Limited) , and The Handbook of Pharmaceutical Excipients (the American Pharmaceutical Association and the Pharmaceutical Press) .
  • Suitable pharmaceutically acceptable carriers depend on the pharmaceutical form and are known to those skilled in the art.
  • a “pharmaceutically acceptable carrier” includes any and all solvents and solvent mixtures, coatings, complexing agents, solid carriers, dispersion media, surface active excipients, antibacterial and antifungal drugs, isotonic and absorption delaying agents for pharmaceutically active substances, and mixtures thereof, which are also known in the art.
  • pharmaceutically acceptable carriers include those having a component selected from the group consisting of lactose, gelatin, sugar alcohol (eg. starch, mannitol, corn starch, etc. ) , vegetable oil, talc, magnesium stearate, colloidal silicon dioxide, carboxymethyl cellulose, microcrystalline cellulose, sodium lauryl sulfate, buffered aqueous solution, copovidone, polysorbate, ethanol, propylene glycol, polyglycol (preferably polyethylene glycol, such as PEG400) , 80 (i.e.
  • ⁇ -cyclodextrin ⁇ -CD or hydroxypropyl- ⁇ -cyclodextrin (HP- ⁇ -CD)
  • bile acid lipid, such as salts of animal or plant phospholipids, micelle-forming agent, oil such as corn oil and a mixture of two or more of the aforementioned components.
  • lipid such as salts of animal or plant phospholipids
  • micelle-forming agent oil such as corn oil and a mixture of two or more of the aforementioned components.
  • Pharmaceutically acceptable carriers may be solid or liquid carriers for the preparation of pharmaceutical compositions using compounds described in the present invention.
  • Solid formulations include powders, tablets, dispersible granules, capsules, cachets, and suppositories. Powders and tablets may contain about 5%to about 95%active ingredients.
  • Suitable solid carriers are known in the field, such as magnesium carbonate, magnesium stearate, talc powder, sugar or lactose. Tablets, powders, flat capsules and capsules may be used as solid dosage forms suitable for oral administration. Examples of medicinal carriers and methods for preparing various compositions can be obtained as follows: A. Gennaro (ed. ) , Remington's Pharmaceutical Sciences, 18 th ed., 1990, Mack Publishing Company Co., Easton, Pennsylvania.
  • the invention relates to a pharmaceutical composition described herein, which forms a lipid-based drug delivery system (DDS) in an aqueous medium.
  • the pharmaceutical composition includes at least one surfactant in addition to at least one of the compounds having formula (I) , (II) , (III) or (IV) or a salt thereof.
  • suitable surfactants are as described above.
  • the lipid-based drug delivery system forms the following structure: (1) liposomes (i.e., dispersed closed bilayer assemblies of lamellar phases in water) ; (2) nanoparticles of non-lamellar phases (such as cubes, hexagons, sponges) ; or (3) micelles, emulsion, microemulsion (i.e., simple self-assembling structure of lipids and surfactants) .
  • lipid-based drug delivery systems that form micelles, emulsions, or microemulsions are preferred.
  • a suitable surfactant or surfactant mixture for forming micelles, emulsions, or microemulsions has a hydrophilic-lipophilic balance (HLB-value) of generally about 8-18, about 10-18, or about 12-16.
  • Lipid-based drug delivery systems form self-emulsifying drug delivery systems (SEDDS) or self-microemulsifying drug delivery systems (SMEDDS)
  • SEDDS and SMEDDS are a mixture of an oil (i.e., a lipid, such as a compound of formula (I) or a salt thereof) , at least one surfactant, optionally at least one co-solvent, and optionally at least one co-surfactant.
  • the mixture is isotropic, when introduced into the water phase under gentle agitation, it spontaneously emulsifies to form an oil-in-water emulsifier.
  • Gentle agitation may be provided, for example, by the mobility of the stomach.
  • compositions of the invention are prepared using techniques and methods known to those skilled in the art. Some of the methods commonly used in the art are described in Remington's Pharmaceutical Sciences (Mack Publishing Company) .
  • another aspect of the present invention is related to a method for preparing a pharmaceutical composition, wherein the pharmaceutical composition contains the compound disclosed herein and pharmaceutically acceptable excipient, carrier, adjuvant, vehicle or a combination thereof, and the method comprises mixing various ingredients.
  • the pharmaceutical composition containing the compound disclosed herein can be prepared at for example environment temperature and under barometric pressure.
  • dosage forms include those adapted for (1) oral administration such as tablets, capsules, caplets, pills, troches, powders, syrups, elixers, suspensions, solutions, emulsions, sachets, and cachets; (2) parenteral administration such as sterile solutions, suspensions, and powders for reconstitution; (3) transdermal administration such as transdermal patches; (4) rectal administration such as suppositories; (5) inhalation such as aerosols, solutions, and dry powders; and (6) topical administration such as creams, ointments, lotions, solutions, pastes, sprays, foams, and gels.
  • oral administration such as tablets, capsules, caplets, pills, troches, powders, syrups, elixers, suspensions, solutions, emulsions, sachets, and cachets
  • parenteral administration such as sterile solutions, suspensions, and powders for reconstitution
  • transdermal administration such as transdermal patches
  • rectal administration such as sup
  • the compounds or pharmaceutical compositions of the invention can be administered in a suitable manner, for example, by the oral, intravenous, subcutaneous, intramuscular or intrathecal route. Preferably it is administered orally, enterally or parenterally. Most preferred is oral administration.
  • the compounds of the invention can be administered orally, for example, with an inert diluent or with an absorbable food carrier, enclosed in capsules, compressed into tablets, or incorporated directly into dietary foods.
  • the active compound is mixed with excipients and used in the form of absorbable tablet, buccal tablet, tablet, capsule, soft gel capsule, pill, powder, dispersion, lozenge, suspension, syrup, elixir, solution, liquid and the like.
  • Such pharmaceutical compositions and formulations comprise a therapeutically effective amount of the active ingredient, which is usually present at a level of at least 1 wt%of the composition being administered.
  • the pharmaceutical composition comprises about 5-80 wt%of the active compound.
  • tablets, capsules, pills, lozenges and the like contain one or more of the following: excipients such as dicalcium phosphate; lubricants such as magnesium stearate; binding agents such as acacia, tragacanth, corn starch or white gelatin; disintegrating agents such as alginic acid, corn starch, potato starch, etc.; flavoring agents such as wintergreen oil, peppermint; sweetness agents such as saccharin, sucrose or lactose; cherry flavor.
  • excipients such as dicalcium phosphate
  • lubricants such as magnesium stearate
  • binding agents such as acacia, tragacanth, corn starch or white gelatin
  • disintegrating agents such as alginic acid, corn starch, potato starch, etc.
  • flavoring agents such as wintergreen oil, peppermint
  • sweetness agents such as saccharin, sucrose or lactose
  • cherry flavor such as a capsule, it may contain, in addition to materials of the above type, a liquid
  • a pharmaceutically acceptable derivative includes, but is not limited to, pharmaceutically acceptable prodrugs, salts, esters, salts of such esters, or any other adduct or derivative which upon administration to a patient in need thereof is capable of providing, directly or indirectly, a compound as described herein, or a metabolite or residue thereof.
  • the compounds disclosed herein can be prepared to oral. In the other embodiment, the compounds disclosed herein can be prepared to inhalation. In the still other embodiment, the compounds disclosed herein can be prepared to nasal administration. In the yet other embodiment, the compounds disclosed herein can be prepared to transdermal administration. In the still yet other embodiments, the compounds disclosed herein can be prepared to topical administration.
  • compositions provided herein may be provided as compressed tablets, tablet triturates, chewable lozenges, rapidly dissolving tablets, multiple compressed tablets, or enteric-coating tablets, sugar-coated, or film-coated tablets.
  • Enteric-coated tablets are compressed tablets coated with substances that resist the action of stomach acid but dissolve or disintegrate in the intestine, thus protecting the active ingredients from the acidic environment of the stomach.
  • Enteric-coatings include, but are not limited to, fatty acids, fats, phenylsalicylate, waxes, shellac, ammoniated shellac, and cellulose acetate phthalates.
  • Sugar-coated tablets are compressed tablets surrounded by a sugar coating, which may be beneficial in covering up objectionable tastes or odors and in protecting the tablets from oxidation.
  • Film-coated tablets are compressed tablets that are covered with a thin layer or film of a water-soluble material.
  • Film coatings include, but are not limited to, hydroxyethylcellulose, sodium carboxymethylcellulose, polyethylene glycol 4000, and cellulose acetate phthalate. Film coating imparts the same general characteristics as sugar coating.
  • Multiple compressed tablets are compressed tablets made by more than one compression cycle, including layered tablets, and press-coated or dry-coated tablets.
  • the tablet dosage forms may be prepared from the active ingredient in powdered, crystalline, or granular forms, alone or in combination with one or more carriers or excipients described herein, including binders, disintegrants, controlled-release polymers, lubricants, diluents, and/or colorants. Flavoring and sweetening agents are especially useful in the formation of chewable tablets and lozenges.
  • the pharmaceutical compositions provided herein may be provided as soft or hard capsules, which can be made from gelatin, methylcellulose, starch, or calcium alginate.
  • the hard gelatin capsule also known as the dry-filled capsule (DFC) , consists of two sections, one slipping over the other, thus completely enc losing the active ingredient.
  • the soft elastic capsule (SEC) is a soft, globular shell, such as a gelatin shell, which is plasticized by the addition of glycerin, sorbitol, or a similar polyol.
  • the soft gelatin shells may contain a preservative to prevent the growth of microorganisms. Suitable preservatives are those as described herein, including methyl-and propyl-parabens, and sorbic acid.
  • liquid, semisolid, and solid dosage forms may be encapsulated in a capsule.
  • suitable liquid and semisolid dosage forms include solutions and suspensions in propylene carbonate, vegetable oils, or triglycerides.
  • Capsules containing such solutions can be prepared as described in U.S. Pat. Nos. 4,328,245; 4,409,239; and 4,410,545.
  • the capsules may also be coated as known by those of skill in the art in order to modify or sustain dissolution of the active ingredient.
  • the compound of formula (I) , (II) , (III) or (IV) is contained in a capsule.
  • Capsule can be hard or soft.
  • Capsules can be made from any suitable film-forming material, including, for example, cellulose derivatives, polyvinyl alcohol, gelatin, pectin, amylopectin or other dextran, modified starches such as starch ethers and oxidized starch, especially hydroxyethylated starch (HES) or hydroxypropylated starch (HPS) alone or a mixture thereof.
  • HES hydroxyethylated starch
  • HPS hydroxypropylated starch
  • Cellulose derivatives used to make capsules include, but are not limited to, methyl cellulose, ethyl cellulose, cellulose acetate, hydroxyethyl cellulose, hydroxymethyl cellulose, hydroxypropyl cellulose, hydroxypropylmethyl cellulose, sodium carboxymethyl cellulose, cellulose trimellitate, cellulose acetate phthalate, hydroxypropyl methyl cellulose phthalate, hydroxypropyl methyl cellulose succinate, and a mixture thereof.
  • Preferred cellulose derivatives are methyl cellulose, ethyl cellulose, hydroxyethyl cellulose, hydroxymethyl cellulose, hydroxypropyl cellulose and hydroxypropylmethyl cellulose.
  • compositions provided herein may be provided in liquid and semisolid dosage forms, including emulsions, solutions, suspensions, elixirs, and syrups.
  • An emulsion is a two-phase system, in which one liquid is dispersed in the form of small globules throughout another liquid, which can be oil-in-water or water-in-oil.
  • Emulsions may include a pharmaceutically acceptable non-aqueous liquids or solvent, emulsifying agent, and preservative.
  • Suspensions may include a pharmaceutically acceptable suspending agent and preservative.
  • Aqueous alcoholic solutions may include a pharmaceutically acceptable acetal, such as a di (lower alkyl) acetal of a lower alkyl aldehyde, e.g., acetaldehyde diethyl acetal; and a water-miscible solvent having one or more hydroxy groups, such as propylene glycol and ethanol.
  • Elixirs are clear, sweetened, and hydroalcoholic solutions.
  • Syrups are concentrated aqueous solutions of a sugar, for example, sucrose, and may also contain a preservative.
  • a solution in a polyethylene glycol may be diluted with a sufficient quantity of a pharmaceutically acceptable liquid carrier, e.g., water, to be measured conveniently for administration.
  • the pharmaceutical composition of the invention can be prepared to a dosage form adapted for administration to a patient by inhalation, for example as a dry powder, an aerosol, a suspension, or a solution composition.
  • the pharmaceutical compositions disclosed in the invention is directed to a dosage form adapted for administration to a patient by inhalation as a dry powder.
  • the pharmaceutical compositions disclosed in the invention is directed to a dosage form adapted for administration to a patient by inhalation as a nebulizer.
  • Dry powder compositions for delivery to the lung by inhalation typically comprise a compound disclosed herein as a finely divided powder together with one or more pharmaceutically-acceptable excipients as finely divided powders.
  • compositions particularly suited for use in dry powders are known to those skilled in the art and include lactose, starch, mannitol, and mono-, di-, and polysaccharides.
  • the finely divided powder may be prepared by, for example, micronization and milling.
  • the size-reduced (eg. micronized) compound can be defined by a D 50 value of about 1 to about 10 microns (for example as measured using laser diffraction) .
  • compositions adapted for transdermal administration may be presented as discrete patches intended to remain in intimate contact with the epidermis of the patient for a prolonged period of time.
  • the active ingredient may be delivered from the patch by iontophoresis as generally described in Pharmaceutical Research, 3 (6) , 318 (1986) .
  • compositions adapted for topical administration may be formulated as ointments, creams, suspensions, lotions, powders, solutions, pastes, gels, sprays, aerosols or oils.
  • Ointments, creams and gels may, for example, be formulated with an aqueous or oily base with the addition of suitable thickening and/or gelling agent and/or solvents.
  • bases may thus, for example, include water and/or an oil such as liquid paraffin or a vegetable oil such as arachis oil or castor oil, or a solvent such as polyethylene glycol.
  • Thickening agents and gelling agents which may be used according to the nature of the base include soft paraffin, aluminium stearate, cetostearyl alcohol, polyethylene glycols, woolfat, beeswax, carboxypolymethylene and cellulose derivatives, and/or glyceryl monostearate and/or non-ionic emulsifying agents.
  • the compounds disclosed herein can also be coupled to soluble polymers as targeted medicament carriers.
  • Such polymers may encompass polyvinylpyrrolidone, pyran copolymer, polyhydroxypropylmethacrylamidophenol, polyhydroxyethylaspartamidophenol or polyethylene oxide polylysine substituted by palmitoyl radicals.
  • the compounds may furthermore be coupled to a class of biodegradable polymers which are suitable for achieving controlled release of a medicament, for example polylactic acid, poly-epsilon-caprolactone, polyhydroxybutyric acid, polyorthoesters, polyacetals, polydihydroxypyrans, polycyanoacrylates and crosslinked or amphipathic block copolymers of hydrogels.
  • compositions provided herein may be administered parenterally by injection, infusion, or implantation, for local or systemic administration.
  • Parenteral administration includes intravenous, intraarterial, intraperitoneal, intrathecal, intraventricular, intraurethral, intrasternal, intracranial, intramuscular, intrasynovial, and subcutaneous administration.
  • Dispersions can also be prepared in liquid like polyethylene glycols, glycerol and a mixture thereof, and be prepared in oil. Under ordinary conditions of storage and use, these preparations contain a preservative to prevent the growth of microorganisms.
  • compositions suitable for injectable use include sterile aqueous solutions (in the case of water solubility) or dispersions and sterile powders for temporary formulation of sterile injectable solutions or dispersions.
  • the form is preferably sterile and fluid, to the extent that injectability is prone to occur. It must be stable under the conditions of manufacture and storage, and must prevent contamination of microorganisms such as bacteria and fungi.
  • the carrier can be a solvent or dispersion medium containing, for example, water, ethanol, polyol (for example, glycerol, propylene glycol, liquid polyethylene glycol, and the like) , suitable mixtures thereof, and vegetable oils.
  • proper fluidity can be maintained by maintaining the required particle size (in the case of dispersions) , by using a coating such as lecithin, and by using a surfactant.
  • Preventing contamination of microorganisms can be achieved through various antibacterial and antifungal drugs, such as phenol, chlorobutanol, thimerosal, sorbic acid, paraben, etc.
  • isotonic agents such as sodium chloride or sugars.
  • Prolonged absorption of injectable compositions can be achieved by using delayed absorption agents such as gelatin and aluminum monostearate in the composition.
  • a sterile injectable solution is prepared by incorporating a desired amount of a compound of Formula (I) , (II) , (III) or (IV) with a variety of other ingredients listed above in a suitable solvent, and then filtering and sterilizing if necessary.
  • dispersion is prepared by incorporating various bactericidally active ingredients into a sterile vehicle, which contains a basic dispersion medium and the required other ingredients listed above.
  • the preferred methods of preparation are freeze drying and vacuum drying techniques.
  • compositions provided herein may be formulated in any dosage forms that are suitable for parenteral administration, including solutions, suspensions, emulsions, micelles, liposomes, microspheres, nanosystems, and solid forms suitable for solutions or suspensions in liquid prior to injection.
  • dosage forms can be prepared according to conventional methods known to those skilled in the art of pharmaceutical science (see, Remington: The Science and Practice of Pharmacy, supra) .
  • compositions intended for parenteral administration may include one or more pharmaceutically acceptable carriers and excipients, including, but not limited to, aqueous vehicles, water-miscible vehicles, non-aqueous vehicles, antimicrobial agents or preservatives against the growth of microorganisms, stabilizers, solubility enhancers, isotonic agents, buffering agents, antioxidants, local anesthetics, suspending and dispersing agents, wetting or emulsifying agents, complexing agents, sequestering or chelating agents, cryoprotectants, lyoprotectants, thickening agents, pH adjusting agents, and inert gases.
  • aqueous vehicles water-miscible vehicles
  • non-aqueous vehicles non-aqueous vehicles
  • antimicrobial agents or preservatives against the growth of microorganisms stabilizers, solubility enhancers, isotonic agents, buffering agents, antioxidants, local anesthetics, suspending and dispersing agents, wetting or emuls
  • the pharmaceutical composition provided herein can be administered by rectal in suppository form, in which the drug was mixed with suitable non-irritating excipients such as cocoa oil and glycerol ester synthesized by polyethylene glycol, and the mixture was solid at room temperature and can be released when liquefied or dissolved in the rectal cavity. Because of individual differences, the severity of symptoms between individuals will have great difference, and every drug has its unique therapeutic properties. Therefore, the exact way of administration, dosage form and treatment plan for each individual should be determined by a practicing physician.
  • compositions provided herein may be formulated as immediate or modified release dosage forms, including delayed-, sustained-, pulsed-, controlled-, targeted-, and programmed-release forms.
  • a sustained release dosage form may be considered by incorporating the compound into an ion exchange resin, which may optionally be coated with a diffusion barrier coating to modify the release properties of the resin.
  • terapéuticaally effective amount refers to the total amount of each active component that is sufficient to show a useful treatment effect.
  • the drug amount of administration or balance in the body sufficient to treat, cure, or alleviate symptoms of a disease.
  • the effective amount required for a special treatment depends on a variety of factors, including diseases, the severity of the disease, the activity of the used specific drug, the mode of administration, the clearance rate of the specific drug, the duration of therapy, the combination of drugs, age, weight, gender, diet and patient's health, and so on.
  • the description of other factors that need to be considered for “therapeutically effective amount” in this field can be found in Gilman et al., eds., Goodman And Gilman’s : .
  • the compound is compounded in an effective amount with a suitable pharmaceutically acceptable carrier and optionally other suitable additives and excipients in the form of dosage units as described above.
  • the dosage of the compound of formula (I) , (II) , (III) or (IV) depends on the route of administration, the age and weight of the patient, the nature and severity of the disease to be treated, and other factors. In various embodiments, the daily dose is typically 2 to 2000 mg/d, such as 50 to 500 mg/d.
  • subranges are selected based on lower limit values of 2, 5, 10, 20, 25, 50, 100, 200, 250 or 400 mg/d and and upper limit values of 50, 100, 200, 250, 500, 600, 750, 1000, 1500 and 2000 mg/d.
  • the lower and upper limit values can be combined to give a suitable dosage range, which will depend on various factors such as those described above.
  • the daily dose may be administered in a single dosage unit per day or in two or more dosage units per day.
  • a dosage unit form as used in the present invention refers to a completely discrete unit suitable as a single dose for a mammal to be treated. Each unit contains a predetermined amount of a compound of Formula (I) , (II) , (III) or (IV) , which is designed to produce a desired therapeutic effect together with a required pharmaceutical carrier.
  • the details of the new dosage unit form of the invention are specified by and depend directly on (a) and (b) : (a) Unique properties of compounds of Formula (I) , (II) , (III) or (IV) and special therapeutic effects to be obtained; and (b) Limitations inherent in the technology of compounding a compound of formula (I) , (II) , (III) or (IV) for treating a disease in a patient having a disease condition that impairs physical health.
  • administration refers to provision of a therapeutically effective amount of medicine to an individual by oral, sublingual, intravenous, subcutaneous, percutaneous, intramuscular, intradermal, intrathecal, epidural, intraocular, intracranial, inhalation, rectal, vagina, etc.
  • the pharmaceutical dosage forms include plaster, lotion, tablet, capsule, pill, dispersible powder, granule, suppository, sublimed preparation, lozenge, injection, aseptic solution or non-aqueous solution, suspension, emulsion, paster, etc.
  • An active component is complexed with a non-toxic pharmaceutically acceptable carrier (such as glucose, lactose, gum arabic, gelatin, mannitol, starch paste, magnesium trisilicate, talcum powder, corn starch, keratin, silica gel, potato starch, urea, dextran, etc. ) .
  • a non-toxic pharmaceutically acceptable carrier such as glucose, lactose, gum arabic, gelatin, mannitol, starch paste, magnesium trisilicate, talcum powder, corn starch, keratin, silica gel, potato starch, urea, dextran, etc.
  • the preferred route of administration varies with clinical characteristics. Dose changes must depend on situation of patients receiving treatment. Doctors will determine the appropriate dose according to individual status of patients.
  • the therapeutically effective amount per unit dose depends on body weight, physiological function and the selected vaccination program.
  • An amount of compound per unit dose refers to the weight of the compound per each administration, excluding weight of carriers (the drug formulation contains carriers) .
  • any suitable route of administration can be used to provide an effective dose of a compound of the invention to a mammal, especially a human.
  • oral administration rectal administration, parenteral administration, topical administration, ocular administration, nasal administration, pulmonary administration, etc.
  • Dosage forms include tablets, dragees, capsules, creams, ointments, suspensions, dispersions, solutions, aerosols, etc.
  • the compound represented of Formula (I) , (II) , (III) or (IV) is administered orally.
  • the effective dose of active ingredient used may vary with the particular compound used, the route of administration, the symptoms being treated, and the severity of the symptoms being treated. One skilled in the art can easily determine such a dose.
  • compositions provided herein may be formulated for single or multiple dosage administration.
  • the single dosage formulations are packaged in an ampoule, a vial, or a syringe.
  • the multiple dosage parenteral formulations must contain an antimicrobial agent at bacteriostatic or fungistatic concentrations. All parenteral formulations must be sterile, as known and practiced in the art.
  • compositions provided herein may be co-formulated with other active ingredients which do not impair the desired therapeutic action, or with substances that supplement the desired action.
  • the therapeutic methods disclosed herein comprise administrating to a patient in need of the treatment a safe and effective amount of the compound of the invention or the pharmaceutical composition containing the compound of the invention.
  • Each example disclosed herein comprises the method of treating the diseases comprising administrating to a patient in need of the treatment a safe and effective amount of the compound of the invention or the pharmaceutical composition containing the compound of the invention.
  • the compound of the invention or the pharmaceutical composition thereof may be administered by any suitable route of administration, including both systemic administration and topical administration.
  • Systemic administration includes oral administration, parenteral administration, transdermal administration and rectal administration.
  • Typical parenteral administration refers to administration by injection or infusion, including intravenous, intramuscular, and subcutaneous injection or infusion.
  • Topical administration includes application to the skin as well as intraocular, otic, intravaginal, inhaled and intranasal administration.
  • the compound of the invention or the pharmaceutical composition thereof may be administered orally.
  • the compound of the invention or the pharmaceutical composition thereof may be administered by inhalation.
  • the compound of the invention or the pharmaceutical composition thereof may be administered intranasally.
  • the compound of the invention or the pharmaceutical composition thereof may be administered once or according to a dosing regimen wherein a number of doses are administered at varying intervals of time for a given period of time. For example, doses may be administered once, twice, three, or four times per day. In one embodiment, a dose is administered once per day. In a further embodiment, a dose is administered twice per day. Doses may be administered until the desired therapeutic effect is achieved or indefinitely to maintain the desired therapeutic effect. Suitable dosing regimens for the compound of the invention or the pharmaceutical composition thereof depend on the pharmacokinetic properties of that compound, such as absorption, distribution, and half-life, which can be determined by the skilled artisan.
  • suitable dosing regimens including the duration of implementation of such regimens, for the compound of the invention or the pharmaceutical composition thereof depend on the disorder being treated, the severity of the disorder being treated, the age and physical condition of the patient being treated, the medical history of the patient to be treated, the nature of concurrent therapy, the desired therapeutic effect, and the like within the knowledge and expertise of the skilled artisan. It will be further understood by such skilled artisans that suitable dosing regimens may require adjustment given an individual patient's response to the dosing regimen or over time as individual patient needs change.
  • the compounds of the present invention may be administered either simultaneously with, or before or after, one or more other therapeutic agents.
  • the compounds of the present invention may be administered separately, by the same or different route of administration, or together in the same pharmaceutical composition as the other agents. This is chosen by the technical personnel in the field according to the actual conditions of the patient's health, age, weight and so on. If formulated as a fixed dose, such combination products employ the compounds of this invention within the dosage range described herein and the other pharmaceutically active agent or treatment within its dosage range.
  • this invention includes combinations comprising an amount of at least one compound of the invention, or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt, solvate, ester or prodrug thereof, and an effective amount of one or more additional agents described above.
  • the compound of Formula (I) , (II) , (III) or (IV) can be used in combination with other drugs for preventing, treating or alleviating diseases or symptoms for which the compound of Formula (I) , (II) , (III) or (IV) is applicable. These other drugs can be administered simultaneously or sequentially with the compound of Formula (I) , (II) , (III) or (IV) by their usual routes and amounts.
  • a pharmaceutical unit dosage form containing such other drugs and the compound of Formula (I) , (II) , (III) or (IV) is preferable.
  • the compounds described herein are combined with other drugs to provide a combination therapy for Parkinson's disease or other conditions.
  • the pharmaceutical composition of the present invention includes at least one of the selective adenosine A 2A receptor antagonists described in the present invention and an additional therapeutic agent.
  • additional therapeutic agent include, but are not limited to:
  • monoamine oxidase type B inhibitors such as selegiline and rasagiline
  • dopamine agonists such as bromocriptine, cabergoline, pergolide, pramipexole, ropinirole and rotigotine;
  • anticholinergic drugs such as trihexphenidyl, benztropine, orfenadrine, and procyclidine;
  • glutamine acid antagonists such as amantadine
  • levodopa (optionally in combination with carboxylase inhibitor such as carbidopa and benzylhydrazine, or COMT inhibitor such as tocapone and entacapone, or both carboxylase inhibitor and COMT inhibitor) .
  • carboxylase inhibitor such as carbidopa and benzylhydrazine
  • COMT inhibitor such as tocapone and entacapone, or both carboxylase inhibitor and COMT inhibitor
  • the additional therapeutic agent may be selected from a free base or a neutral compound, or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt.
  • the selective adenosine A 2A receptor antagonists described in the present invention are combined in a single dosage form with one or more additional therapeutic agents.
  • the selective adenosine A 2A receptor antagonist and additional therapeutic agent are combined in a kit form or otherwise provided together for administration.
  • a method for treating Parkinson's Disease or other above-mentioned indications includes administering one or more of selective adenosine A 2A receptor antagonists and monoamine oxidase type B inhibitors, dopamine agonists, anticholinergics, glutamate antagonists, and levodopa, wherein non-limiting examples of adjuvant therapeutic agents are those listed above.
  • the selective adenosine A 2A receptor antagonist and additional therapeutic agents are administered together in a single dose containing two active ingredients or separately in separate dosage forms, as the case may be.
  • one of the agents is administered in a pill or tablet or other solid dosage form, while the other agents are in a pill or tablet or other solid dosage form, a transdermal patch, or injectable administration.
  • the compound of the present invention and the above-mentioned additional therapeutic agent are used in the manufacture of a medicament for preventing, treating or lessening an adenosine A 2A receptor-related disease.
  • a “prodrug” of a compound of the invention is a functional derivative of the compound which, upon administration to a patient, eventually liberates the compound of the invention in vivo.
  • Administration of a compound of the invention as a prodrug may enable the skilled artisan to do one or more of the following: (a) modify the onset of action of the compound in vivo; (b) modify the duration of action of the compound in vivo; (c) modify the transportation or distribution of the compound in vivo; (d) modify the solubility of the compound in vivo; and (e) overcome a side effect or other difficulty encountered with the compound.
  • Typical functional derivatives used to prepare prodrugs include modifications of the compound that are chemically or enzymatically cleaved in vivo. Such modifications, which include the preparation of phosphates, amides, esters, thioesters, carbonates, and carbamates, are well known to those skilled in the art.
  • the compounds and pharmaceutical compositions provided by the invention can be used to prepare a medicament for antagonizing adenosine A 2A receptor, and also to prepare a medicament for preventing, treating or lessening an adenosine A 2A receptor-related disease, especially Parkinson's disease.
  • the amount of the compound or the compound of the pharmaceutical composition of the present invention can effectively, detectably and selectively antagonize adenosine A 2A receptor.
  • adenosine A 2A receptor-related diseases further include, but are not limited to: Parkinson's disease, pain, depression, dementia, stroke, myocardial ischemia, asthma, alcohol withdrawal, dyskinesia syndrome, restless leg syndrome, dystonia, systemic stiffness, neurodegenerative disorders or osteoporosis.
  • the compounds of the invention are used for preventing, treating or lessening Parkinson's disease and/or movement disorders.
  • the compounds and pharmaceutical compositions of the present invention are also useful for veterinary treatment of animals such as companion animals, exotic animals and farm animals.
  • animals such as companion animals, exotic animals and farm animals.
  • the animals disclosed herein include horses, dogs, and cats.
  • the compounds disclosed herein include the pharmaceutically acceptable derivatives thereof.
  • the compounds disclosed herein may be prepared by methods described herein, wherein the substituents are defined as shown in Formula (I) , (II) , (III) or (IV) above, except where further noted.
  • the following non-limiting schemes and examples are presented to further exemplify the invention.
  • Anhydrous THF, dioxane, toluene, and ether were obtained by refluxing the solvent with sodium.
  • Anhydrous CH 2 Cl 2 and CHCl 3 were obtained by refluxing the solvent with CaH 2 .
  • EtOAc, PE, hexane, DMAC and DMF were treated with anhydrous sodium sulfate prior to use.
  • reaction flasks were typically fitted with rubber septa for the introduction of substrates and reagents via syringe. Glassware was oven dried and/or heat dried.
  • MS mass spectrum
  • Mobile phase in the proportion of 5%-95% (CH 3 CN containing 0.1%of formic acid) in (H 2 O containing 0.1%of formic acid) , using electrospray ionization (ESI) , UV detection, at 210 nm/254 nm.
  • ESI electrospray ionization
  • Compound ( 2 ) can be prepared through the following process: p-Toluenesulfonyl chloride can react with compound ( 0 ) to give compound ( 2 ) .
  • Compound ( 9 ) can be prepared through the following process: compound ( 1 ) can react with compound ( 2 ) to give compound ( 3 ) ; compound ( 3 ) can react with malonate to give compound ( 4 ) ; compound ( 4 ) can react with compound ( 5 ) to give compound ( 6 ) ; and then compound ( 6 ) can undergo ring-closing reaction to give compound ( 7 ) .
  • Compound ( 7 ) can react with compound ( 8 ) to give compound ( 9 ) .
  • Compound ( 15 ) can be prepared through the following process: compound ( 10 ) can react with compound ( 2 ) to give compound ( 11 ) ; compound ( 11 ) can react with malonate to give compound ( 12 ) ; compound ( 12 ) can react with compound ( 5 ) to give compound ( 13 ) ; and then compound ( 13 ) can undergo ring-closing reaction to give compound ( 14 ) .
  • Compound ( 14 ) can react with compound ( 8 ) to give compound ( 15 ) .
  • Step 4 synthesis of (R, E) -N- (6-amino-1, 3-diethyl-2, 4-dioxo-1, 2, 3, 4-tetrahydropyrimidin-5-yl) -3- (3- ( (tetrahydrofuran-3-yl) oxy) phenyl) acryla mide
  • the title compound in this step was prepared by referring to the method described in step 5 of Example 1, i.e., (S, E) -N- (6-amino-1, 3-diethyl-2, 4-dioxo-1, 2, 3, 4-tetrahydropyrimidin-5-yl) -3- (3 - ( (tetrahydrofuran-3-yl) oxy) phenyl) acrylamide (570 mg, 1.37 mmol) and sodium hydroxide (550 mg, 13.7 mmol) were reacted in methanol (10 mL) , and the crude product was dried to give the title compound as a yellow solid (0.42 g, 77.0%) .
  • the title compound of this step was prepared by referring to the method described in step 5 of example 1, i.e., (E) -N- (6-amino-1, 3-diethyl-2, 4-dioxo-1, 2, 3, 4-tetrahydropyrimidin-5-yl) -3- (3 - ( (tetrahydro-2H-pyran-4-yl) oxy) phenyl) acrylamide (450 mg, 1.05 mmol) and sodium hydroxide (550 mg, 13.7 mmol) were reacted in methanol (10 mL) , and the crude product was dried to give the title compound as a yellow solid (0.38 g, 88.2%) .
  • the title compound of this step was prepared by referring to the method described in step 5 of example 1, i.e., (E) -N- (6-amino-1, 3-diethyl-2, 4-dioxo-1, 2, 3, 4-tetrahydropyrimidin-5-yl) -3- (4 - ( (oxetan-3-yloxy) phenyl) acrylamide (400 mg, 0.99 mmol) and sodium hydroxide (300 mg, 7.5 mmol) were reacted in methanol (10 mL) , and the crude product was dried to give the title compound as a yellow solid (0.2 g, 53.6%) .
  • the title compound of this step was prepared by referring to the method described in step 5 of example 1, i.e., (S, E) -N- (6-amino-1, 3-diethyl-2, 4-dioxo-1, 2, 3, 4-tetrahydropyrimidin-5-yl) -3- (4 - ( (tetrahydrofuran-3-yl) oxy) phenyl) acrylamide (500 mg, 1.21 mmol) and sodium hydroxide (400 mg, 10.0 mmol) were reacted in methanol (10 mL) , and the crude product was dried to give the title compound as a yellow solid (0.4 g, 83.6%) .
  • the title compound of this step was prepared by referring to the method described in step 5 of example 1, i.e., (E) -N- (6-amino-1, 3-diethyl-2, 4-dioxo-1, 2, 3, 4-tetrahydropyrimidin-5-yl) -3- (4 - ( (tetrahydro-2H-pyran-4-yl) oxy) phenyl) acrylamide (500 mg, 1.17 mmol) and sodium hydroxide (300 mg, 7.5 mmol) were reacted in methanol (10 mL) , and the crude product was dried to give the title compound as a yellow solid (0.28 g, 58.5%) .
  • the title compound of this step was prepared by referring to the method described in step 5 of example 1, i.e., (E) -N- (6-amino-1, 3-diethyl-2, 4-dioxo-1, 2, 3, 4-tetrahydropyrimidin-5-yl) -3- (3-fluoro-4- (oxetan-3-yloxy) phenyl) acrylamide (475 mg, 1.14 mmol) and sodium hydroxide (500 mg, 11.9 mmol) were reacted in methanol (6 mL) and water (3 mL) , and the crude product was dried to give the title compound as a white solid (0.419 g, 92.2%) .
  • the title compound of this step was prepared by referring to the method described in step 5 of example 1, i.e., (E) -N- (6-amino-1, 3-diethyl-2, 4-dioxo-1, 2, 3, 4-tetrahydropyrimidin-5-yl) -3- (3-fluoro-4- ( (tetrahydro-2H-pyran-4-yl) oxy) phenyl) acrylamide (425 mg, 0.95 mmol) and sodium hydroxide (500 mg, 11.9 mmol) were reacted in methanol (6 mL) and water (3 mL) , and the crude product was dried to give the title compound as a white solid (0.355 g, 87%) .
  • the title compound of this step was prepared by referring to the method described in step 4 of example 1, i.e., 5, 6-diamino-1, 3-diethylpyrimidine-2, 4 (1H, 3H) -dione (0.18 g, 0.91 mmol) , (E) -3- (3-chloro-4- ( (tetrahydro-2H-pyran-4-yl) oxy) phenyl) acrylic acid (0.31 g, 1.1 mmol) , 2- (7-azabenzotriazol-1-yl) -N, N, N', N'-tetramethyluronium hexafluorophosphate (0.33 g, 0.82 mmol) and N, N-diisopropylethylamine (0.67 mL, 3.8 mmol) were reacted in dichloromethane (10 mL) to prepare it. The crude product was purified by silica gel column chromatography (dichloromethane/methanol (
  • the title compound of this step was prepared by referring to the method described in step 5 of example 1, i.e., (E) -N- (6-amino-1, 3-diethyl-2, 4-dioxo-1, 2, 3, 4-tetrahydropyrimidin-5-yl) -3- (3-chloro-4- ( (tetrahydro-2H-pyran-4-yl) oxy) phenyl) acrylamide (0.35 mg, 0.76 mmol) and sodium hydroxide (300 mg, 7.5 mmol) were reacted in methanol (6 mL) and water (3 mL) , and the crude product was dried to give the title compound as a yellow solid (0.227 g, 72%) .
  • 4- (oxetan-3-yloxy) benzaldehyde (0.6 g, 3.1 mmol) , malonic acid (0.39 g, 3.7 mmol) and piperidine (0.22 g, 2.6 mmol) were reacted in pyridine (5 mL) , and the crude product was purified by silica gel chromatography
  • the title compound of this step was prepared by referring to the method described in step 5 of example 1, i.e., (E) -N- (6-amino-1, 3-diethyl-2, 4-dioxo-1, 2, 3, 4-tetrahydropyrimidin-5-yl) -3- (4 - (oxetan-3-ylmethoxy) phenyl) acrylamide (0.65 g, 1.6 mmol) and sodium hydroxide (300 mg, 7.5 mmol) were reacted in methanol (10 mL) , and the crude product was dried to give the title compound as a yellow solid (0.5 g, 78.7%) .
  • the title compound of this step was prepared by referring to the method described in step 5 of example 1, i.e., (E) -N- (6-amino-1, 3-diethyl-2, 4-dioxo-1, 2, 3, 4-tetrahydropyrimidin-5-yl) -3- (4- ( (tetrahydro-2H-pyran-4-yl) methoxy) phenyl) acrylamide (0.8 g, 1.8 mmol) and sodium hydroxide (400 mg, 10 mmol) were reacted in tert-butanol (8 mL) , and the crude product was dried to give the title compound as a yellow solid (0.68 g, 88.9%) .
  • the title compound of this step was prepared by referring to the method described in step 5 of example 1, i.e., (E) -N- (6-amino-1, 3-diethyl-2, 4-dioxo-1, 2, 3, 4-tetrahydropyrimidin-5-yl) -3- (4 - ( (3-fluorooxetan-3-yl) methoxy) phenyl) acrylamide (0.65 g, 1.5 mmol) and sodium hydroxide (300 mg, 7.5 mmol) were reacted in methanol (10 mL) , and the crude product was dried to give the title compound as a yellow solid (0.56 g, 90%) .
  • the title compound of this step was prepared by referring to the method described in step 5 of example 1, i.e., (E) -N- (6-amino-1, 3-diethyl-2, 4-dioxo-1, 2, 3, 4-tetrahydropyrimidin-5-yl) -3- (4- ( (4-fluorotetrahydro-2H-pyran-4-yl) methoxy) phenyl) acrylamide (0.65 g, 1.4 mmol) and sodium hydroxide (300 mg, 7.5 mmol) were reacted in tert-butanol (8 mL) and water (4 mL) , and the crude product was dried to give the title compound as a yellow solid (0.32 g, 51.7%) .
  • Example A Evaluation of the antagonizing effect of the compound of the present invention on human adenosine A 2A receptor.
  • the experimental system uses human recombinant adenosine A 2A receptor, which is stably expressed in HEK-293 cell line.
  • HEK-293 cells were inoculated into culture plate at a density of 1.25 ⁇ 10 5 cells/mL.
  • the medium was changed by modified HBSS solution with pH 7.4, different concentrations of test compound (10 ⁇ M, 1 ⁇ M, 0.1 ⁇ M, 10 nM, 1 nM, 0.1 nM) and solvents (PBS with 0.1%DMSO) were added, and the plate was incubated at 37 °C for 10 min.
  • cAMP cyclic adenosine monophosphate
  • NECA was used as a positive control in this experiment, (1) test compounds alone were used to stimulate cells to produce a certain amount of cAMP, and then NECA (0.1 ⁇ M) alone was used to stimulate cells to produce a certain amount of cAMP. A test compound is considered to have agonistic activity on adenosine A 2A receptor if the test compound alone stimulates cells to produce cAMP more than 50%of the amount of cAMP produced by NECA (0.1 ⁇ M) alone. (2) All cells were first incubated with test compounds and then stimulated with NECA (3 nM) . In addition, NECA (3 nM) alone was used to stimulate cells to produce a certain amount of cAMP.
  • IC 50 was calculated using MathIQ TM (ID Business Solutions Ltd., UK) through nonlinear, least squares regression equation analysis. The experimental results were shown in Table A.
  • Example No. IC 50 ( ⁇ M) Example No. IC 50 ( ⁇ M) Example 1 0.63 Example 13 1.6 Example 2 1.1 Example 15 1.53 Example 4 0.81 Example 16 0.70 Example 5 1.03 Example 18 2.46 Example 6 0.98 Example 19 0.37 Example 7 0.58 Example 21 1.71 Example 8 0.56 Example 22 2.42 Example 12 1.5 Example 23 3.14
  • the experimental results show that the compound of the present invention has a strong antagonistic effect on adenosine A 2A receptor.
  • Example B Pharmacokinetic evaluation after administering a certain amount of the compound of the present invention by intravenous or gavage to rats
  • test animals are rats, as shown in Table 1:
  • the LC-MS/MS system for analysis includes the Agilent 1200 series vacuum degasser, a quaternary pump, an orifice plate sampler, a thermostatted column oven, and an API4000Qtrap triple quadrupole mass spectrometer with an electrospray ionization source (ESI) . Quantitative analysis is performed in MRM mode, where the source parameters of MRM conversion are shown in Table 2:
  • curtain gas/CUR 30 psi Atomizing gas/GS1: 55 psi Auxiliary heating gas/GS2: 60 psi Ion transmission voltage/IS: 5000 mA Atomization temperature/TEM: 500 °C
  • the experiment was divided into two groups: one was administered by intravenous injection, and the other was administered by intragastric administration.
  • the compound of the present invention was administered to a test animal (overnight fast for 12 hours) in the form of 10%DMA (heating) + 60%PEG400 + 30%saline solution.
  • the administration dose is 1 mg/kg, and vein blood samples (0.3 mL) were collected at the time points of 0.083, 0.25, 0.5, 1.0, 2.0, 5.0, 7.0 and 24 h after rat administration.
  • EDTA-K 2 as anticoagulant was added into the blood vessel.
  • the plasma solutions were collected by centrifuging each blood sample at 3,000 rpm or 4,000 rpm for 10 minutes and kept at -20 °C or -70 °C.
  • the administration dose is 5 mg/kg
  • vein blood samples (0.3 mL) were collected at the time points of 0.25, 0.5, 1.0, 2.0, 5.0, 7.0 and 24 h after rat administration.
  • EDTA-K 2 as anticoagulant was added into the blood vessel.
  • the plasma solutions were collected by centrifuging each blood sample at 3,000 rpm or 4,000 rpm for 10 minutes and kept at -20 °C or -70 °C.

Landscapes

  • Health & Medical Sciences (AREA)
  • Engineering & Computer Science (AREA)
  • Organic Chemistry (AREA)
  • Chemical & Material Sciences (AREA)
  • Bioinformatics & Cheminformatics (AREA)
  • Veterinary Medicine (AREA)
  • Public Health (AREA)
  • General Health & Medical Sciences (AREA)
  • Life Sciences & Earth Sciences (AREA)
  • Animal Behavior & Ethology (AREA)
  • Chemical Kinetics & Catalysis (AREA)
  • General Chemical & Material Sciences (AREA)
  • Medicinal Chemistry (AREA)
  • Nuclear Medicine, Radiotherapy & Molecular Imaging (AREA)
  • Pharmacology & Pharmacy (AREA)
  • Neurology (AREA)
  • Biomedical Technology (AREA)
  • Neurosurgery (AREA)
  • Physical Education & Sports Medicine (AREA)
  • Psychiatry (AREA)
  • Rheumatology (AREA)
  • Psychology (AREA)
  • Orthopedic Medicine & Surgery (AREA)
  • Pain & Pain Management (AREA)
  • Addiction (AREA)
  • Pulmonology (AREA)
  • Urology & Nephrology (AREA)
  • Vascular Medicine (AREA)
  • Cardiology (AREA)
  • Heart & Thoracic Surgery (AREA)
  • Hospice & Palliative Care (AREA)
  • Pharmaceuticals Containing Other Organic And Inorganic Compounds (AREA)

Abstract

Provided are novel 8-substituted styryl xanthine derivatives and pharmaceutical composition containing this compound, which can be selective adenosine A 2A receptor antagonist. Also provided are methods of preparing this compound and pharmaceutical composition, and their use in the manufacture of a medicament for treating an adenosine A 2A receptor-related disease, especially Parkinson's disease.

Description

8-SUBSTITUTED STYRYL XANTHINE DERIVATIVES AND USES THEREOF FIELD OF THE INVENTION
The invention pertains to the pharmaceutical field, specifically relates to novel 8-substituted styryl xanthine derivatives and pharmaceutical compositions containing these compounds, and their usage methods and uses. Specially, novel 8-substituted styryl xanthine derivatives of the present invention can be used as a selective adenosine A 2A receptor antagonist for preventing, treating or lessening an adenosine A 2A receptor-related disease, especially Parkinson’s disease.
BACKGROUND OF THE INVENTION
Parkinson’s disease (PD) is a common chronic degenerative disease of the nervous system, also known as tremor paralysis. The elderly are more common, and the average age of onset is about 60 years old. Parkinson's disease is less common in young people under the age of 40. The prevalence of PD in China over 65 years old is about 1.7%. Most patients with Parkinson's disease are sporadic cases, and less than 10%have a family history. Parkinson's disease is insidious, and of slow progress. The first symptom is usually the tremor or awkwardness of one limb, which in turn affects the contralateral limb. The main clinical manifestations are resting tremor, bradykinesia, myotonia and posture gait disorder. In recent years, more and more people have noticed that non-motor symptoms such as depression, constipation and sleep disorders are also common complaints of patients with Parkinson's disease. Their influence on patients' quality of life even exceeds motor symptoms. PD seriously affects patients' daily life and social activities, and has become a major disease that bothers people, affecting the quality of life of millions of people around the world.
The main pathological change of Parkinson's disease is the degenerative death of dopamine (DA) neurons in the substantia nigra, which causes a significant decrease in the striatum DA content and causes disease. The exact cause of this pathological change is still unclear. Genetic factors, environmental factors, aging, and oxidative stress may be involved in the degenerative death of PD dopaminergic neurons.
The current treatment of PD mainly includes surgical treatment and drug treatment. Surgical treatment may have serious adverse reactions and high postoperative recurrence rate, which limits the widespread application of surgical treatment. (Kelly PJ, Gillingham FJ. The long-term results of stereotaxic surgery and L-dopa therapy in patients with Parkinson’s disease. A 10-year follow-up study [J] . J Neurosurg, 1980, 53 (3) : 332-7. ) . The drug treatment of PD is mainly divided into two categories: anticholinergic drugs and drugs that affect dopaminergic. Anticholinergic drugs can only improve symptoms as an adjunct. Dopaminergic treatment for PD is mainly to reverse the lack of striatal dopamine caused by nigrostriatal damage (Obeso JA, Olanow CW, Nutt JG. Levodopa motor complications in Parkinson’s disease [J] . Trends Neurosci, 2000,  23 (10) : 2-7. ) . Levodopa and other dopamine agonists are effective in controlling the symptoms of PD, especially in the early stages of the disease. However, dopamine agonists have acute side effects such as hypotension, nausea, vomiting, and other symptoms that occur with the severity of the disease, including loss of drug effectiveness, mental symptoms, and dyskinesia. It can be seen that the current treatment aims at symptoms and does not significantly improve the progress of the disease, so there is an urgent need to develop other methods for treating PD. New PD treatments should be effective throughout the disease, not only reducing the side effects of existing drugs of treatment, but also having neuroprotective effects that slow or prevent the progression of the disease.
Many of the newly studied drugs for the treatment of PD mainly aim at non-dopaminergic systems of the basal ganglia, which have strong anti-PD activity and no side effects.
The basal ganglia is an important subcortical center that regulates movement, and mainly includes two pathways: direct pathway (striatal-substantia nigra pars reticulata/globus pallidus internus-thalamus-cortical loop) , indirect pathway (striatum-lateral globus pallidus-subthalamic nucleus-substantia nigra pars reticulata/globus pallidus internus-thalamus-cortex circuit) . The striatum acts on an efferent neuron in the direct pathway that contains dopamine D 1 receptors, and the striatum acts on efferent neurons of the indirect pathway, which contains dopamine D 2 receptors Activation of the direct pathway facilitates thalamic cortical neuron activity, while activation of the indirect pathway inhibits thalamic cortical neuron activity. Dopamine has an excitatory effect on the D 1 receptor to activate the direct pathway, and an inhibitory effect on the D 2 receptor to inhibit the indirect pathway, keeping the direct and indirect pathways in balance. After DA neurons in the substantia nigra compaction of Parkinson's disease are injured, the activation of direct pathways and the inhibition of indirect pathways weaken, leading to imbalance between direct and indirect pathways, and the inhibition of thalamic cortical neurons is strengthened. Stiffness, tremor, bradykinesia, reduced movement and the like appear (Lang AE. Lozano AM. Parkinson’s disease. Second of two parts. New England Journal of Medicine, 1998, 339 (16) : 1130-1143. ) .
Adenosine A 2A receptor is selectively expressed in basal ganglia and is related to motor behavior, mainly acts through the regulation of indirect pathways: (1) activating adenosine A 2A receptors of GABAergic neurons in the striatum can increase the excitability of GABAergic neurons in the striatum, thereby inhibiting the excitability of GABAergic neurons in external globus pallidus; (2) activating adenosine A 2A receptors at the axon end of the GABAergic neurons in the striatum can promote GABA release, inhibit the excitability of GABAergic neurons in external globus pallidus (Shindou T, Richardson PJ, Mori A et al. Adenosine modulates the striatal GABAergic inputs to the globus pallidus via adenosine A 2A receptors in rats. Neuroscience Letters, 2003, 352 (3) : 167-170. )
Epidemiological and laboratory studies have shown that blocking adenosine A 2A receptors can alleviate degenerative changes in dopaminergic neurons. Adenosine A 2A receptor antagonists improve PD symptoms while slowing disease progression. Adenosine A 2A receptor antagonist as non-dopamine target of basal ganglia may develop into new strategy for treating PD (Pinna A, Wardas J, Simola N, et al. New therapies for the treatment of Parkinson’s disease: Adenosine A 2A receptor antagonists [J] . LifeSci, 2005, 77 (26) : 3259 -67. ) . Numerous basic and clinical studies suggest that adenosine A 2A receptor antagonists may become a new class of drugs for treating Parkinson's disease. How to find some drugs that have high affinity for adenosine A 2A receptors, can also play a good role in the body, and have few adverse reactions has become an important topic in the research of adenosine A 2A receptor antagonists.
Adenosine receptors represent a subclass of receptors of the coupling of purine nucleotides and nucleoside G protein receptors (called purine receptors) . There are four major adenosine receptor subtypes that differ in pharmacology, i.e. A 1, A 2A, A 2B, and A 3, respectively. The major adenosine receptor subtypes in the brain are A 1 and A 2A. However, it was found that adenosine A 1 receptors are distributed throughout the brain at high density, and the distribution of adenosine A 2A receptors is more restricted. Adenosine A 2A receptors are present in the striatum (olfactory nodules, nucleus accumbens, lateral caudate nucleus) at high density, and are localized together with dopamine D 2 receptors on striatum efferent neurons. Adenosine A 2A receptors are mainly co-expressed with dopamine D 2 receptors in the medium spiny neurons (MSNs) of striatum-globus pallidus, but not co-expressed with dopamine D 1 receptors. (Fink JS, Weaver DR, Rivkees SA et al. mOLECULAR Cloning of the rat A 2 adenosine receptor: Selective co-expression with D 2 dopamine receptors in rat striatum. Brain Res Mol BRAIN rES, 1992, 14: 186-195. ) . Later, it was found that adenosine A 2A receptor and dopamine D 2 receptor were also co-expressed in the core and shell regions of olfactory nodules and the nucleus accumbens (Svenningsson P, Le Moine C, Kull B et al. Cellular expression of adenosine A 2A receptor messenger RNA in the rat central nervous system with special reference to dopamine innervated areas. Neuroscience, 1997, 80: 1171-1185. ) , and also distributed in peripheral parts such as immune cells (Sitkovsky MV, Lukashev D, Apasov S et al. Physiological control of immune response and inflammatory tissue damage by hypoxia-inducible factors and adenosine A 2A receptors. Annual Review of Immunology, 2004, 22: 657-682. ) . The discrete localization of adenosine A 2A receptors in the striatum and their ability to functionally antagonize D 2 receptors have made adenosine A 2A receptor antagonists a potential therapy for symptoms of Parkinson's disease.
Studies (Fuxe K, Ferre S, Canals M et al. Adenosine A 2A and dopamine D 2 heteromeric receptor complexes and their function. Journal of Molecular Neuroscienci, 2005, 26 (2-3) : 209-220. ) have shown that adenosine A 2A receptors and dopamine D 2 receptors can form heterodimer and/or hetero-oligomer, wherein  heterodimer can reduce the activity of dopamine D 2 receptor: through the interaction between the carboxyl terminus of the adenosine A 2A receptor and the 5, 6 transmembrane region of the dopamine D 2 receptor, the epitope of the dopamine D 2 receptor is changed, and the affinity of dopamine D 2 receptor and its ligand is reduced; through the interaction between the carboxyl terminus of the adenosine A 2A receptor and N-terminal Part of I3 of the D 2 receptor (arginine-rich epitope) , the coupling of dopamine D 2 receptor and G protein is reduced, the effect of dopamine D 2 receptor activation to promote K + outflow and inhibit calcium inflow is reduced, thereby the activity of dopamine D 2 receptor is reduced. Adenosine A 2A receptor agonists can promote heterodimer formation, while adenosine A 2A receptor antagonists can inhibit heterodimer formation.
Naturally occurring xanthine is the first generation of adenosine receptor antagonists, such as caffeine (1, 3, 7-caffeine) and theophylline (1, 3-dimethylxanthine, Daly et al., Cell. Mol. Neurobiol., 1983, 3, 67) . For a long time, these xanthines have been known to reverse motor deficits in various PD models. Moreover, epidemiological investigations suggest that caffeine and theophylline can reduce the incidence of Parkinson's disease. However, research (Fredholm BB. Connection between caffeine, adenosine receptors and dopamine. Coffee reduces the risk of Parkinson’s disease. Lakartidningen, 2004, 101 (34) : 2552-2555. ) has found that coffee is a non-selective adenosine A 2A receptor antagonist that works by blocking the adenosine A 2A receptor. Because they are non-selective and moderately effective, they have led to the development of selective adenosine A 2A receptor antagonists.
It was further found through various synthetic substitutions on the xanthine moiety that the introduction of styryl at position 8 of xanthine is essential in obtaining compounds with antagonistic effect on selective adenosine A 2A receptor (Ongini et al., Trends Pharmacol. Sci., 1996, 17, 364; Shimada et al., J. Med. Chem., 1992, 36, 2343; Muller et al., Curr. Pharm. Des., 1996, 2, 501; Baraldi et al., Curr. Med. Chem., 1995, 2, 707) . This work found structurally related compound KF17837 ( (E) -1, 3-dipropyl-8- (3, 4-dimethoxystyryl) -7-methylxanthine) and its analogue KW6002 (istradefylline, (E) -1, 3-diethyl-8- (3, 4-dimethoxystyryl) -7-methylxanthine) , whose pharmacological properties have been extensively studied. Despite similarity in vitro potency, these two structurally similar xanthines appear to have significant differences in potency in vivo, such as measuring systemic stiffness in mice by attenuation, of which KW6002 is significantly more effective. This difference in activity in vivo may be due to differences in pharmacokinetics, pharmacodynamics, metabolism and/or bioavailability (Kiec-Kononowicz et al., Pure and Appl. Chem., 2001, 73, 1411) .
Adenosine A 2A receptor antagonist, as a new drug for the treatment of PD, has accurate effects, good safety and good tolerance, and has broad application prospect. The following patent documents disclose compounds as adenosine A 2A receptor antagonists:
US 5484920 A discloses xanthine derivatives as selective adenosine A 2 receptor antagonists, their pharmaceutical compositions and their use, and application for preventing or treating PD.
RU 2480469 C1 discloses substituted 1, 3-diethyl-8-vinyl-7-methyl-3, 7-dihydropurine-2, 6-dione as selective adenosine A 2A receptor antagonists, their pharmaceutical compositions and their uses, and application for the prevention or treatment of diseases of the central nervous system (including PD) , tumors, viruses and bacterial diseases.
WO 2013058681 A2 discloses 8-phenoxyacetic acid and its esters and amide vinyl substituted 2, 6-dioxo-2, 3, 6, 7-tetrahydro-1H-purine as selective adenosine A 2A receptor antagonists, their pharmaceutical compositions and their uses, and application for the prevention or treatment of diseases of the central nervous system (including PD) .
WO 9523148 A1 discloses xanthine derivatives as selective adenosine A 2 receptor antagonists, their pharmaceutical compositions and their uses, and application for the prevention or treatment of PD, senile dementia, depression, asthma, osteoporosis and the like.
WO 9425462 A1 discloses an 8-substituted 1, 3, 7-trialkyl-xanthine derivative as selective adenosine A 2A receptor antagonists, their pharmaceutical compositions, and their uses, and application for the prevention or treatment of diseases related to A 2A receptors
CA 2112031 A1 discloses 8-substituted xanthine derivatives as selective adenosine A 2 receptor antagonists, their pharmaceutical compositions and uses, and application for preventing or treating PD, dementia, depression, asthma, osteoporosis and the like.
JP 2016003186 A discloses a dihydroisobenzofuran-containing xanthine derivative as a selective adenosine A 2A receptor antagonist, pharmaceutical compositions thereof, and uses thereof, and application for preventing or treating PD.
WO 2008077557 A1 discloses a 8-ethynyl-containing xanthine derivative as a selective adenosine A 2A receptor antagonist, pharmaceutical compositions thereof, and uses thereof, and application for preventing or treating PD, dementia, depression, asthma, osteoporosis and the like.
SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION
Specially, the present invention provides a novel 8-substituted styryl xanthine derivative as a selective adenosine A 2A receptor antagonist for treating an adenosine A 2A receptor-related disease, especially Parkinson’s disease. Through experiments, it was found that the 8-substituted styryl xanthine derivative have stable properties, good safety, favorable pharmacodynamics and good pharmacokinetic properties, such as expected brain/plasma ratio, good bioavailability or good metabolic stability, and so on. Therefore, it has a good clinical application  prospect.
The invention also provides a method for preparing the compound and a pharmaceutical composition containing the compound, and uses of the compound and the pharmaceutical composition containing the compound in the manufacture of a medicament.
In one aspect, provided herein is a compound having Formula (I) or a stereoisomer, a tautomer, an N-oxide, a hydrate, a solvate, a metabolite, a pharmaceutically acceptable salt or a prodrug thereof,
Figure PCTCN2019127192-appb-000001
wherein
each of R 1, R 2 and R 3 is independently H, D, F, Cl, Br, I, -CD 3, -CN, -NO 2, -NH 2, -OH, -SH, -COOH, -C (=O) NH 2, -C (=O) NHCH 3, -C (=O) N (CH 32, -C (=O) - (C 1-C 6 alkyl) , -C (=O) - (C 1-C 6 alkoxy) , C 1-C 6 alkyl, C 2-C 6 alkenyl, C 2-C 6 alkynyl, C 1-C 6 haloalkyl, C 1-C 6 alkoxy, C 1-C 6 haloalkoxy, C 1-C 6 alkylthio, C 1-C 6 alkylamino, hydroxyl-substituted C 1-C 6 alkyl, C 3-C 8 cycloalkyl, 3-8 membered heterocyclyl, C 6-C 10 aryl or 5-10 membered heteroaryl;
At least one of R 4, R 5, R 6, R 7 and R 8 is -O-R 0, the remaining groups are independently H, D, F, Cl, Br, I, -CN, -NO 2, -NH 2, -OH, -SH, -COOH, -C (=O) NH 2, -C (=O) NHCH 3, -C (=O) N (CH 32, -C (=O) - (C 1-C 6 alkyl) , -C (=O) - (C 1-C 6 alkoxy) , C 1-C 6 alkyl, C 2-C 6 alkenyl, C 2-C 6 alkynyl, C 1-C 6 haloalkyl, C 1-C 6 alkoxy, C 1-C 6 haloalkoxy, C 1-C 6 alkylthio, C 1-C 6 alkylamino, hydroxy substituted C 1-C 6 alkyl, C 3-C 8 cycloalkyl, 3-8 membered heterocyclyl, C 6-C 10 aryl or 5-10 membered heteroaryl;
R 0 is - (CH 2m- (3-8 membered oxygen-containing heterocyclic ring) , wherein the 3-8 membered oxygen-containing heterocyclic ring is optionally substituted with 1, 2 or 3 R 9 groups;
each R 9 is independently D, F, Cl, Br, I, -CN, -NO 2, -NH 2, -OH, -COOH, -C (=O) NH 2, C 1-C 4 alkyl, C 1-C 4 haloalkyl, C 1-C 4 alkoxy, C 1-C 4 haloalkoxy, hydroxy-substituted C 1-C 4 alkyl; and
m is 0, 1, 2 or 3.
In some embodiments, R 0 is
Figure PCTCN2019127192-appb-000002
wherein
Figure PCTCN2019127192-appb-000003
is optionally substituted by 1, 2 or 3 R 9 groups, x is 0, 1, 2 or 3, y is 1, 2 or 3;
each R 9 is independently D, F, Cl, Br, I, -CN, -NO 2, -NH 2, -OH, -COOH, -C (=O) NH 2, methyl, ethyl, n-propyl, i-propyl, -CF 3, -CH 2CF 3, methoxy, ethoxy, n-propoxy or i-propoxy.
In some embodiments, R 0 is
Figure PCTCN2019127192-appb-000004
Figure PCTCN2019127192-appb-000005
Figure PCTCN2019127192-appb-000006
In some embodiments, each of R 1, R 2 and R 3 is independently H, D, F, Cl, Br, I, -CD 3, -CN, -NO 2, -NH 2, -OH, -SH, -COOH, -C (=O) NH 2, -C (=O) NHCH 3, -C (=O) N (CH 32, -C (=O) - (C 1-C 4 alkyl) , -C (=O) - (C 1-C 4 alkoxy) , C 1-C 4 alkyl, C 2-C 4 alkenyl, C 2-C 4 alkynyl, C 1-C 4 haloalkyl, C 1-C 4 alkoxy, C 1-C 4 haloalkoxy, C 1-C 4 alkylthio, C 1-C 4 alkylamino, hydroxyl-substituted C 1-C 4 alkyl, C 3-C 6 cycloalkyl, 3-6 membered heterocyclyl, C 6-C 10 aryl or 5-10 membered heteroaryl.
In other embodiments, each of R 1, R 2 and R 3 is independently H, D, F, Cl, Br, I, -CD 3, -CN, -NO 2, -NH 2, -OH, -SH, -COOH, -C (=O) NH 2, -C (=O) NHCH 3, -C (=O) N (CH 32, -C (=O) -CH 3, -C (=O) -OCH 3, methyl, ethyl, n-propyl, isopropyl, allyl, propenyl, propargyl, propynyl, -CHF 2, -CF 3, -CHFCH 2F, -CF 2CHF 2, -CH 2CF 3, -CH 2CF 2CHF 2, methoxy, ethoxy, n-propyloxy, isopropyloxy, -OCHF 2, -OCF 3, -OCHFCH 2F, -OCF 2CHF 2, -OCH 2CF 3, -OCH 2CF 2CHF 2, methylthio, ethylthio, methylamino, dimethylamino, ethylamino, hydroxymethyl, 2-hydroxyethyl, cyclopropyl, cyclobutyl, cyclopentyl, cyclohexyl, azetidinyl, pyrrolidinyl, tetrahydrofuranyl, piperidinyl, piperazinyl, morpholinyl, phenyl, indenyl, naphthyl, pyrrolyl, pyrazolyl, imidazolyl, triazolyl, tetrazolyl, furyl, thienyl, thiazolyl, oxazolyl, pyridyl, pyrimidinyl, pyrazinyl, pyridazinyl, benzimidazolyl, indoyl or quinolyl.
In other embodiments, at least one of R 4, R 5, R 6, R 7 and R 8 is -O-R 0, the remaining groups are independently H, D, F, Cl, Br, I, -CN, -NO 2, -NH 2, -OH, -SH, -COOH, -C (=O) NH 2, -C (=O) NHCH 3, -C (=O) N (CH 32, -C (=O) - (C 1-C 4 alkyl) , -C (=O) - (C 1-C 4 alkoxy) , C 1-C 4 alkyl, C 2-C 4 alkenyl, C 2-C 4 alkynyl, C 1-C 4 haloalkyl, C 1-C 4 alkoxy, C 1-C 4 haloalkoxy, C 1-C 4 alkylthio, C 1-C 4 alkylamino, hydroxy substituted C 1-C 4 alkyl, C 3-C 6 cycloalkyl, 3-6 membered heterocyclyl, C 6-C 10 aryl or 5-10 membered heteroaryl; wherein, R 0 is as defined herein.
In other embodiments, at least one of R 4, R 5, R 6, R 7 and R 8 is -O-R 0, the remaining groups are independently H, D, F, Cl, Br, I, -CN, -NO 2, -NH 2, -OH, -SH, -COOH, -C (=O) NH 2, -C (=O) NHCH 3, -C (=O) N (CH 32, -C (=O) -CH 3, -C (=O) -OCH 3, methyl, ethyl, n-propyl, isopropyl, allyl, propenyl, propargyl, propynyl, -CHF 2, -CF 3, -CHFCH 2F, -CF 2CHF 2, -CH 2CF 3, -CH 2CF 2CHF 2, methoxy, ethoxy, n-propyloxy, isopropyloxy, -OCHF 2, -OCF 3, -OCHFCH 2F, -OCF 2CHF 2, -OCH 2CF 3, -OCH 2CF 2CHF 2, methylthio, ethylthio, methylamino, dimethylamino, ethylamino, hydroxymethyl, 2-hydroxyethyl, cyclopropyl, cyclobutyl, cyclopentyl, cyclohexyl, azetidinyl, pyrrolidinyl, tetrahydrofuranyl, piperidinyl, piperazinyl, morpholinyl, phenyl, indenyl, naphthyl, pyrrolyl, pyrazolyl, imidazolyl, triazolyl, tetrazolyl, furyl, thienyl, thiazolyl, oxazolyl, pyridyl, pyrimidinyl, pyrazinyl, pyridazinyl, benzimidazolyl, indoyl or quinolyl; wherein, R 0 is as defined herein.
In some embodiments, provided herein is a compound having Formula (II) , Formula (III) , Formula (IV) , or a stereoisomer, a tautomer, an N-oxide, a hydrate, a solvate, a metabolite, a pharmaceutically acceptable salt or a prodrug thereof,
Figure PCTCN2019127192-appb-000007
wherein R 1, R 2, R 3, R 4, R 5, R 6, R 7, R 8 and R 0 are as defined herein.
In other aspect, provided herein is a pharmaceutical composition comprising the compound of Formula (I) , (II) , (III) or (IV) .
In some embodiments, the pharmaceutical composition disclosed herein further comprises a pharmaceutically acceptable excipient, a carrier, an adjuvant or a combination thereof.
In some embodiments, the pharmaceutical composition according to the present invention further comprises an additional therapeutic agent, wherein the additional therapeutic agent is monoamine oxidase type B inhibitor, dopamine agonist, anticholinergic, glutamate antagonist, levodopa or any combination thereof.
In other aspect, the present invention relates to use of the compound represented by Formula (I) , (II) , (III) or (IV) or the pharmaceutical composition in the manufacture of a medicament for preventing, treating or lessening an adenosine A 2A receptor-related disease in a patient.
In some embodiments, an adenosine A 2A receptor-related disease is Parkinson's disease, pain, depression, dementia, stroke, myocardial ischemia, asthma, alcohol withdrawal, dyskinesia syndrome, restless leg syndrome, dystonia, systemic stiffness, neurodegenerative disorders or osteoporosis.
In other aspect, the present invention relates to use of the compound represented by Formula (I) , (II) , (III) or (IV) or the pharmaceutical composition in the manufacture of a medicament for antagonizing adenosine  A 2A receptor.
In other aspect, provided herein is a method of preparing, separating or purifying the compound of Formula (I) , (II) , (III) or (IV) .
Biological test results show that the compound of the present invention can antagonize the adenosine A 2A receptor and can be used as a better selective adenosine A 2A receptor antagonist.
Any embodiment disclosed herein can be combined with other embodiments as long as they are not contradictory to one another, even though the embodiments are described under different aspects of the invention. In addition, any technical feature in one embodiment can be applied to the corresponding technical feature in other embodiments as long as they are not contradictory to one another, even though the embodiments are described under different aspects of the invention.
The foregoing merely summarizes certain aspects disclosed herein and is not intended to be limiting in nature. These aspects and other aspects and embodiments are described more fully below. All references of this specification are incorporated herein by reference in their entirety. In the event that one or more of the incorporated literature, patents, and similar materials differs from or contradicts this application, this application controls.
DETAILED DESCRIPTION OF THE INVENTION
DEFINITIONS AND GENERAL TERMINOLOGY
Reference will now be made in detail to certain embodiments of the invention, examples of which are illustrated in the accompanying structures and formulas. The invention is intended to cover all alternatives, modifications, and equivalents which may be included within the scope of the present invention as defined by the claims. One skilled in the art will recognize many methods and materials similar or equivalent to those described herein, which could be used in the practice of the present invention. The present invention is in no way limited to the methods and materials described herein. In the event that one or more of the incorporated literature, patents, and similar materials differs from or contradicts this application, including but not limited to defined terms, term usage, described techniques, or the like, this application controls.
It is further appreciated that certain features of the invention, which are, for clarity, described in the context of separate embodiments, can also be provided in combination in a single embodiment. Conversely, various features of the invention which are, for brevity, described in the context of a single embodiment, can also be provided separately or in any suitable subcombination.
As used herein, the following definitions shall apply unless otherwise indicated. For purposes of this invention, the chemical elements are identified in accordance with the Periodic Table of the Elements, CAS  version, and the Handbook of Chemistry and Physics, 75th Ed. 1994. Additionally, general principles of organic chemistry are described in “Organic Chemistry” , Thomas Sorrell, University Science Books, Sausalito: 1999, and “March's Advanced Organic Chemistry” by Michael B. Smith and Jerry March, John Wiley &Sons, New York: 2007, the entire contents of which are hereby incorporated by reference.
The grammatical articles “a” , “an” and “the” , as used herein, are intended to include “at least one” or “one or more” unless otherwise indicated herein or clearly contradicted by the context. Thus, the articles are used herein to refer to one or more than one (i.e., at least one) of the grammatical objects of the article. By way of example, “a component” means one or more components, and thus, possibly, more than one component is contemplated and may be employed or used in an implementation of the described embodiments.
The term “at least Z” means Z or more, Z is an integer. For example, “at least one” means one or more than one, for example, 1, 2, 3, and so on.
“Stereoisomers” refers to compounds which have identical chemical constitution, but differ with regard to the arrangement of the atoms or groups in space. Stereoisomers include enantiomer, diastereomers, conformer (rotamer) , geometric (cis/trans) isomer, atropisomer, etc.
“Chiral” refers to molecules which have the property of non-superimposability of the mirror image partner, while the term “achiral” refers to molecules which are superimposable on their mirror image partner.
“Enantiomers” refer to two stereoisomers of a compound which are non-superimposable mirror images of one another.
“Racemate” or “racemic mixture” refers to an equimolar mixture of two enantiomers lacking optical activity.
“Diastereomer” refers to a stereoisomer with two or more centers of chirality and whose molecules are not mirror images of one another. Diastereomers have different physical properties, e.g. melting points, boling points, spectral properties and reactivity. A mixture of diastereomers may be separated under high resolution analytical procedures such as electrophoresis and chromatography such as HPLC.
Stereochemical definitions and conventions used herein generally follow S. P. Parker, Ed., McGraw-Hill Dictionary of Chemical Terms (1984) McGraw-Hill Book Company, New York; and Eliel, E. and Wilen, S., “Stereochemistry of Organic Compounds” , John Wiley &Sons, Inc., New York, 1994, all of which are incorporated herein by reference. Many organic compounds exist in optically active forms, i.e., they have the ability to rotate the plane of plane-polarized light. In describing an optically active compound, the prefixes D and L, or R and S, are used to denote the absolute configuration of the molecule about its chiral center (s) . The prefixes d and l or (+) and (-) are employed to designate the sign of rotation of plane-polarized light by the compound, with  (-) or l meaning that the compound is levorotatory. A compound prefixed with (+) or d is dextrorotatory. A specific stereoisomer may be referred to as an enantiomer, and a mixture of such stereoisomers is called an enantiomeric mixture. A mixture of enantiomers with a ratio of 50: 50 is referred to as a racemic mixture or a racemate, which may occur where there has been no stereoselection or stereospecificity in a chemical reaction or process.
Any asymmetric atom (e.g., carbon or the like) of the compound (s) disclosed herein can be present in racemic or enantiomerically enriched, for example the (R) -, (S) -or (R, S) -configuration. In certain embodiments, each asymmetric atom has at least 50 %enantiomeric excess, at least 60 %enantiomeric excess, at least 70 %enantiomeric excess, at least 80 %enantiomeric excess, at least 90 %enantiomeric excess, at least 95 %enantiomeric excess, or at least 99 %enantiomeric excess in the (R) -or (S) -configuration.
Depending on the choice of the starting materials and procedures, the compounds can be present in the form of one of the possible stereoisomers or mixtures thereof, such as racemates and diastereoisomer mixtures, depending on the number of asymmetric carbon atoms. Optically active (R) -and (S) -isomers may be prepared using chiral synthons or chiral reagents, or resolved using conventional techniques. If the compound contains a double bond, the substituent may be E or Z configuration. If the compound contains a disubstituted cycloalkyl, the cycloalkyl substituent may have a cis-or trans-configuration.
Any resulting mixtures of stereoisomers can be separated on the basis of the physicochemical differences of the constituents, into the pure or substantially pure geometric isomers, enantiomers, diastereomers, for example, by chromatography and/or fractional crystallization.
Any resulting racemates of final products or intermediates can be resolved into the optical antipodes by methods known to those skilled in the art, e.g., by separation of the diastereomeric salts thereof. Racemic products can also be resolved by chiral chromatography, e.g., high performance liquid chromatography (HPLC) using a chiral adsorbent. Preferred enantiomers can also be prepared by asymmetric syntheses. See, for example, Jacques, et al., Enantiomers, Racemates and Resolutions (Wiley Interscience, New York, 1981) ; Principles of Asymmetric Synthesis (2nd Ed. Robert E. Gawley, Jeffrey Aube, Elsevier, Oxford, UK, 2012) ; Eliel, E.L. Stereochemistry of Carbon Compounds (McGraw-Hill, NY, 1962) ; Wilen, S.H. Tables of Resolving Agents and Optical Resolutions p. 268 (E.L. Eliel, Ed., Univ. of Notre Dame Press, Notre Dame, IN 1972) ; Chiral Separation Techniques: A Practical Approach (Subramanian, G. Ed., Wiley-VCH Verlag GmbH &Co. KGaA, Weinheim, Germany, 2007) .
The term “tautomer” or “tautomeric form” refers to structural isomers of different energies which are interconvertible via a low energy barrier. Where tautomerization is possible (e.g. in solution) , a chemical equilibrium of tautomers can be reached. For example, protontautomers (also known as prototropic tautomers) include interconversions via migration of a proton, such as keto-enol and imine-enamine isomerizations.
The term “pharmaceutically acceptable” as used herein, refers to those compounds, materials, compositions, and/or dosage forms which are, within the scope of sound medical judgment, suitable for use in contact with the tissues of patients without excessive toxicity, irritation, allergic response, or other problem or complication commensurate with a reasonable benefit/risk ratio, and are effective for their intended use.
The terms “optionally substituted with... ” and “unsubstituted or substituted with” can be used interchangeably, i.e. the structure is unsubstituted or substituted with one or more of the substituents described in the present invention, the substituents disclosed herein include, but are not limited to, D, F, Cl, Br, I, N 3, -CD 3, -CN, -NO 2, -NH 2, -OH, -SH, -COOH, -CONH 2, -C (=O) NHCH 3, -C (=O) N (CH 32, -C (=O) -alkyl, -C (=O) -alkoxy, alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, haloalkyl, alkoxy, haloalkoxy, alkylthio, alkylamino, hydroxy-substituted alkyl, cycloalkyl, heterocyclyl, aryl, heteroaryl, and so on.
In general, the term “substituted” refers to the replacement of one or more hydrogen radicals in a given structure or radical with a specified substituent. Unless otherwise indicated, a substituent may substitute at any substitutable position of a radical. When more than one positions of a given structure can be substituted with one or more specified substituents, the substituents may be either the same or different at each position.
Furthermore, what need to be explained is that the phrase “each…is independently” and “each of…and…is independently” , unless otherwise stated, should be broadly understood. The specific options expressed by the same symbol are independent of each other in different groups; or the specific options expressed by the same symbol are independent of each other in same groups.
As used herein, the term “subject” refers to an animal. Typically the animal is a mammal. A subject also refers to for example, primates (e.g., humans, male or female) , cows, sheep, goats, horses, dogs, cats, rabbits, rats, mice, fish, birds and the like. In certain embodiments, the subject is a primate. In yet other embodiments, the subject is a human.
As used herein, “patient” refers to a human (including adults and children) or other animal. In one embodiment, “patient” refers to a human.
The term “comprise” is an open expression, it means comprising the contents disclosed herein, but don’t exclude other contents.
At various places in the present specification, substituents of compounds disclosed herein are disclosed in groups or in ranges. It is specifically intended that the invention include each and every individual subcombination of the members of such groups and ranges. For example, the term “C 1-C 6 alkyl” is specifically intended to individually disclose methyl, ethyl, C 3 alkyl, C 4 alkyl, C 5 alkyl, and C 6 alkyl.
At various places in the present specification, linking substituents are described. Where the structure  clearly requires a linking group, the Markush variables listed for that group are understood to be linking groups. For example, if the structure requires a linking group and the Markush group definition for that variable lists “alkyl” or “aryl” then it is understood that the “alkyl” or “aryl” represents a linking alkylene group or arylene group, respectively.
The term “D” or “ 2H” refers to a single deuterium atom.
The terms “halogen” and “halo” can be used interchangeably, which refer to Fluoro (F) , Chloro (Cl) , Bromo (Br) , or Iodo (I) .
The term “heteroatom” refers to oxygen, sulfur, nitrogen, phosphorus and silicon, including any oxidized form of nitrogen, sulfur, or phosphorus; primary, secondary, tertiary amines and quaternary ammonium salts forms; or a substitutable nitrogen of a heterocyclic ring, for example, N (as in 3, 4-dihydro-2H-pyrrolyl) , NH (as in pyrrolidinyl) or NR’ (as in N-substituted pyrrolidinyl, wherein R’ is the substituent described herein) .
The term “alkyl” or “alkyl group” refers to a saturated linear or branched-chain monovalent hydrocarbon group of 1-20 carbon atoms, wherein the alkyl group is optionally substituted with one or more substituents described herein. In one embodiment, the alkyl group contains 1-6 carbon atoms. In other embodiment, the alkyl group contains 1-4 carbon atoms. In still other embodiment, the alkyl group contains 1-3 carbon atoms. Examples of alkyl include, but are not limited to, methyl (Me, -CH 3) , ethyl (Et, -CH 2CH 3) , n-propyl (n-Pr, -CH 2CH 2CH 3) , i-propyl (i-Pr, -CH (CH 32) , n-butyl (n-Bu, -CH 2CH 2CH 2CH 3) , i-butyl (i-Bu, -CH 2CH (CH 32) , sec-butyl (s-Bu, -CH (CH 3) CH 2CH 3) , tert-butyl (t-Bu, -C (CH 33) , etc.
The term “alkenyl” refers to linear or branched-chain monovalent hydrocarbon radical of 2 to 12 carbon atoms with at least one site of unsaturation, i.e., a carbon-carbon sp 2 double bond, wherein the alkenyl radical may be optionally substituted with one or more substituents described herein, and includes radicals having “cis” and “trans” orientations, or alternatively, “E” and “Z” orientations. In some embodiments, the alkenyl contains 2 to 8 carbon atoms. In other embodiments, the alkenyl contains 2 to 6 carbon atoms. In still other embodiments, the alkenyl contains 2 to 4 carbon atoms. Some non-limiting examples of alkenyl include vinyl (-CH=CH 2) , allyl (-CH 2CH=CH 2) , propenyl (-CH=CHCH 3) , and the like.
The term “alkynyl” refers to a linear or branched-chain monovalent hydrocarbon radical of 2 to 12 carbon atoms with at least one site of unsaturation, i.e., a carbon-carbon sp triple bond, wherein the alkynyl radical may be optionally substituted with one or more substituents described herein. In some embodiments, the alkynyl contains 2 to 8 carbon atoms. In other embodiments, the alkynyl contains 2 to 6 carbon atoms. In still other embodiments, the alkynyl contains 2 to 4 carbon atoms. Examples of such groups include, but are not limited to, ethynyl (-C≡CH) , propargyl (-CH 2C≡CH) , 1-propynyl (-C≡C-CH 3) , and the like.
The term “alkoxy” refers to an alkyl group, as previously defined, attached to the parent molecular moiety via an oxygen atom. Unless otherwise specified, the alkoxy group contains 1-12 carbon atoms. In one embodiment, the alkoxy group contains 1-6 carbon atoms. In other embodiment, the alkoxy group contains 1-4 carbon atoms. In still other embodiment, the alkoxy group contains 1-3 carbon atoms. The alkoxy group may be optionally substituted with one or more substituents disclosed herein.
Some non-limiting examples of alkoxy include methoxy (MeO, -OCH 3) , ethoxy (EtO, -OCH 2CH 3) , 1-propoxy (n-PrO, n-propoxy, -OCH 2CH 2CH 3) , 2-propoxy (i-PrO, i-propoxy, -OCH (CH 32) , 1-butoxy (n-BuO, n-butoxy, -OCH 2CH 2CH 2CH 3) , 2-methyl-1-propoxy (i-BuO, i-butoxy, -OCH 2CH (CH 32) , 2-butoxy (s-BuO, s-butoxy, -OCH (CH 3) CH 2CH 3) , 2-methyl-2-propoxy (t-BuO, t-butoxy, -OC (CH 33) , etc.
The term “alkylthio” refers to an alkyl group, as previously defined, attached to the parent molecular moiety via a sulfur atom. Unless otherwise specified, the alkylthio group contains 1-12 carbon atoms. In one embodiment, the alkylthio group contains 1-6 carbon atoms. In other embodiment, the alkylthio group contains 1-4 carbon atoms. In still other embodiment, the alkylthio group contains 1-3 carbon atoms. The alkylthio group may be optionally substituted with one or more substituents disclosed herein.
Some non-limiting examples of alkylthio include methylthio (MeS, -SCH 3) , ethylthio (EtS, -SCH 2CH 3) , 1-propylthio (n-PrS, n-propylthio, -SCH 2CH 2CH 3) , 2-propylthio (i-PrS, i-propylthio, -SCH (CH 32) , 1-butylthio (n-BuS, n-butylthio, -SCH 2CH 2CH 2CH 3) , 2-methyl-l-propylthio (i-BuS, i-butylthio, -SCH 2CH (CH 32) , 2-butylthio (s-BuS, s-butylthio, -SCH (CH 3) CH 2CH 3) , 2-methyl-2-propylthio (t-BuS, t-butylthio, -SC (CH 33) , etc.
The term “alkylamino” embraces “N-alkylamino” and “N, N-dialkylamino” , wherein an amino group is independently substituted with one or two alkyl radicals and wherein the alkyl group is as defined herein. Suitable alkylamino radical may be monoalkylamino or dialkylamino. Examples of the alkylamino radical include, but are not limited to, N-methylamino (methylamino) , N-ethylamino (ethylamino) , N, N-dimethylamino (dimethylamino) , N, N-diethylamino (diethylamino) , and the like. And wherein the alkylamino radical is optionally substituted with one or more substituents described herein.
The term “hydroxy-substituted alkyl” refers to an alkyl group substituted with one or more hydroxy groups, wherein the alkyl is as defined herein. Examples of such group include, but are not limited to, hydroxymethyl, 2-hydroxyethyl, 2-hydroxy-1-propyl, 3-hydroxy-1-propyl, 2, 3-dihydroxypropyl, and the like.
The term “haloalkyl” refers to an alkyl group substituted with one or more halogen atoms, wherein the alkyl is as defined herein. Examples of such group include, but are not limited to -CHF 2, -CF 3, -CHFCH 2F, -CF 2CHF 2, -CH 2CF 3, -CHFCH 3, -CH 2CH 2F, -CF 2CH 3, -CH 2CF 2CHF 2, etc. In some embodiments, C 1-C 6 haloalkyl contains C 1-C 6 fluoroalkyl; in some embodiments, C 1-C 4 haloalkyl contains C 1-C 4 fluoroalkyl; in some  embodiments, C 1-C 2 haloalkyl contains C 1-C 2 fluoroalkyl.
The term “haloalkoxy” refers to an alkoxy group substituted with one or more halogen atoms, wherein the alkoxy is as defined herein. Examples of such group include, but are not limited to -OCHF 2, -OCF 3, -OCHFCH 2F, -OCF 2CHF 2, -OCH 2CF 3, -OCHFCH 3, -OCH 2CH 2F, -OCF 2CH 3, -OCH 2CF 2CHF 2, etc. In some embodiments, C 1-C 6 haloalkoxy contains C 1-C 6 fluoroalkoxy; in some embodiments, C 1-C 4 haloalkoxy contains C 1-C 4 fluoroalkoxy; in some embodiments, C 1-C 2 haloalkoxy contains C 1-C 2 fluoroalkoxy.
The term “consisting of n atoms” or “n-membered” is used interchangeably herein, where n is an integer, which typically describes the number of ring-forming atoms in a moiety where the number of ring-forming atoms is n. For example, a 5-10 membered heteroaryl means a heteroaryl consisting of 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, or 10 ring atoms. As another example, piperidinyl is a heterocyclyl consisting of 6 atoms or a 6-membered heterocyclyl, and pyridyl is a heteroaryl consisting of 6 atoms or a 6-membered heteroaryl.
The term “carbocyclyl” , “carbocycle” or “carbocyclic ring” refers to a monovalent or multivalent, nonaromatic, saturated or partially unsaturated ring having 3 to 12 carbon atoms as a monocyclic, bicyclic or tricyclic ring system. A carbobicyclyl group includes a spiro carbobicyclyl group or a fused carbobicyclyl group. Suitable carbocyclyl groups include, but are not limited to, cycloalkyl, cycloalkenyl and cycloalkynyl. Further examples of the carbocyclyl group include cyclopropyl, cyclobutyl, cyclopentyl, 1-cyclopent-1-enyl, 1-cyclopent-2-enyl, 1-cyclopent-3-enyl, cyclohexyl, 1-cyclohex-1-enyl, 1-cyclohex-2-enyl, 1-cyclohex-3-enyl, cyclohexadienyl, cycloheptyl, cyclooctyl, cyclononyl, cyclodecyl, cycloundecyl, cyclododecyl, and the like. Wherein the carbocyclyl group is optionally substituted with one or more substituents described herein.
The term “cycloalkyl” refers to a monovalent or multivalent saturated ring having 3 to 12 carbon atoms as a monocyclic, bicyclic, or tricyclic ring system. and wherein the bicyclic or tricyclic ring system may include fused ring, bridged ring and spiro ring. In some embodiments, the cycloalkyl group contains 3 to 10 carbon atoms. In other embodiments, the cycloalkyl group contains 3 to 8 carbon atoms. In still other embodiments, the cycloalkyl group contains 3 to 6 carbon atoms. Examples of cycloalkyl group include, but are not limited to, cyclopropyl, cyclobutyl, cyclopentyl, cyclohexyl, and the like. The cycloalkyl radical is optionally substituted with one or more substituents described herein.
The term “heterocycle” , “heterocyclyl” , or “heterocyclic ring” as used interchangeably herein refers to a saturated or partially unsaturated and nonaromatic monocyclic, bicyclic or tricyclic ring system containing 3 to 12 ring atoms, wherein the bicyclic or tricyclic ring system may include a fused ring, bridged ring and spiro ring. Wherein one or more atoms on the ring each are independently replaced by heteroatom, the heteroatom is as defined herein. In some embodiment, the heterocyclyl group is monocyclic heterocyclyl having 3-8 ring members  (e.g., 2 to 6 carbon atoms and 1 to 3 heteroatoms selected from N, O, P and S, wherein the S or P is optionally substituted with one or more oxogen atoms to give the groups like SO or SO 2, PO or PO 2) ; in other embodiment, the heterocyclyl group is a monocyclic heterocyclyl consisting of 3 to 6 ring atoms (2 to 5 carbon atoms and 1 to 3 heteroatoms selected from N, O, P, S; wherein S or P is optionally substituted with one or more oxygen atoms to give groups like SO or SO 2, PO or PO 2) ; in yet other embodiment, the heterocyclyl group is bicyclic heterocyclyl having 7-12 ring members (e.g., 4 to 9 carbon atoms and 1 to 3 heteroatoms selected from N, O, P and S, wherein the S or P is optionally substituted with one or more oxogen atoms to give the groups like SO or SO 2, PO or PO 2) . The heterocyclyl group is optionally substituted with one or more substituents described herein.
The ring atom of the heterocyclic group may be a carbon atom radical or heteroatom radical. Of which a -CH 2- group can optionally be replaced by a -C (=O) -group, ring sulfur atoms may be optionally oxidized to form S-oxides, and ring nitrogen atoms may be optionally oxidized to form N-oxides. Some non-limiting examples of heterocyclyl group include oxiranyl, azetidinyl, oxetanyl, thietanyl, pyrrolidinyl, 2-pyrrolinyl, 3-pyrrolinyl, pyrazolinyl, pyrazolidinyl, imidazolinyl, imidazolidinyl, tetrahydrofuranyl, dihydrofuranyl, tetrahydrothienyl, dihydrothienyl, 1, 3-dioxolanyl, dithiolanyl, tetrahydropyranyl, dihydropyranyl, 2H-pyranyl, 4H-pyranyl, tetrahydrothiopyranyl, piperidinyl, morpholinyl, thiomorpholinyl, piperazinyl, dioxanyl, dithianyl, thioxanyl, homopiperazinyl, homopiperidinyl, oxepanyl, thiepanyl, oxazepinyl, diazepinyl, thiazepinyl, 2-oxa-5-azabicyclo [2.2.1] hept-5-yl, and the like. Some non-limiting examples of heterocyclyl wherein -CH 2-group is replaced by -C (=O) -moiety include 2-oxopyrrolidinyl, oxo-1, 3-thiazolidinyl, 2-piperidinonyl, 3, 5-dioxopiperidinyl, pyrimidinedione-yl, and the like. Some non-limiting examples of oxidized ring sulfur atoms of the heterocyclyl group include sulfolanyl, 1, 1-dioxo-thiomorpholinyl, and the like. The heterocyclyl group is optionally substituted with one or more substituents described herein.
The term “oxygen-containing heterocyclic ring” refers to a heterocyclic ring containing at least one oxygen atom, and the heterocyclic ring may contain other heteroatoms such as N, S, P, etc. Wherein the heterocyclyl group is as defined herein. Some non-limiting examples of oxygen-containing heterocyclyl include
Figure PCTCN2019127192-appb-000008
and the like.
The term “aryl” refers to monocyclic, bicyclic and tricyclic carbocyclic ring systems having a total of six to fourteen ring members, or six to twelve ring members, or six to ten ring members, wherein at least one ring in the system is aromatic, wherein each ring in the system contains 3 to 7 ring members. The aryl group is generally, but not necessarily bonded to the parent molecule through an aromatic ring of the aryl group. The term “aryl” and “aromatic ring” can be used interchangeably herein. Examples of aryl may include phenyl, indenyl,  naphthyl and anthracenyl. The aryl radical is optionally substituted with one or more substituents described herein.
The term “heteroaryl” refers to monocyclic, bicyclic and tricyclic ring systems having a total of five to twelve ring members, or five to ten ring members, or five to six ring members, wherein at least one ring in the system is aromatic, and in which at least one ring system contains one or more heteroatoms, and wherein each ring system contains a 5 to 7 members ring. The heteroaryl group is generally, but not necessarily bonded to the parent molecule through an aromatic ring of the heteroaryl group. The term “heteroaryl” may be used interchangeably with the term “heteroaryl ring” , “aromatic heterocyclic” or the term “heteroaromatic compound” . The heteroaryl group is optionally substituted with one or more substituents disclosed herein. In one embodiment, a 5-10 membered heteroaryl comprises 1, 2, 3 or 4 heteroatoms independently selected from O, S and N.
Some non-limiting examples of heteroaryl rings include 2-furanyl, 3-furanyl, N-imidazolyl, 2-imidazolyl, 4-imidazolyl, 5-imidazolyl, 3-isoxazolyl, 4-isoxazolyl, 5-isoxazolyl, 2-oxazolyl, 4-oxazolyl, 5-oxazolyl, N-pyrrolyl, 2-pyrrolyl, 3-pyrrolyl, 2-pyridyl, 3-pyridyl, 4-pyridyl, 2-pyrimidinyl, 4-pyrimidinyl, 5-pyrimidinyl, pyridazinyl (e.g., 3-pyridazinyl) , 2-thiazolyl, 4-thiazolyl, 5-thiazolyl, tetrazolyl (e.g., 5-tetrazolyl) , triazolyl (e.g., 2-triazolyl and 5-triazolyl) , 2-thienyl, 3-thienyl, pyrazolyl (e.g., 2-pyrazolyl) , isothiazolyl, 1, 2, 3-oxadiazolyl, 1, 2, 5-oxadiazolyl, 1, 2, 4-oxadiazolyl, 1 , 2, 3-triazolyl, 1, 2, 3-thiadiazolyl, 1, 3, 4-thiadiazolyl, 1, 2, 5-thiadiazolyl, pyrazinyl, 1, 3, 5-triazinyl, and the following bicycles: benzimidazolyl, benzofuryl, benzothiophenyl, indolyl (e.g., 2-indolyl) , purinyl, quinolinyl (e.g., 2-quinolinyl, 3-quinolinyl, 4-quinolinyl) , and isoquinolinyl (e.g., 1-isoquinolinyl, 3-isoquinolinyl or 4-isoquinolinyl) , imidazo [1, 2-a] pyridyl, pyrazolo [1, 5-a] pyridyl, pyrazolo [1, 5-a] pyrimidyl, imidazo [1, 2-b] pyridazinyl, [1, 2, 4] triazolo [4, 3-b] pyridazinyl, [1, 2, 4] triazolo [1, 5-a] pyrimidinyl, or [1, 2, 4] triazolo [1, 5-a] pyridyl.
The term “protecting group” or “PG” refers to a substituent that is commonly employed to block or protect a particular functionality while reacting with other functional groups on the compound. For example, an “amino-protecting group” is a substituent attached to an amino group that blocks or protects the amino functionality in the compound. Suitable amino-protecting groups include acetyl, trifluoroacetyl, t-butoxy-carbonyl (BOC, Boc) , benzyloxycarbonyl (CBZ, Cbz) and 9-fluorenylmethylenoxy-carbonyl (Fmoc) . Similarly, a “hydroxy-protecting group” refers to a substituent of a hydroxy group that blocks or protects the hydroxy functionality. Some non-limiting examples of suitable hydroxy-protecting groups include trialkylsilyl, acetyl, benzoyl, and benzyl. A “carboxy-protecting group” refers to a substituent of the carboxy group that blocks or protects the carboxy functionality. Common carboxy-protecting groups include -CH 2CH 2SO 2Ph, cyanoethyl, 2- (trimethylsilyl) ethyl, 2- (trimethylsilyl) ethoxy-methyl, 2- (p-toluenesulfonyl) ethyl, 2- (p-nitrophenylsulfonyl) -ethyl, 2- (diphenylphosphino) -ethyl, nitroethyl and the like. For a general description of  protecting groups and their use, see Greene et al., Protective Groups in Organic Synthesis, John Wiley &Sons, New York, 1991 and Kocienski et al., Protecting Groups, Thieme, Stuttgart, 2005.
The term “prodrug” refers to a compound that is transformed in vivo into a compound of Formula (I) , (II) , (III) or (IV) . Such a transformation can be affected, for example, by hydrolysis of the prodrug form in blood or enzymatic transformation to the parent form in blood or tissue. Prodrugs of the compounds disclosed herein may be, for example, esters. Some common esters which have been utilized as prodrugs are phenyl esters, aliphatic (C 1-24) esters, acyloxymethyl esters, carbonates, carbamates and amino acid esters. For example, a compound disclosed herein that contains a hydroxy group may be acylated at this position in its prodrug form. Other prodrug forms include phosphates, such as, those phosphate compounds derived from the phosphonation of a hydroxy group on the parent compound.
A “metabolite” is a product produced through metabolism in the body of a specified compound or salt thereof. The metabolites of a compound may be identified using routine techniques known in the art and their activities determined using tests such as those described herein. Such products may result for example from oxidation, reduction, hydrolysis, amidation, deamidation, esterification, deesterification, enzyme cleavage, and the like, of the administered compound. Accordingly, the invention includes metabolites of compounds disclosed herein, including metabolites produced by contacting a compound disclosed herein with a mammal for a sufficient time period.
A “pharmaceutically acceptable salts” refers to organic or inorganic salts of a compound disclosed herein. Pharmaceutically acceptable salts are well known in the art. For example, S. M. Berge et al., describe pharmaceutically acceptable salts in detail in J. Pharmaceutical Sciences, 1977, 66: 1-19, which is incorporated herein by reference. Some non-limiting examples of pharmaceutically acceptable and nontoxic salts include salts of an amino group formed with inorganic acids such as hydrochloric acid, hydrobromic acid, phosphoric acid, sulfuric acid and perchloric acid or with organic acids such as acetic acid, oxalic acid, maleic acid, tartaric acid, citric acid, succinic acid and malonic acid or by using other methods used in the art such as ion exchange. Other pharmaceutically acceptable salts include adipate, alginate, ascorbate, aspartate, benzenesulfonate, benzoate, bisulfate, borate, butyrate, camphanic acid salt, camphorsulfonate, cyclopentanepropionate, digluconate, dodecylsulfate, ethanesulfonate, formate, fumarate, glucoheptonate, glycerophosphate, gluconate, hemisulfate, heptanoate, hexanoate, hydroiodide, 2-hydroxy-ethanesulfonate, lactobionate, lactate, laurate, laurylsulfate, malate, malonate, methanesulfonate, 2-naphthalenesulfonate, nicotinate, nitrate, oleate, palmitate, pamoate, pectinate, persulfate, 3-phenylpropionate, picrate, pivalate, propionate, stearate, thiocyanate, p-toluenesulfonate, undecanoate, valerate salts, and the like. Salts derived from appropriate bases include alkali metal, alkaline earth  metal, ammonium and N+ (C 1-4 alkyl)  4 salts. This invention also envisions the quaternization of any basic nitrogen-containing groups of the compounds disclosed herein. Water or oil soluble or dispersable products may be obtained by such quaternization. Representative alkali or alkaline earth metal salts include sodium, lithium, potassium, calcium, magnesium, and the like. Further pharmaceutically acceptable salts include, when appropriate, nontoxic ammonium, quaternary ammonium, and amine cations formed using counterions such as halide, hydroxide, carboxylate, sulfate, phosphate, nitrate, C 1-C 8 sulfonate or aryl sulfonate.
The term “solvate” refers to an association or complex of one or more solvent molecules and a compound disclosed herein. Some non-limiting examples of the solvent that form solvates include water, isopropanol, ethanol, methanol, dimethylsulfoxide (DMSO) , ethyl acetate, acetic acid, ethanolamine or a combination thereof. The term “hydrate” refers to the complex where the solvent molecule is water.
The term “hydrate” can be used when said solvent is water. In one embodiment, one water molecule is associated with one molecule of the compounds disclosed herein, such as a hydrate. In another embodiment, more than one water molecule may be associated with one molecule of the compounds disclosed herein, such as a dihydrate. In still another embodiment, less than one water molecule may be associated with one molecule of the compounds disclosed herein, such as a hemihydrate. Furthermore, all the hydrates of the invention retain the biological effectiveness of the non-hydrate form of the compounds disclosed herein.
The term “treat” , “treating” or “treatment” of any disease or disorder refers in one embodiment, to ameliorating the disease or disorder (i.e., slowing or arresting or reducing the development of the disease or at least one of the clinical symptoms thereof) . In another embodiment “treat” , “treating” or “treatment” refers to alleviating or ameliorating at least one physical parameter including those which may not be discernible by the patient. In yet another embodiment, “treat” , “treating” or “treatment” refers to modulating the disease or disorder, either physically, (e.g., stabilization of a discernible symptom) , physiologically, (e.g., stabilization of a physical parameter) , or both. In yet another embodiment, “treat” , “treating” or “treatment” refers to preventing or delaying the onset or development or progression of the disease or disorder.
The term “preventing” or “prevention” refers to a reduction in risk of acquiring a disease or disorder (i.e., causing at least one of the clinical symptoms of the disease not to develop in a subject that may be exposed to or predisposed to the disease but does not yet experience or display symptoms of the disease) .
Unless otherwise stated, all suitable isotopic variations, stereoisomers, tautomers, solvates, metabolites, salts and pharmaceutically acceptable prodrugs of the compounds disclosed herein are within the scope of the invention.
All stereisomers of the structure disclosed herein are considered within the scope of the invention  whether the stereochemistry of the structure is indicated or not, and which are interpreted as disclosed compounds of the invention and included in the invention. When the stereochemistry of a structure is indicated by solid wedge or dash line, the stereisomer of the structure is definite.
N-oxides of the compound disclosed herein are also included in the invention. N-oxides of the compound of the invention can be prepared by oxidizing corresponding nitrogen-containing alkaline substances with common oxidants (such as hydrogen peroxide) under a rising temperature in the presence of an acid, such as acetic acid, or by reacting with peracid in a suitable solvent, e.g., by reacting with peracetic acid in dichloromethane, ethyl acetate or methyl acetate, or by reacting with 3-chloroperoxybenzoic acid in chloroform or dichloromethane.
The compound of Formula (I) , (II) , (III) or (IV) can exist in salt forms. In one embodiment, the salt is a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof. The term “pharmaceutically acceptable” refers to that the substance or composition must be chemically and/or toxicologically compatible with the other ingredients comprising a formulation, and/or the mammal being treated therewith. In another embodiment, the salt may not be a pharmaceutically acceptable salt, may be an intermediate used for preparing and/or purifying the compound of Formula (I) , (II) , (III) or (IV) and/or isolating an enantiomer from the compound of Formula (I) , (II) , (III) or (IV) .
The pharmaceutically acceptable salts of the present invention can be synthesized from a basic or acidic moiety, by conventional chemical methods. Generally, such salts can be prepared by reacting free acid forms of these compounds with a stoichiometric amount of the appropriate base (such as Na, Ca, Mg, or K hydroxide, carbonate, bicarbonate or the like) , or by reacting free base forms of these compounds with a stoichiometric amount of the appropriate acid. Such reactions are typically carried out in water or in an organic solvent, or in a mixture of the two. Generally, use of non-aqueous media like ether, ethyl acetate, ethanol, isopropanol, or acetonitrile is desirable, where practicable. Lists of additional suitable salts can be found, e.g., in “Remington's Pharmaceutical Sciences” , 20th ed., Mack Publishing Company, Easton, Pa., (1985) ; and in “Handbook of Pharmaceutical Salts: Properties, Selection, and Use” by Stahl and Wermuth (Wiley-VCH, Weinheim, Germany, 2002) .
Any formula given herein is also intended to represent isotopically unenriched forms as well as isotopically enriched forms of the compounds. Isotopically enriched compounds have the structure depicted by the general formula given herein, except that one or more atoms are replaced by atom (s) having a selected atomic mass or mass number. Examples of isotopes that can be incorporated into compounds of the invention inc lude isotopes of hydrogen, carbon, nitrogen, oxygen, phosphorous, sulfur, fluorine, and chlorine, such as  2H (deuterium, D) ,  3H,  11C,  13C,  14C,  15N,  17O,  18O,  18F,  31P,  32P,  35S,  36Cl,  125I, respectively.
In other aspect, provided herein is an intermediate for preparing the compound of Formula (I) , (II) , (III) or (IV) .
In other aspect, provided herein is a pharmaceutical composition comprising the compound disclosed herein. In some embodiments, the pharmaceutical composition disclosed herein further comprises at least one of pharmaceutically acceptable carrier, excipient, adjuvant, solvent or a combination thereof. In other embodiment, the pharmaceutical composition can be liquid, solid, semi-solid, gel or spray.
DESCRIPTION OF COMPOUNDS OF THE INVENTION
The 8-substituted styryl xanthine derivatives, pharmaceutically acceptable salts, pharmaceutical formulations and compositions thereof disclosed herein can be used to antagonize adenosine A 2A receptors, and have potential therapeutic use for adenosine A 2A receptor-related diseases, especially PD (Parkinson's disease) . The present invention further describes the synthetic method of the compound. The compounds of the invention show good bioactivity.
In one aspect, provided herein is a compound having Formula (I) or a stereoisomer, a tautomer, an N-oxide, a hydrate, a solvate, a metabolite, a pharmaceutically acceptable salt or a prodrug thereof,
Figure PCTCN2019127192-appb-000009
wherein R 1, R 2, R 3, R 4, R 5, R 6, R 7 and R 8 are as defined herein.
In some embodiments, each of R 1, R 2 and R 3 is independently H, D, F, Cl, Br, I, -CD 3, -CN, -NO 2, -NH 2, -OH, -SH, -COOH, -C (=O) NH 2, -C (=O) NHCH 3, -C (=O) N (CH 32, -C (=O) - (C 1-C 6 alkyl) , -C (=O) - (C 1-C 6 alkoxy) , C 1-C 6 alkyl, C 2-C 6 alkenyl, C 2-C 6 alkynyl, C 1-C 6 haloalkyl, C 1-C 6 alkoxy, C 1-C 6 haloalkoxy, C 1-C 6 alkylthio, C 1-C 6 alkylamino, hydroxyl-substituted C 1-C 6 alkyl, C 3-C 8 cycloalkyl, 3-8 membered heterocyclyl, C 6-C 10 aryl or 5-10 membered heteroaryl.
In one embodiment, at least one of R 4, R 5, R 6, R 7 and R 8 is -O-R 0, the remaining groups are independently H, D, F, Cl, Br, I, -CN, -NO 2, -NH 2, -OH, -SH, -COOH, -C (=O) NH 2, -C (=O) NHCH 3, -C (=O) N (CH 32, -C (=O) - (C 1-C 6 alkyl) , -C (=O) - (C 1-C 6 alkoxy) , C 1-C 6 alkyl, C 2-C 6 alkenyl, C 2-C 6 alkynyl, C 1-C 6 haloalkyl, C 1-C 6 alkoxy, C 1-C 6 haloalkoxy, C 1-C 6 alkylthio, C 1-C 6 alkylamino, hydroxy substituted C 1-C 6 alkyl, C 3-C 8 cycloalkyl, 3-8 membered heterocyclyl, C 6-C 10 aryl or 5-10 membered heteroaryl; wherein R 0 is as defined herein.
In one embodiment, R 0 is - (CH 2m- (3-8 membered oxygen-containing heterocyclic ring) , wherein the  3-8 membered oxygen-containing heterocyclic ring is optionally substituted with 1, 2 or 3 R 9 groups; wherein m and R 9 are as defined herein.
In one embodiment, each R 9 is independently D, F, Cl, Br, I, -CN, -NO 2, -NH 2, -OH, -COOH, -C (=O) -NH 2, C 1-C 4 alkyl, C 1-C 4 haloalkyl, C 1-C 4 alkoxy, C 1-C 4 haloalkoxy, hydroxy-substituted C 1-C 4 alkyl.
In one embodiment, m is 0, 1, 2 or 3.
In one embodiment, R 0 is
Figure PCTCN2019127192-appb-000010
wherein
Figure PCTCN2019127192-appb-000011
is optionally substituted by 1, 2 or 3 R 9 groups, x is 0, 1, 2 or 3, y is 1, 2 or 3; wherein m and R 9 are as defined herein.
In other embodiment, R 0 is
Figure PCTCN2019127192-appb-000012
Figure PCTCN2019127192-appb-000013
In one embodiment, each R 9 is D, F, Cl, Br, I, -CN, -NO 2, -NH 2, -OH, -COOH, -C (=O) NH 2, methyl, ethyl, n-propyl, i-propyl, -CF 3, -CH 2CF 3, methoxy, ethoxy, n-propoxy or i-propoxy.
In one embodiment, each of R 1, R 2 and R 3 is independently H, D, F, Cl, Br, I, -CD 3, -CN, -NO 2, -NH 2, -OH, -SH, -COOH, -C (=O) NH 2, -C (=O) NHCH 3, -C (=O) N (CH 32, -C (=O) - (C 1-C 4 alkyl) , -C (=O) - (C 1-C 4 alkoxy) , C 1-C 4 alkyl, C 2-C 4 alkenyl, C 2-C 4 alkynyl, C 1-C 4 haloalkyl, C 1-C 4 alkoxy, C 1-C 4 haloalkoxy, C 1-C 4 alkylthio, C 1-C 4 alkylamino, hydroxyl-substituted C 1-C 4 alkyl, C 3-C 6 cycloalkyl, 3-6 membered heterocyclyl, C 6-C 10 aryl or 5-10 membered heteroaryl.
In other embodiment, each of R 1, R 2 and R 3 is independently H, D, F, Cl, Br, I, -CD 3, -CN, -NO 2, -NH 2, -OH, -SH, -COOH, -C (=O) NH 2, -C (=O) NHCH 3, -C (=O) N (CH 32, -C (=O) -CH 3, -C (=O) -OCH 3, methyl, ethyl, n-propyl, isopropyl, allyl, propenyl, propargyl, propynyl, -CHF 2, -CF 3, -CHFCH 2F, -CF 2CHF 2, -CH 2CF 3, -CH 2CF 2CHF 2, methoxy, ethoxy, n-propyloxy, isopropyloxy, -OCHF 2, -OCF 3, -OCHFCH 2F, -OCF 2CHF 2, -OCH 2CF 3, -OCH 2CF 2CHF 2, methylthio, ethylthio, methylamino, dimethylamino, ethylamino, hydroxymethyl, 2-hydroxyethyl, cyclopropyl, cyclobutyl, cyclopentyl, cyclohexyl, azetidinyl, pyrrolidinyl, tetrahydrofuranyl, piperidinyl, piperazinyl, morpholinyl, phenyl, indenyl, naphthyl, pyrrolyl, pyrazolyl, imidazolyl, triazolyl, tetrazolyl, furyl, thienyl, thiazolyl, oxazolyl, pyridyl, pyrimidinyl, pyrazinyl, pyridazinyl, benzimidazolyl, indoyl or quinolyl.
In one embodiment, at least one of R 4, R 5, R 6, R 7 and R 8 is -O-R 0, the remaining groups are independently H, D, F, Cl, Br, I, -CN, -NO 2, -NH 2, -OH, -SH, -COOH, -C (=O) NH 2, -C (=O) NHCH 3,  -C (=O) N (CH 32, -C (=O) - (C 1-C 4 alkyl) , -C (=O) - (C 1-C 4 alkoxy) , C 1-C 4 alkyl, C 2-C 4 alkenyl, C 2-C 4 alkynyl, C 1-C 4 haloalkyl, C 1-C 4 alkoxy, C 1-C 4 haloalkoxy, C 1-C 4 alkylthio, C 1-C 4 alkylamino, hydroxy substituted C 1-C 4 alkyl, C 3-C 6 cycloalkyl, 3-6 membered heterocyclyl, C 6-C 10 aryl or 5-10 membered heteroaryl; wherein R 0 is as defined herein..
In other embodiment, at least one of R 4, R 5, R 6, R 7 and R 8 is -O-R 0, the remaining groups are independently H, D, F, Cl, Br, I, -CN, -NO 2, -NH 2, -OH, -SH, -COOH, -C (=O) NH 2, -C (=O) NHCH 3, -C (=O) N (CH 32, -C (=O) -CH 3, -C (=O) -OCH 3, methyl, ethyl, n-propyl, isopropyl, allyl, propenyl, propargyl, propynyl, -CHF 2, -CF 3, -CHFCH 2F, -CF 2CHF 2, -CH 2CF 3, -CH 2CF 2CHF 2, methoxy, ethoxy, n-propyloxy, isopropyloxy, -OCHF 2, -OCF 3, -OCHFCH 2F, -OCF 2CHF 2, -OCH 2CF 3, -OCH 2CF 2CHF 2, methylthio, ethylthio, methylamino, dimethylamino, ethylamino, hydroxymethyl, 2-hydroxyethyl, cyclopropyl, cyclobutyl, cyclopentyl, cyclohexyl, azetidinyl, pyrrolidinyl, tetrahydrofuranyl, piperidinyl, piperazinyl, morpholinyl, phenyl, indenyl, naphthyl, pyrrolyl , pyrazolyl, imidazolyl, triazolyl, tetrazolyl, furyl, thienyl, thiazolyl, oxazolyl, pyridyl, pyrimidinyl, pyrazinyl, pyridazinyl, benzimidazolyl, indoyl or quinolyl; wherein R 0 is as defined herein..
In some embodiments, provided herein is a compound having Formula (II) or a stereoisomer, a tautomer, an N-oxide, a hydrate, a solvate, a metabolite, a pharmaceutically acceptable salt or a prodrug thereof,
Figure PCTCN2019127192-appb-000014
wherein R 1, R 2, R 3, R 4, R 5, R 6, R 7 and R 0 are as defined herein.
In other embodiments, provided herein is a compound having Formula (III) or a stereoisomer, a tautomer, an N-oxide, a hydrate, a solvate, a metabolite, a pharmaceutically acceptable salt or a prodrug thereof,
Figure PCTCN2019127192-appb-000015
wherein R 1, R 2, R 3, R 4, R 5, R 6, R 8 and R 0 are as defined herein.
In yet other embodiments, provided herein is a compound having Formula (IV) or a stereoisomer, a tautomer, an N-oxide, a hydrate, a solvate, a metabolite, a pharmaceutically acceptable salt or a prodrug thereof,
Figure PCTCN2019127192-appb-000016
wherein R 1, R 2, R 3, R 4, R 5, R 7, R 8 and R 0 are as defined herein.
In some embodiments, the compound disclosed herein has one of the following structures or a stereoisomer, a tautomer, an N-oxide, a hydrate, a solvate, a metabolite, a pharmaceutically acceptable salt or a prodrug thereof, but is in no way limited to:
Figure PCTCN2019127192-appb-000017
Figure PCTCN2019127192-appb-000018
Figure PCTCN2019127192-appb-000019
In other aspect, provided herein is a pharmaceutical composition comprising the compound of Formula (I) , (II) , (III) or (IV) .
In some embodiments, the pharmaceutical composition disclosed herein further comprises a pharmaceutically acceptable excipient, a carrier, an adjuvant or a combination thereof.
In other embodiment, the pharmaceutical composition according to the present invention further comprises an additional therapeutic agent, wherein the additional therapeutic agent is monoamine oxidase B-type inhibitors such as selegiline and rasagiline, dopamine agonists such as bromocriptine, cabergoline, pergolide, pramipexole, ropinirole and rotigotine, anticholinergic drugs such as trihexphenidyl, benztropine, orfenadrine and procyclidine, glutamate antagonists such as amantadine, levodopa (optionally in combination with a carboxylase inhibitor such as carbidopa and benzylhydrazine, a COMT inhibitor such as tocapone and entacapone or both a carboxylase inhibitor and a COMT inhibitor) or any combination thereof.
In other aspect, the present invention relates to use of the compound represented by formula (I) , (II) , (III) or (IV) or the pharmaceutical composition thereof in the manufacture of a medicament for preventing, treating or lessening an adenosine A 2A receptor-related disease in a patient.
In some embodiments, an adenosine A 2A receptor-related disease is Parkinson's disease, pain, depression,  dementia, stroke, myocardial ischemia, asthma, alcohol withdrawal, dyskinesia syndrome, restless leg syndrome, dystonia, systemic stiffness, neurodegenerative disorders or osteoporosis.
In other embodiments, the adenosine A 2A receptor-related disease is PD (Parkinson's disease) .
In other aspect, the present invention relates to use of the compound represented by formula (I) , (II) , (III) or (IV) or the pharmaceutical composition thereof in the manufacture of a medicament for antagonizing adenosine A 2A receptor.
In other aspect, the present invention relates to the compound represented by formula (I) , (II) , (III) or (IV) or the pharmaceutical composition thereof for use in preventing, treating or lessening an adenosine A 2A receptor-related disease in a subject.
In some embodiments, an adenosine A 2A receptor-related disease is Parkinson's disease, pain, depression, dementia, stroke, myocardial ischemia, asthma, alcohol withdrawal, dyskinesia syndrome, restless leg syndrome, dystonia, systemic stiffness, neurodegenerative disorders or osteoporosis.
In other aspect, the present invention relates to the compound represented by formula (I) , (II) , (III) or (IV) or the pharmaceutical composition thereof for use in antagonizing adenosine A 2A receptor.
In other aspect, the present invention relates to a method of preventing, treating or lessening an adenosine A 2A receptor-related disease, which comprises administering a therapeutically effective dose of the compound represented by formula (I) , (II) , (III) or (IV) or the pharmaceutical composition thereof.
In some embodiments, an adenosine A 2A receptor-related disease is Parkinson's disease, pain, depression, dementia, stroke, myocardial ischemia, asthma, alcohol withdrawal, dyskinesia syndrome, restless leg syndrome, dystonia, systemic stiffness, neurodegenerative disorders or osteoporosis.
In other aspect, the present invention relates to a method of antagonizing adenosine A 2A receptor, which comprises administering a therapeutically effective dose of the compound represented by formula (I) , (II) , (III) or (IV) or the pharmaceutical composition thereof.
In other aspect, provided herein is a method of preparing, separating or purifying the compound of Formula (I) , (II) , (III) or (IV) .
PHARMACEUTICAL COMPOSITION OF THE COMPOUND OF THE INVENTION AND  PREPARATIONS AND ADMINISTRATION
The invention provides a pharmaceutical composition containing a compound of formula (I) , (II) , (III) or (IV) or an independent stereisomer thereof, a racemic mixture or non-racemic mixture of the stereisomer thereof, or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt or solvent thereof. In one embodiment of the invention, the pharmaceutical composition further comprises at least one pharmaceutically acceptable carrier, adjuvant or  excipient, and optionally other treating and/or preventing ingredients.
A suitable carrier, adjuvant or excipient is well known for the technical personnel in the field and was described in detail in Ansel H. C. et al., Ansel’s Pharmaceutical Dosage Forms and Drug Delivery Systems (2004) Lippincott, Williams &Wilkins, Philadelphia; Gennaro A. R. et al., Remington: The Science and Practice of Pharmacy (2000) Lippincott, Williams &Wilkins, Philadelphia; and Rowe R. C., Handbook of Pharmaceutical Excipients (2005) Pharmaceutical Press, Chicago.
“Pharmaceutically acceptable excipient” as used herein means a pharmaceutically acceptable material, composition or vehicle involved in giving form or consistency to the pharmaceutical composition. Each excipient must be compatible with the other ingredients of the pharmaceutical composition when commingled, such that interactions which would substantially reduce the efficacy of the compound of the invention when administered to a patient and would result in pharmaceutically unacceptable compositions are avoided. In addition, each excipient must be of sufficiently high purity to render it is pharmaceutically acceptable.
Suitable pharmaceutically acceptable excipients will vary depending upon the particular dosage form chosen. In addition, suitable pharmaceutically acceptable excipients may be chosen for a particular function that they may serve in the composition. For example, certain pharmaceutically acceptable excipients may be chosen for their ability to facilitate the production of uniform dosage forms. Certain pharmaceutically acceptable excipients may be chosen for their ability to facilitate the production of stable dosage forms. Certain pharmaceutically acceptable excipients may be chosen for their ability to facilitate the carrying or transporting the compound of the present invention once administered to the patient from one organ, or portion of the body, to another organ, or portion of the body. Certain pharmaceutically acceptable excipients may be chosen for their ability to enhance patient compliance.
Examples of suitable excipients include lactose, glucose, sucrose, sorbitol, mannitol, starch, arabic gum, calcium phosphate, alginate, xanthate, gelatin, calcium silicate, microcrystalline cellulose, polyvinylpyrrolidone, cellulose, water, syrup and methyl cellulose. Suitable pharmaceutically acceptable excipients further include the following types: diluents, fillers, binders, disintegrants, lubricants (such as talc powder, magnesium stearate and mineral oil) , glidants, granulating agents, coating agents, wetting agents, solvents, co-solvents, suspending agents, emulsifiers, sweetners, flavoring agents, flavor masking agents, coloring agents, anticaking agents, humectants, chelating agents, plasticizers, viscosity increasing agents, antioxidants, preservatives (such as methyl hydroxybenzoate and propyl hydroxybenzoate) , stabilizers, surfactants-and buffering agents. The skilled artisan will appreciate that certain pharmaceutically acceptable excipients may serve more than one function and may serve alternative functions depending on how much of the excipient is present in the formulation and what other  ingredients are present in the formulation. The compounds of the invention can be prepared by known methods in the field so that the active components will be released rapidly, continuously or controllably after administration in patients.
Skilled artisans possess the knowledge and skill in the art to enable them to select suitable pharmaceutically acceptable excipients in appropriate amounts for use in the invention. In addition, there are a number of resources that are available to the skilled artisan which describe pharmaceutically acceptable excipients and may be useful in selecting suitable pharmaceutically acceptable excipients. Examples include Remington's Pharmaceutical Sciences (Mack Publishing Company) , The Handbook of Pharmaceutical Additives (Gower Publishing Limited) , and The Handbook of Pharmaceutical Excipients (the American Pharmaceutical Association and the Pharmaceutical Press) .
In Remington: The Science and Practice of Pharmacy, 21st edition, 2005, ed. D. B. Troy, Lippincott Williams &Wilkins, Philadelphia, and Encyclopedia of Pharmaceutical Technology, eds. J. Swarbrick and J. C. Boylan, 1988-1999, Marcel Dekker, New York disclosed various carriers used in formulating pharmaceutically acceptable compositions and known techniques for the preparation thereof, the contents of each of which is incorporated by reference herein. Except insofar as any conventional carrier medium is incompatible with the compounds of the invention, such as by producing any undesirable biological effect or otherwise interacting in a deleterious manner with any other component (s) of the pharmaceutically acceptable composition, its use is contemplated to be within the scope of this invention.
Suitable pharmaceutically acceptable carriers depend on the pharmaceutical form and are known to those skilled in the art.
As used in the present invention, a “pharmaceutically acceptable carrier” includes any and all solvents and solvent mixtures, coatings, complexing agents, solid carriers, dispersion media, surface active excipients, antibacterial and antifungal drugs, isotonic and absorption delaying agents for pharmaceutically active substances, and mixtures thereof, which are also known in the art.
Some non-limiting examples of pharmaceutically acceptable carriers include those having a component selected from the group consisting of lactose, gelatin, sugar alcohol (eg. starch, mannitol, corn starch, etc. ) , vegetable oil, talc, magnesium stearate, colloidal silicon dioxide, carboxymethyl cellulose, microcrystalline cellulose, sodium lauryl sulfate, buffered aqueous solution, copovidone, polysorbate, ethanol, propylene glycol, polyglycol (preferably polyethylene glycol, such as PEG400) , 
Figure PCTCN2019127192-appb-000020
80 (i.e. PEG (20) , sorbitol monooleate) , DMSO, the mixture of water and cosolvent, for example aqueous solution of alcohol (such as ethanol) and/or polyglycol (such as polyethylene glycol) , ester of polyol (such as glycerin and/or polyethylene glycol) and fatty acid, surfactants such as anionic, cationic, nonionic and amphoteric surfactant, complexing agent for example cyclodextrin (e.g. α-cyclodextrin (α-CD) or hydroxypropyl-β-cyclodextrin (HP-β-CD) ) , bile acid, lipid, such as  salts of animal or plant phospholipids, micelle-forming agent, oil such as corn oil and a mixture of two or more of the aforementioned components.
Pharmaceutically acceptable carriers may be solid or liquid carriers for the preparation of pharmaceutical compositions using compounds described in the present invention. Solid formulations include powders, tablets, dispersible granules, capsules, cachets, and suppositories. Powders and tablets may contain about 5%to about 95%active ingredients. Suitable solid carriers are known in the field, such as magnesium carbonate, magnesium stearate, talc powder, sugar or lactose. Tablets, powders, flat capsules and capsules may be used as solid dosage forms suitable for oral administration. Examples of medicinal carriers and methods for preparing various compositions can be obtained as follows: A. Gennaro (ed. ) , Remington's Pharmaceutical Sciences, 18 th ed., 1990, Mack Publishing Company Co., Easton, Pennsylvania.
Some non-limiting examples of further suitable pharmaceutically acceptable carriers and suitable additives that can be used in the pharmaceutical composition of the present invention are mentioned below.
In one embodiment, the invention relates to a pharmaceutical composition described herein, which forms a lipid-based drug delivery system (DDS) in an aqueous medium. The pharmaceutical composition includes at least one surfactant in addition to at least one of the compounds having formula (I) , (II) , (III) or (IV) or a salt thereof. Some non-limiting examples of suitable surfactants are as described above. In various embodiments, the lipid-based drug delivery system forms the following structure: (1) liposomes (i.e., dispersed closed bilayer assemblies of lamellar phases in water) ; (2) nanoparticles of non-lamellar phases (such as cubes, hexagons, sponges) ; or (3) micelles, emulsion, microemulsion (i.e., simple self-assembling structure of lipids and surfactants) .
In some embodiments, lipid-based drug delivery systems that form micelles, emulsions, or microemulsions are preferred. A suitable surfactant or surfactant mixture for forming micelles, emulsions, or microemulsions has a hydrophilic-lipophilic balance (HLB-value) of generally about 8-18, about 10-18, or about 12-16. Lipid-based drug delivery systems form self-emulsifying drug delivery systems (SEDDS) or self-microemulsifying drug delivery systems (SMEDDS) SEDDS and SMEDDS are a mixture of an oil (i.e., a lipid, such as a compound of formula (I) or a salt thereof) , at least one surfactant, optionally at least one co-solvent, and optionally at least one co-surfactant. Ideally the mixture is isotropic, when introduced into the water phase under gentle agitation, it spontaneously emulsifies to form an oil-in-water emulsifier. Gentle agitation may be provided, for example, by the mobility of the stomach.
The pharmaceutical compositions of the invention are prepared using techniques and methods known to those skilled in the art. Some of the methods commonly used in the art are described in Remington's  Pharmaceutical Sciences (Mack Publishing Company) .
Therefore, another aspect of the present invention is related to a method for preparing a pharmaceutical composition, wherein the pharmaceutical composition contains the compound disclosed herein and pharmaceutically acceptable excipient, carrier, adjuvant, vehicle or a combination thereof, and the method comprises mixing various ingredients. The pharmaceutical composition containing the compound disclosed herein can be prepared at for example environment temperature and under barometric pressure.
The compound of the invention will typically be formulated into a dosage form adapted for administration to the patient by the desired route of administration. For example, dosage forms include those adapted for (1) oral administration such as tablets, capsules, caplets, pills, troches, powders, syrups, elixers, suspensions, solutions, emulsions, sachets, and cachets; (2) parenteral administration such as sterile solutions, suspensions, and powders for reconstitution; (3) transdermal administration such as transdermal patches; (4) rectal administration such as suppositories; (5) inhalation such as aerosols, solutions, and dry powders; and (6) topical administration such as creams, ointments, lotions, solutions, pastes, sprays, foams, and gels.
The compounds or pharmaceutical compositions of the invention can be administered in a suitable manner, for example, by the oral, intravenous, subcutaneous, intramuscular or intrathecal route. Preferably it is administered orally, enterally or parenterally. Most preferred is oral administration.
The compounds of the invention can be administered orally, for example, with an inert diluent or with an absorbable food carrier, enclosed in capsules, compressed into tablets, or incorporated directly into dietary foods. For intraoral therapeutic administration, in an exemplary embodiment, the active compound is mixed with excipients and used in the form of absorbable tablet, buccal tablet, tablet, capsule, soft gel capsule, pill, powder, dispersion, lozenge, suspension, syrup, elixir, solution, liquid and the like. Such pharmaceutical compositions and formulations comprise a therapeutically effective amount of the active ingredient, which is usually present at a level of at least 1 wt%of the composition being administered. In various embodiments, the pharmaceutical composition comprises about 5-80 wt%of the active compound.
In various embodiments, tablets, capsules, pills, lozenges and the like contain one or more of the following: excipients such as dicalcium phosphate; lubricants such as magnesium stearate; binding agents such as acacia, tragacanth, corn starch or white gelatin; disintegrating agents such as alginic acid, corn starch, potato starch, etc.; flavoring agents such as wintergreen oil, peppermint; sweetness agents such as saccharin, sucrose or lactose; cherry flavor. When the dosage unit form is a capsule, it may contain, in addition to materials of the above type, a liquid carrier.
Various other materials may exist in the form of a coating or in other form altering the actual form of the  dosage unit. For example, tablets, capsules, or pills can be coated with sugar, shellac, or both. The syrup or tincture may contain a compound represented by formula (I) , (II) , (III) or (IV) , a dye, a preservative such as methylparaben or propylparaben, a sweetener such as sucrose, and flavorants like cherry or orange spice.
It will also be appreciated that certain of the compounds of present invention can exist in free form for treatment, or where appropriate, as a pharmaceutically acceptable derivative or a prodrug thereof. According to the present invention, a pharmaceutically acceptable derivative includes, but is not limited to, pharmaceutically acceptable prodrugs, salts, esters, salts of such esters, or any other adduct or derivative which upon administration to a patient in need thereof is capable of providing, directly or indirectly, a compound as described herein, or a metabolite or residue thereof.
In one embodiment, the compounds disclosed herein can be prepared to oral. In the other embodiment, the compounds disclosed herein can be prepared to inhalation. In the still other embodiment, the compounds disclosed herein can be prepared to nasal administration. In the yet other embodiment, the compounds disclosed herein can be prepared to transdermal administration. In the still yet other embodiments, the compounds disclosed herein can be prepared to topical administration.
The pharmaceutical compositions provided herein may be provided as compressed tablets, tablet triturates, chewable lozenges, rapidly dissolving tablets, multiple compressed tablets, or enteric-coating tablets, sugar-coated, or film-coated tablets. Enteric-coated tablets are compressed tablets coated with substances that resist the action of stomach acid but dissolve or disintegrate in the intestine, thus protecting the active ingredients from the acidic environment of the stomach. Enteric-coatings include, but are not limited to, fatty acids, fats, phenylsalicylate, waxes, shellac, ammoniated shellac, and cellulose acetate phthalates. Sugar-coated tablets are compressed tablets surrounded by a sugar coating, which may be beneficial in covering up objectionable tastes or odors and in protecting the tablets from oxidation. Film-coated tablets are compressed tablets that are covered with a thin layer or film of a water-soluble material. Film coatings include, but are not limited to, hydroxyethylcellulose, sodium carboxymethylcellulose, polyethylene glycol 4000, and cellulose acetate phthalate. Film coating imparts the same general characteristics as sugar coating. Multiple compressed tablets are compressed tablets made by more than one compression cycle, including layered tablets, and press-coated or dry-coated tablets.
The tablet dosage forms may be prepared from the active ingredient in powdered, crystalline, or granular forms, alone or in combination with one or more carriers or excipients described herein, including binders, disintegrants, controlled-release polymers, lubricants, diluents, and/or colorants. Flavoring and sweetening agents are especially useful in the formation of chewable tablets and lozenges.
The pharmaceutical compositions provided herein may be provided as soft or hard capsules, which can be made from gelatin, methylcellulose, starch, or calcium alginate. The hard gelatin capsule, also known as the dry-filled capsule (DFC) , consists of two sections, one slipping over the other, thus completely enc losing the active ingredient. The soft elastic capsule (SEC) is a soft, globular shell, such as a gelatin shell, which is plasticized by the addition of glycerin, sorbitol, or a similar polyol. The soft gelatin shells may contain a preservative to prevent the growth of microorganisms. Suitable preservatives are those as described herein, including methyl-and propyl-parabens, and sorbic acid. The liquid, semisolid, and solid dosage forms provided herein may be encapsulated in a capsule. Suitable liquid and semisolid dosage forms include solutions and suspensions in propylene carbonate, vegetable oils, or triglycerides. Capsules containing such solutions can be prepared as described in U.S. Pat. Nos. 4,328,245; 4,409,239; and 4,410,545. The capsules may also be coated as known by those of skill in the art in order to modify or sustain dissolution of the active ingredient.
In one embodiment, the compound of formula (I) , (II) , (III) or (IV) is contained in a capsule. Capsule can be hard or soft. Capsules can be made from any suitable film-forming material, including, for example, cellulose derivatives, polyvinyl alcohol, gelatin, pectin, amylopectin or other dextran, modified starches such as starch ethers and oxidized starch, especially hydroxyethylated starch (HES) or hydroxypropylated starch (HPS) alone or a mixture thereof. Cellulose derivatives used to make capsules include, but are not limited to, methyl cellulose, ethyl cellulose, cellulose acetate, hydroxyethyl cellulose, hydroxymethyl cellulose, hydroxypropyl cellulose, hydroxypropylmethyl cellulose, sodium carboxymethyl cellulose, cellulose trimellitate, cellulose acetate phthalate, hydroxypropyl methyl cellulose phthalate, hydroxypropyl methyl cellulose succinate, and a mixture thereof. Preferred cellulose derivatives are methyl cellulose, ethyl cellulose, hydroxyethyl cellulose, hydroxymethyl cellulose, hydroxypropyl cellulose and hydroxypropylmethyl cellulose.
The pharmaceutical compositions provided herein may be provided in liquid and semisolid dosage forms, including emulsions, solutions, suspensions, elixirs, and syrups. An emulsion is a two-phase system, in which one liquid is dispersed in the form of small globules throughout another liquid, which can be oil-in-water or water-in-oil. Emulsions may include a pharmaceutically acceptable non-aqueous liquids or solvent, emulsifying agent, and preservative. Suspensions may include a pharmaceutically acceptable suspending agent and preservative. Aqueous alcoholic solutions may include a pharmaceutically acceptable acetal, such as a di (lower alkyl) acetal of a lower alkyl aldehyde, e.g., acetaldehyde diethyl acetal; and a water-miscible solvent having one or more hydroxy groups, such as propylene glycol and ethanol. Elixirs are clear, sweetened, and hydroalcoholic solutions. Syrups are concentrated aqueous solutions of a sugar, for example, sucrose, and may also contain a preservative. For a liquid dosage form, for example, a solution in a polyethylene glycol may be diluted with a  sufficient quantity of a pharmaceutically acceptable liquid carrier, e.g., water, to be measured conveniently for administration.
The pharmaceutical composition of the invention can be prepared to a dosage form adapted for administration to a patient by inhalation, for example as a dry powder, an aerosol, a suspension, or a solution composition. In one embodiment, the pharmaceutical compositions disclosed in the invention is directed to a dosage form adapted for administration to a patient by inhalation as a dry powder. In one embodiment, the pharmaceutical compositions disclosed in the invention is directed to a dosage form adapted for administration to a patient by inhalation as a nebulizer. Dry powder compositions for delivery to the lung by inhalation typically comprise a compound disclosed herein as a finely divided powder together with one or more pharmaceutically-acceptable excipients as finely divided powders. Pharmaceutically-acceptable excipients particularly suited for use in dry powders are known to those skilled in the art and include lactose, starch, mannitol, and mono-, di-, and polysaccharides. The finely divided powder may be prepared by, for example, micronization and milling. Generally, the size-reduced (eg. micronized) compound can be defined by a D 50 value of about 1 to about 10 microns (for example as measured using laser diffraction) .
Pharmaceutical compositions adapted for transdermal administration may be presented as discrete patches intended to remain in intimate contact with the epidermis of the patient for a prolonged period of time. For example, the active ingredient may be delivered from the patch by iontophoresis as generally described in Pharmaceutical Research, 3 (6) , 318 (1986) .
Pharmaceutical compositions adapted for topical administration may be formulated as ointments, creams, suspensions, lotions, powders, solutions, pastes, gels, sprays, aerosols or oils. Ointments, creams and gels, may, for example, be formulated with an aqueous or oily base with the addition of suitable thickening and/or gelling agent and/or solvents. Such bases may thus, for example, include water and/or an oil such as liquid paraffin or a vegetable oil such as arachis oil or castor oil, or a solvent such as polyethylene glycol. Thickening agents and gelling agents which may be used according to the nature of the base include soft paraffin, aluminium stearate, cetostearyl alcohol, polyethylene glycols, woolfat, beeswax, carboxypolymethylene and cellulose derivatives, and/or glyceryl monostearate and/or non-ionic emulsifying agents.
The compounds disclosed herein can also be coupled to soluble polymers as targeted medicament carriers. Such polymers may encompass polyvinylpyrrolidone, pyran copolymer, polyhydroxypropylmethacrylamidophenol, polyhydroxyethylaspartamidophenol or polyethylene oxide polylysine substituted by palmitoyl radicals. The compounds may furthermore be coupled to a class of biodegradable polymers which are suitable for achieving controlled release of a medicament, for example polylactic acid,  poly-epsilon-caprolactone, polyhydroxybutyric acid, polyorthoesters, polyacetals, polydihydroxypyrans, polycyanoacrylates and crosslinked or amphipathic block copolymers of hydrogels.
The pharmaceutical compositions provided herein may be administered parenterally by injection, infusion, or implantation, for local or systemic administration. Parenteral administration, as used herein, includes intravenous, intraarterial, intraperitoneal, intrathecal, intraventricular, intraurethral, intrasternal, intracranial, intramuscular, intrasynovial, and subcutaneous administration.
The compounds provided by the invention can also be administered parenterally or intraperitoneally. Dispersions can also be prepared in liquid like polyethylene glycols, glycerol and a mixture thereof, and be prepared in oil. Under ordinary conditions of storage and use, these preparations contain a preservative to prevent the growth of microorganisms.
Pharmaceutical forms suitable for injectable use include sterile aqueous solutions (in the case of water solubility) or dispersions and sterile powders for temporary formulation of sterile injectable solutions or dispersions. In all cases, the form is preferably sterile and fluid, to the extent that injectability is prone to occur. It must be stable under the conditions of manufacture and storage, and must prevent contamination of microorganisms such as bacteria and fungi. The carrier can be a solvent or dispersion medium containing, for example, water, ethanol, polyol (for example, glycerol, propylene glycol, liquid polyethylene glycol, and the like) , suitable mixtures thereof, and vegetable oils. For example, proper fluidity can be maintained by maintaining the required particle size (in the case of dispersions) , by using a coating such as lecithin, and by using a surfactant. Preventing contamination of microorganisms can be achieved through various antibacterial and antifungal drugs, such as phenol, chlorobutanol, thimerosal, sorbic acid, paraben, etc. In many cases, it will be preferable to include isotonic agents, such as sodium chloride or sugars. Prolonged absorption of injectable compositions can be achieved by using delayed absorption agents such as gelatin and aluminum monostearate in the composition.
A sterile injectable solution is prepared by incorporating a desired amount of a compound of Formula (I) , (II) , (III) or (IV) with a variety of other ingredients listed above in a suitable solvent, and then filtering and sterilizing if necessary. Generally, dispersion is prepared by incorporating various bactericidally active ingredients into a sterile vehicle, which contains a basic dispersion medium and the required other ingredients listed above. In the case of preparing sterile powders for injectable solutions, the preferred methods of preparation are freeze drying and vacuum drying techniques.
The pharmaceutical compositions provided herein may be formulated in any dosage forms that are suitable for parenteral administration, including solutions, suspensions, emulsions, micelles, liposomes, microspheres, nanosystems, and solid forms suitable for solutions or suspensions in liquid prior to injection. Such  dosage forms can be prepared according to conventional methods known to those skilled in the art of pharmaceutical science (see, Remington: The Science and Practice of Pharmacy, supra) .
The pharmaceutical compositions intended for parenteral administration may include one or more pharmaceutically acceptable carriers and excipients, including, but not limited to, aqueous vehicles, water-miscible vehicles, non-aqueous vehicles, antimicrobial agents or preservatives against the growth of microorganisms, stabilizers, solubility enhancers, isotonic agents, buffering agents, antioxidants, local anesthetics, suspending and dispersing agents, wetting or emulsifying agents, complexing agents, sequestering or chelating agents, cryoprotectants, lyoprotectants, thickening agents, pH adjusting agents, and inert gases.
The pharmaceutical composition provided herein can be administered by rectal in suppository form, in which the drug was mixed with suitable non-irritating excipients such as cocoa oil and glycerol ester synthesized by polyethylene glycol, and the mixture was solid at room temperature and can be released when liquefied or dissolved in the rectal cavity. Because of individual differences, the severity of symptoms between individuals will have great difference, and every drug has its unique therapeutic properties. Therefore, the exact way of administration, dosage form and treatment plan for each individual should be determined by a practicing physician.
The pharmaceutical compositions provided herein may be formulated as immediate or modified release dosage forms, including delayed-, sustained-, pulsed-, controlled-, targeted-, and programmed-release forms. For example, a sustained release dosage form may be considered by incorporating the compound into an ion exchange resin, which may optionally be coated with a diffusion barrier coating to modify the release properties of the resin.
The term “therapeutically effective amount, ” as used herein, refers to the total amount of each active component that is sufficient to show a useful treatment effect. For example, the drug amount of administration or balance in the body sufficient to treat, cure, or alleviate symptoms of a disease. The effective amount required for a special treatment depends on a variety of factors, including diseases, the severity of the disease, the activity of the used specific drug, the mode of administration, the clearance rate of the specific drug, the duration of therapy, the combination of drugs, age, weight, gender, diet and patient's health, and so on. The description of other factors that need to be considered for “therapeutically effective amount” in this field can be found in Gilman et al., eds., Goodman And Gilman’s : . The Pharmacological Bases of Therapeutics, 8 th ed., Pergamon Press, 1990; Remington's Pharmaceutical Sciences, 17 th ed., Mack Publishing Company, Easton, Pa., 1990.
For convenient and effective administration, the compound is compounded in an effective amount with a suitable pharmaceutically acceptable carrier and optionally other suitable additives and excipients in the form of dosage units as described above. The dosage of the compound of formula (I) , (II) , (III) or (IV) depends on the  route of administration, the age and weight of the patient, the nature and severity of the disease to be treated, and other factors. In various embodiments, the daily dose is typically 2 to 2000 mg/d, such as 50 to 500 mg/d. Within these ranges, in various embodiments, subranges are selected based on lower limit values of 2, 5, 10, 20, 25, 50, 100, 200, 250 or 400 mg/d and and upper limit values of 50, 100, 200, 250, 500, 600, 750, 1000, 1500 and 2000 mg/d. The lower and upper limit values can be combined to give a suitable dosage range, which will depend on various factors such as those described above. The daily dose may be administered in a single dosage unit per day or in two or more dosage units per day.
It is particularly advantageous to formulate the pharmaceutical composition of the present invention in dosage unit form to facilitate administration and uniformity of dosage. A dosage unit form as used in the present invention refers to a completely discrete unit suitable as a single dose for a mammal to be treated. Each unit contains a predetermined amount of a compound of Formula (I) , (II) , (III) or (IV) , which is designed to produce a desired therapeutic effect together with a required pharmaceutical carrier. The details of the new dosage unit form of the invention are specified by and depend directly on (a) and (b) : (a) Unique properties of compounds of Formula (I) , (II) , (III) or (IV) and special therapeutic effects to be obtained; and (b) Limitations inherent in the technology of compounding a compound of formula (I) , (II) , (III) or (IV) for treating a disease in a patient having a disease condition that impairs physical health.
The term “administration” refers to provision of a therapeutically effective amount of medicine to an individual by oral, sublingual, intravenous, subcutaneous, percutaneous, intramuscular, intradermal, intrathecal, epidural, intraocular, intracranial, inhalation, rectal, vagina, etc. The pharmaceutical dosage forms include plaster, lotion, tablet, capsule, pill, dispersible powder, granule, suppository, sublimed preparation, lozenge, injection, aseptic solution or non-aqueous solution, suspension, emulsion, paster, etc. An active component is complexed with a non-toxic pharmaceutically acceptable carrier (such as glucose, lactose, gum arabic, gelatin, mannitol, starch paste, magnesium trisilicate, talcum powder, corn starch, keratin, silica gel, potato starch, urea, dextran, etc. ) .
The preferred route of administration varies with clinical characteristics. Dose changes must depend on situation of patients receiving treatment. Doctors will determine the appropriate dose according to individual status of patients. The therapeutically effective amount per unit dose depends on body weight, physiological function and the selected vaccination program. An amount of compound per unit dose refers to the weight of the compound per each administration, excluding weight of carriers (the drug formulation contains carriers) .
Any suitable route of administration can be used to provide an effective dose of a compound of the invention to a mammal, especially a human. For example, oral administration, rectal administration, parenteral  administration, topical administration, ocular administration, nasal administration, pulmonary administration, etc. Dosage forms include tablets, dragees, capsules, creams, ointments, suspensions, dispersions, solutions, aerosols, etc. Preferably, the compound represented of Formula (I) , (II) , (III) or (IV) is administered orally.
The effective dose of active ingredient used may vary with the particular compound used, the route of administration, the symptoms being treated, and the severity of the symptoms being treated. One skilled in the art can easily determine such a dose.
The pharmaceutical compositions provided herein may be formulated for single or multiple dosage administration. The single dosage formulations are packaged in an ampoule, a vial, or a syringe. The multiple dosage parenteral formulations must contain an antimicrobial agent at bacteriostatic or fungistatic concentrations. All parenteral formulations must be sterile, as known and practiced in the art.
The pharmaceutical compositions provided herein may be co-formulated with other active ingredients which do not impair the desired therapeutic action, or with substances that supplement the desired action.
In one embodiment, the therapeutic methods disclosed herein comprise administrating to a patient in need of the treatment a safe and effective amount of the compound of the invention or the pharmaceutical composition containing the compound of the invention. Each example disclosed herein comprises the method of treating the diseases comprising administrating to a patient in need of the treatment a safe and effective amount of the compound of the invention or the pharmaceutical composition containing the compound of the invention.
In one embodiment, the compound of the invention or the pharmaceutical composition thereof may be administered by any suitable route of administration, including both systemic administration and topical administration. Systemic administration includes oral administration, parenteral administration, transdermal administration and rectal administration. Typical parenteral administration refers to administration by injection or infusion, including intravenous, intramuscular, and subcutaneous injection or infusion. Topical administration includes application to the skin as well as intraocular, otic, intravaginal, inhaled and intranasal administration. In one embodiment, the compound of the invention or the pharmaceutical composition thereof may be administered orally. In another embodiment, the compound of the invention or the pharmaceutical composition thereof may be administered by inhalation. In still one embodiment, the compound of the invention or the pharmaceutical composition thereof may be administered intranasally.
In one embodiment, the compound of the invention or the pharmaceutical composition thereof may be administered once or according to a dosing regimen wherein a number of doses are administered at varying intervals of time for a given period of time. For example, doses may be administered once, twice, three, or four times per day. In one embodiment, a dose is administered once per day. In a further embodiment, a dose is  administered twice per day. Doses may be administered until the desired therapeutic effect is achieved or indefinitely to maintain the desired therapeutic effect. Suitable dosing regimens for the compound of the invention or the pharmaceutical composition thereof depend on the pharmacokinetic properties of that compound, such as absorption, distribution, and half-life, which can be determined by the skilled artisan. In addition, suitable dosing regimens, including the duration of implementation of such regimens, for the compound of the invention or the pharmaceutical composition thereof depend on the disorder being treated, the severity of the disorder being treated, the age and physical condition of the patient being treated, the medical history of the patient to be treated, the nature of concurrent therapy, the desired therapeutic effect, and the like within the knowledge and expertise of the skilled artisan. It will be further understood by such skilled artisans that suitable dosing regimens may require adjustment given an individual patient's response to the dosing regimen or over time as individual patient needs change.
The compounds of the present invention may be administered either simultaneously with, or before or after, one or more other therapeutic agents. The compounds of the present invention may be administered separately, by the same or different route of administration, or together in the same pharmaceutical composition as the other agents. This is chosen by the technical personnel in the field according to the actual conditions of the patient's health, age, weight and so on. If formulated as a fixed dose, such combination products employ the compounds of this invention within the dosage range described herein and the other pharmaceutically active agent or treatment within its dosage range.
Accordingly, in an aspect, this invention includes combinations comprising an amount of at least one compound of the invention, or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt, solvate, ester or prodrug thereof, and an effective amount of one or more additional agents described above.
The compound of Formula (I) , (II) , (III) or (IV) can be used in combination with other drugs for preventing, treating or alleviating diseases or symptoms for which the compound of Formula (I) , (II) , (III) or (IV) is applicable. These other drugs can be administered simultaneously or sequentially with the compound of Formula (I) , (II) , (III) or (IV) by their usual routes and amounts. When the compound of Formula (I) , (II) , (III) or (IV) is used together with one or more other drugs, a pharmaceutical unit dosage form containing such other drugs and the compound of Formula (I) , (II) , (III) or (IV) is preferable.
In various embodiments, the compounds described herein are combined with other drugs to provide a combination therapy for Parkinson's disease or other conditions. The pharmaceutical composition of the present invention includes at least one of the selective adenosine A 2A receptor antagonists described in the present invention and an additional therapeutic agent. Examples of the additional therapeutic agent include, but are not  limited to:
(1) monoamine oxidase type B inhibitors such as selegiline and rasagiline;
(2) dopamine agonists such as bromocriptine, cabergoline, pergolide, pramipexole, ropinirole and rotigotine;
(3) anticholinergic drugs such as trihexphenidyl, benztropine, orfenadrine, and procyclidine;
(4) glutamine acid antagonists such as amantadine;
(5) levodopa (optionally in combination with carboxylase inhibitor such as carbidopa and benzylhydrazine, or COMT inhibitor such as tocapone and entacapone, or both carboxylase inhibitor and COMT inhibitor) .
In all cases, the additional therapeutic agent may be selected from a free base or a neutral compound, or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt. In various embodiments, the selective adenosine A 2A receptor antagonists described in the present invention are combined in a single dosage form with one or more additional therapeutic agents. In other embodiments, the selective adenosine A 2A receptor antagonist and additional therapeutic agent are combined in a kit form or otherwise provided together for administration.
A method for treating Parkinson's Disease or other above-mentioned indications includes administering one or more of selective adenosine A 2A receptor antagonists and monoamine oxidase type B inhibitors, dopamine agonists, anticholinergics, glutamate antagonists, and levodopa, wherein non-limiting examples of adjuvant therapeutic agents are those listed above. The selective adenosine A 2A receptor antagonist and additional therapeutic agents are administered together in a single dose containing two active ingredients or separately in separate dosage forms, as the case may be. In non-limiting examples, one of the agents is administered in a pill or tablet or other solid dosage form, while the other agents are in a pill or tablet or other solid dosage form, a transdermal patch, or injectable administration.
In one embodiment, the compound of the present invention and the above-mentioned additional therapeutic agent are used in the manufacture of a medicament for preventing, treating or lessening an adenosine A 2A receptor-related disease.
Additionally, the compounds of the invention may be administered as prodrugs. As used herein, a “prodrug” of a compound of the invention is a functional derivative of the compound which, upon administration to a patient, eventually liberates the compound of the invention in vivo. Administration of a compound of the invention as a prodrug may enable the skilled artisan to do one or more of the following: (a) modify the onset of action of the compound in vivo; (b) modify the duration of action of the compound in vivo; (c) modify the transportation or distribution of the compound in vivo; (d) modify the solubility of the compound in vivo; and (e) overcome a side effect or other difficulty encountered with the compound. Typical functional derivatives used to prepare prodrugs include modifications of the compound that are chemically or enzymatically cleaved in vivo.  Such modifications, which include the preparation of phosphates, amides, esters, thioesters, carbonates, and carbamates, are well known to those skilled in the art.
USE OF THE COMPOUNDS AND PHARMACEUTICAL COMPOSITIONS
The compounds and pharmaceutical compositions provided by the invention can be used to prepare a medicament for antagonizing adenosine A 2A receptor, and also to prepare a medicament for preventing, treating or lessening an adenosine A 2A receptor-related disease, especially Parkinson's disease.
Specifically, the amount of the compound or the compound of the pharmaceutical composition of the present invention can effectively, detectably and selectively antagonize adenosine A 2A receptor.
Compounds disclosed herein would be useful for, but are in no way limited to, the prevention or treatment or alleviation of an adenosine A 2A receptor-related disease in a patient by administering to the patient a compound or a composition disclosed herein in an effective amount. The adenosine A 2A receptor-related diseases further include, but are not limited to: Parkinson's disease, pain, depression, dementia, stroke, myocardial ischemia, asthma, alcohol withdrawal, dyskinesia syndrome, restless leg syndrome, dystonia, systemic stiffness, neurodegenerative disorders or osteoporosis. Preferably, the compounds of the invention are used for preventing, treating or lessening Parkinson's disease and/or movement disorders.
Besides being useful for human treatment, the compounds and pharmaceutical compositions of the present invention are also useful for veterinary treatment of animals such as companion animals, exotic animals and farm animals. In other embodiments, the animals disclosed herein include horses, dogs, and cats. As used herein, the compounds disclosed herein include the pharmaceutically acceptable derivatives thereof.
GENERAL SYNTHETIC PROCEDURES
The following examples are provided so that the invention might be more fully understood. However, it should be understood that these embodiments merely provide a method of practicing the present invention, and the present invention is not limited to these embodiments.
Generally, the compounds disclosed herein may be prepared by methods described herein, wherein the substituents are defined as shown in Formula (I) , (II) , (III) or (IV) above, except where further noted. The following non-limiting schemes and examples are presented to further exemplify the invention.
Persons skilled in the art will recognize that the chemical reactions described may be readily adapted to prepare a number of other compounds disclosed herein, and alternative methods for preparing the compounds disclosed herein are deemed to be within the scope disclosed herein. For example, the synthesis of non-exemplified compounds according to the invention may be successfully performed by modifications apparent to those skilled in the art, e.g., by appropriately protecting interfering groups, by utilizing other suitable reagents  known in the art other than those described, and/or by making routine modifications of reaction conditions. Alternatively, other reactions disclosed herein or known in the art will be recognized as having applicability for preparing other compounds disclosed herein.
In the examples described below, unless otherwise indicated all temperatures are set forth in degrees Celsius. Reagents were purchased from commercial suppliers such as Aldrich Chemical Company, Arco Chemical Company and Alfa Chemical Company, and were used without further purification unless otherwise indicated. Common solvents were purchased from commercial suppliers such as Shantou XiLong Chemical Factory, Guangdong Guanghua Reagent Chemical Factory Co. Ltd., Guangzhou Reagent Chemical Factory, Tianjin YuYu Fine Chemical Ltd., Tianjin Fuchen Chemical Reagent Factory, Wuhan XinHuaYuan Technology Development Co. Ltd., Qingdao Tenglong Reagent Chemical Ltd., and Qingdao Ocean Chemical Factory.
Anhydrous THF, dioxane, toluene, and ether were obtained by refluxing the solvent with sodium. Anhydrous CH 2Cl 2 and CHCl 3 were obtained by refluxing the solvent with CaH 2. EtOAc, PE, hexane, DMAC and DMF were treated with anhydrous sodium sulfate prior to use.
The reactions set forth below were done generally under a positive pressure of nitrogen or argon or with a drying tube (unless otherwise stated) in anhydrous solvents, and the reaction flasks were typically fitted with rubber septa for the introduction of substrates and reagents via syringe. Glassware was oven dried and/or heat dried.
Column chromatography was conducted using a silica gel column. Silica gel (300-400 mesh) was purchased from Qingdao Ocean Chemical Factory.
1H NMR spectra were recorded by Bruker 400 MHz or 600 MHz NMR spectrometer.  1H NMR spectra were obtained by using CDCl 3, DMSO-d 6, CD 3OD or acetone-d 6 solutions (in ppm) , with TMS (0 ppm) or chloroform (7.26 ppm) as the reference standard. When peak multiplicities are reported, the following abbreviations are used: s (singlet) , d (doublet) , t (triplet) , q (quartet) , m (multiplet) , br (broadened) , brs (broadened singlet) , dd (doublet of doublets) , ddd (doublet of doublet of triplets) , ddt (doublet of doublet of triplets, dt (doublet of triplets) , dq (doublet of quartets) , td (triplet of doublets) , tt (triplet of triplets) , qd (quartet of doublets) . Coupling constants J, when given, were reported in Hertz (Hz) .
Low resolution mass spectrum (MS) data measurement condition: Agilent 6120 Quadrupole HPLC-MS (column type: Zorbax SB-C18, 2.1 x 30 mm, 3.5 micron, 6 min, flow rate 0.6 mL/min) . Mobile phase: in the proportion of 5%-95% (CH 3CN containing 0.1%of formic acid) in (H 2O containing 0.1%of formic acid) , using electrospray ionization (ESI) , UV detection, at 210 nm/254 nm.
Pure compound was detected by Agilent 1260 pre-HPLC or Calesep pump 250 pre-HPLC (NOVASEP  50/80 mm DAC) with UV detection at 210/254 nm.
The following abbreviations are used throughout the specification:
Figure PCTCN2019127192-appb-000021
The following intermediate preparation schemes and synthetic schemes describe the steps for preparing the compounds disclosed herein, unless otherwise specified, wherein each R 0, R 3, R 6 and R 7 is as defined herein. L is a leaving group, such as F, Cl, Br, I.
Intermediate preparation scheme 1
Figure PCTCN2019127192-appb-000022
Compound ( 2) can be prepared through the following process: p-Toluenesulfonyl chloride can react with compound ( 0) to give compound ( 2) .
Synthetic scheme 1
Figure PCTCN2019127192-appb-000023
Compound ( 9) can be prepared through the following process: compound ( 1) can react with compound ( 2) to give compound ( 3) ; compound ( 3) can react with malonate to give compound ( 4) ; compound ( 4) can react with compound ( 5) to give compound ( 6) ; and then compound ( 6) can undergo ring-closing reaction to give compound ( 7) . Compound ( 7) can react with compound ( 8) to give compound ( 9) .
Synthetic scheme 2
Figure PCTCN2019127192-appb-000024
Compound ( 15) can be prepared through the following process: compound ( 10) can react with compound ( 2) to give compound ( 11) ; compound ( 11) can react with malonate to give compound ( 12) ; compound ( 12) can react with compound ( 5) to give compound ( 13) ; and then compound ( 13) can undergo ring-closing reaction to give compound ( 14) . Compound ( 14) can react with compound ( 8) to give compound ( 15) .
The following examples are provided to further illustrate the compounds, pharmaceutical compositions and their applications thereof.
Examples
Example 1 synthesis of (E) -1, 3-diethyl-7-methyl-8- (3- (oxetan-3-yloxy) styryl) -1H-purine-2, 6 (3H, 7H) -dione
Figure PCTCN2019127192-appb-000025
Step 1) synthesis of oxetan-3-yl-4-methylbenzenesulfonate
To a 100 mL single-necked flask were added p-toluenesulfonyl chloride (1.0 g, 5.2 mmol) and triethylamine (2.2 mL, 15.7 mmol) at 25 ℃. Dichloromethane (10 mL) was added, then oxetan-3-ol (0.5 g, 6.7 mmol) was added in batches, and the reaction was continued for 24 h. After that, water (40 mL) and dichloromethane (20 mL) were added in turn. The reaction solution was partitioned. Organic phase was collected,  concentrated in vacuo and purified by column chromatography (petroleum ether/ethyl acetate (v/v) = 10/1 ~ 5/1) to give the title compound as a light yellow solid (1.02 g, 85.2%) .
MS (ESI, pos. ion) m/z: 229.1 [M+H]  +;
1H NMR (400 MHz, CDCl 3) δ (ppm) 7.81 (d, J = 8.2 Hz, 2H) , 7.39 (d, J = 8.1 Hz, 2H) , 5.38 – 5.28 (m, 1H) , 4.76 –4.66 (m, 4H) , 2.49 (s, 3H) .
Step 2) synthesis of 3- (oxetan-3-yloxy) benzaldehyde
To a 100 mL single-necked round bottom flask were added m-hydroxybenzaldehyde (1.5 g, 12.3 mmol) , oxetan-3-yl 4-methylbenzenesulfonate (2.0 g, 8.7 mmol) , and N, N-dimethylformamide (10 mL) . Potassium carbonate (2.6 g, 18.8 mmol) was added and the mixture was stirred at 100 ℃ in an oil bath for 14 h. After the reation was stopped, the reaction solution was cooled to rt, quenched with water (50 mL) . Then ethyl acetate (30 mL) was added, and the resulting mixture was separated. The organic phase was collected, concentrated under reduced pressure. The residue was purified by column chromatography (petroleum ether/ethyl acetate (v/v) = 8/1) to give the title compound as yellow oil (1.1 g, 70%) .
MS (ESI, pos. ion) m/z: 179.2 [M+H]  +.
Step 3) synthesis of (E) -3- (3- (oxetan-3-yloxy) phenyl) acrylic acid
To a 100 mL single-necked round bottom flask were added 3- (oxetan-3-yloxy) benzaldehyde (1.0 g, 5.6 mmol) , malonic acid (1.3 g, 12.5 mmol) , pyridine (2.5 mL, 31 mmol) and N, N-dimethylformamide (5 mL) . The mixture was stirred at 115 ℃ in an oil bath for 5 h. After the reaction was stopped, the reaction solution was cooled to rt, poured into water (50 mL) , and adjusted with hydrochloric acid to pH = 2. Then dichloromethane (30 mL) was added. The resulting solution was separated. The organic phase was collected and concentrated in vacuo to give the title compound as colorless oil (780 mg, 63%) .
MS (ESI, pos. ion) m/z: 221.2 [M+H]  +.
Step 4) synthesis of (E) -N- (6-amino-1, 3-diethyl-2, 4-dioxo-1, 2, 3, 4-tetrahydropyrimidin-5-yl) -3- (3-  (oxetan-3-yloxy) phenyl) acrylamide
To a 100 mL single-necked round bottom flask were added (E) -3- (3- (oxetan-3-yloxy) phenyl) acrylic acid (470 mg, 2.13 mmol) and dichloromethane (20 mL) . N, N-diisopropylethylamine (0.9 mL, 5 mmol) and 2- (7-azabenzotriazol-1-yl) -N, N, N', N'-tetramethyluronium hexafluorophosphate (805 mg, 2.11 mmol) were added. The mixture was continuously stirred for 0.5 h. 5, 6-Diamino-1, 3-diethylpyrimidine-2, 4 (1H, 3H) -dione (350 mg, 1.76 mmol) was then added. The reaction solution was transferred to 25 ℃ and reacted for 2 h. Water (30 mL) was added. The reaction solution was separated. The organic phase was collected, concentrated in vacuo and the residue was purified by silica gel chromatography (DCM/MeOH (v/v) = 20/1) to give the title compound as reddish brown oil (640 mg, 90.5%) .
MS (ESI, pos. ion) m/z: 401.4 [M+H]  +.
Step 5) synthesis of (E) -1, 3-diethyl-8- (3- (oxetan-3-yloxy) styryl) -1H-purine-2, 6 (3H, 7H) -dione
To a 100 mL single-necked round bottom flask were added (E) -N- (6-amino-1, 3-diethyl-2, 4-dioxo-1, 2, 3, 4-tetrahydropyrimidin-5-yl) -3- (3- (oxetan-3-yloxy) phenyl) acrylamide (640 mg, 1.6 mmol) and methanol (10 mL) . Then water (10 mL) and sodium hydroxide (640 mg, 16.0 mmol) were added. The mixture was stirred at 70 ℃ in an oil bath for 7 h. The reaction solution was stopped stirring, concentrated in vacuo, added with water (20 mL) , adjusted with hydrochloric acid to pH = 2, filtered and dried to give the title compound as a white solid (505 mg, 82.6%) .
MS (ESI, pos. ion) m/z: 383.2 [M+H]  +.
Step 6) synthesis of (E) -1, 3-diethyl-7-methyl-8- (3- (oxetan-3-yloxy) styryl) -1H-purine-2, 6 (3H, 7H) -dione
To a 100 mL single-necked round bottom flask were added (E) -1, 3-diethyl-8- (3- (oxetan-3-yloxy) styryl) -1H-purine-2, 6 (3H, 7H) -dione (505 mg, 1.32 mmol) and N, N-dimethylformamide (10 mL) . Sodium hydride (100 mg, 2.5 mmol) was added. The resulting solution was stirred for 10 min, methyl iodide (400 mg, 2.82 mmol) was added, and then transferred to 25 ℃ and stirred for 2 h. The reaction was stopped, and water (30 mL) was added. The resulting soluion was extracted with ethyl acetate (50 mL) and separated. The organic phase was concentrated in vacuo. The residue was purified by column chromatography (petroleum ether/ethyl acetate (v/v) = 5/1) to give the title compound as a white solid (0.37 g, 70.7%) .
MS (ESI, pos. ion) m/z: 397.3 [M+H]  +;
1H NMR (600 MHz, CDCl 3) δ (ppm) 7.69 (d, J = 15.7 Hz, 1H) , 7.28 (t, J = 7.8 Hz, 1H) , 7.18 (t, J = 13.4 Hz, 1H) , 6.91 – 6.84 (m, 2H) , 6.64 (d, J = 7.3 Hz, 1H) , 5.26 – 5.20 (m, 1H) , 4.98 (t, J = 6.6 Hz, 2H) , 4.79 – 4.71 (m, 2H) , 4.22 –4.14 (m, 2H) , 4.07 –4.02 (m, 5H) , 1.36 (t, J = 7.0 Hz, 3H) , 1.23 (t, J = 6.9 Hz, 3H) .
Example 2 synthesis of (R, E) -1, 3-diethyl-7-methyl-8- (3- ( (tetrahydrofuran-3-yl) oxy) styryl) -1H-purine-2, 6 (3H, 7H) -dione
Figure PCTCN2019127192-appb-000026
Step 1) synthesis of (S) -tetrahydrofuran-3-yl-4-methylbenzenesulfonate
p-Toluene sulfonyl chloride (3.6 g, 18.9 mmol) , (S) -tetrahydrofuran-3-ol (1.5 g, 17.0 mmol) and triethylamine (3.5 mL, 24.9 mmol) were reacted in DCM (20 mL) according to the procedure as described in step 1 of example 1, and the crude product was purified by silica gel column chromatography eluted with PE/EtOAc (v/v = 20/1) to give the title compound as reddish brown oil (2.8 g, 68.0%) .
MS (ESI, pos. ion) m/z: 265.0 [M+Na]  +;
1H NMR (400 MHz, CDCl 3) δ (ppm) 7.80 (d, J = 8.3 Hz, 2H) , 7.36 (d, J = 8.1 Hz, 2H) , 5.17 –5.06 (m, 1H) , 3.92 –3.78 (m, 4H) , 2.46 (s, 3H) , 2.13 –2.04 (m, 2H) .
Step 2) synthesis of (R) -3- ( (tetrahydrofuran-3-yl) oxy) benzaldehyde
(S) -Tetrahydrofuran-3-yl 4-methylbenzenesulfonate (1.9 g, 7.8 mmol) and m-hydroxybenzaldehyde (0.9 g, 7.4 mmol) were reacted in N, N-dimethylformamide (10 mL) according to the procedure as described in step 2 of example 1, and the crude product was purified by silica gel chromatography (PE/EtOAc (v/v) = 10/1) to give the title compound as reddish brown oil (900 mg, 60.0%) .
MS (ESI, pos. ion) m/z: 193.2 [M+H]  +.
Step 3) synthesis of (R, E) -3- (3- ( (tetrahydrofuran-3-yl) oxy) phenyl) acrylic acid
(R) -3- ( (tetrahydrofuran-3-yl) oxy) benzaldehyde (900 mg, 4.68 mmol) and malonate (1.0 g, 9.6 mmol) were reacted in pyridine (3 mL) according to the procedure as described in step 3 of example 1, and the crude product was purified by silica gel chromatography (PE/EtOAc (v/v) = 4/1) to give the title compound as a white solid (0.73 g, 70%) .
MS (ESI, pos. ion) m/z: 235.1 [M+H]  +;
1H NMR (400 MHz, CDCl 3) δ (ppm) 7.76 (d, J = 15.9 Hz, 1H) , 7.33 (t, J = 7.9 Hz, 1H) , 7.17 (d, J = 7.7 Hz, 1H) , 7.05 (s, 1H) , 6.93 (dt, J = 8.8, 4.4 Hz, 1H) , 6.46 (dd, J = 15.9, 8.6 Hz, 1H) , 5.01 – 4.95 (m, 1H) , 4.10 – 3.90 (m, 4H) , 2.31 –2.13 (m, 2H) .
Step  4) synthesis of (R, E) -N-  (6-amino-1, 3-diethyl-2, 4-dioxo-1, 2, 3, 4-tetrahydropyrimidin-5-yl) -3- (3- ( (tetrahydrofuran-3-yl) oxy) phenyl) acryla mide
The title compound of this step was prepared by referring to the method described in step 4 of example 1, i.e., 5, 6-diamino-1, 3-diethylpyrimidine-2, 4 (1H, 3H) -dione (350 mg, 1.76 mmol) , (R, E) -3- (3- ( (tetrahydrofuran-3-yl) oxy) phenyl) acrylic acid (500 mg, 2.13 mmol) , 2- (7-azabenzotriazol-1-yl) -N, N, N', N'-tetramethyluronium hexafluorophosphate (1.0 g, 2.6 mmol) and N, N-diisopropylethylamine (0.7 mL, 4 mmol) were reacted in dichloromethane (10 mL) to prepare it. The crude product was purified by silica gel column chromatography (dichloromethane/methanol (v/v) = 20/1) to give the title compound as a white solid (0.51 g, 69.7%) .
MS (ESI, pos. ion) m/z: 415.1 [M+H]  +;
1H NMR (400 MHz, CDCl 3) δ (ppm) 7.67 (s, 1H) , 7.62 (d, J = 15.5 Hz, 1H) , 7.31 (t, J = 7.4 Hz, 1H) , 7.14 (d, J = 7.5 Hz, 1H) , 7.01 (s, 1H) , 6.90 (d, J = 8.1 Hz, 1H) , 6.65 (d, J = 15.5 Hz, 1H) , 4.97 (br, 1H) , 4.14 (q, J = 7.1 Hz, 4H) , 4.04 –3.91 (m, 4H) , 2.31 –2.13 (m, 2H) , 1.37 (t, J = 7.2 Hz, 3H) , 1.23 (t, J = 7.0 Hz, 3H) .
Step 5) synthesis of (R, E) -1, 3-diethyl-8- (3- ( (tetrahydrofuran-3-yl) oxy) styryl) -1H-purine-2, 6 (3H, 7H) -dione
The title compound in this step was prepared by referring to the method described in step 5 of Example 1, i.e., (R, E) -N- (6-amino-1, 3-diethyl-2, 4-dioxo-1, 2, 3, 4-tetrahydropyrimidin-5-yl) -3- (3- ( (tetrahydrofuran-3-yl) oxy) phenyl) acrylamide (510 mg, 1.23 mmol) and sodium hydroxide (500 mg, 12.5 mmol) were reacted in  methanol (10 mL) , and the crude product was purified by silica gel chromatography (dichloromethane/methanol (v/v) = 20/1) to give the title compound as a yellow solid (0.4 g, 81.9%) .
MS (ESI, pos. ion) m/z: 397.1 [M+H]  +.
Step 6) synthesis of  (R, E) -1, 3-diethyl-7-methyl-8- (3- ( (tetrahydrofuran-3-yl) oxy) styryl) -1H-purine-2, 6 (3H, 7H) -dione
The title compound in this step was prepared by referring to the method described in step 6 of Example 1, i.e., (R, E) -1, 3-diethyl-8- (3- ( (tetrahydrofuran-3-yl) oxy) styryl) -1H-purine-2, 6 (3H, 7H) -dione (400 mg, 1.0 mmol) , methyl iodide (300 mg, 2.11 mmol) and sodium hydride were reacted in N, N-dimethylformamide (10 mL) , and the crude product was purified by silica gel chromatography (PE/EtOAc (v/v) = 3/1) to give the title compound as a light yellow solid (0.32 g, 77.2%) .
MS (ESI, pos. ion) m/z: 411.1 [M+H]  +;
1H NMR (400 MHz, CDCl 3) δ (ppm) 7.75 (d, J = 15.7 Hz, 1H) , 7.33 (t, J = 7.9 Hz, 1H) , 7.20 (d, J = 7.6 Hz, 1H) , 7.08 (s, 1H) , 6.92 –6.86 (m, 2H) , 4.99 (br, 1H) , 4.22 (q, J = 7.0 Hz, 2H) , 4.13 – 4.05 (m, 5H) , 4.04 – 3.90 (m, 4H) , 2.32 –2.14 (m, 2H) , 1.40 (t, J = 7.0 Hz, 3H) , 1.27 (t, J = 7.0 Hz, 3H) .
Example 3 synthesis of (S, E) -1, 3-diethyl-7-methyl-8- (3- ( (tetrahydrofuran-3-yl) oxy) styryl) -1H-purine-2, 6 (3H, 7H) -dione
Figure PCTCN2019127192-appb-000027
Step 1) synthesis of (R) -tetrahydrofuran-3-yl-4-methylbenzenesulfonate
The title compound in this step was prepared by referring to the method described in step 1 of Example 1, i.e., p-toluene sulfonyl chloride (3.0 g, 16 mmol) , (R) -tetrahydrofuran-3-ol (1.5 g, 17.0 mmol) and triethylamine (3.5 mL, 24.9 mmol) were reacted in DCM (20 mL) , and the crude product was purified by silica gel column chromatography eluted with PE/EtOAc (v/v = 20/1) to give the title compound as reddish brown oil (2.2 g, 58.0%) .
MS (ESI, pos. ion) m/z: 265.2 [M+Na]  +;
1H NMR (400 MHz, CDCl 3) δ (ppm) 7.80 (d, J = 8.3 Hz, 2H) , 7.36 (d, J = 8.1 Hz, 2H) , 5.17 – 5.06 (m, 1H) , 3.89 –3.81 (m, 4H) , 2.46 (s, 3H) , 2.13 –2.04 (m, 2H) .
Step 2) synthesis of (S) -3- ( (tetrahydrofuran-3-yl) oxy) benzaldehyde
The title compound in this step was prepared by referring to the method described in step 2 of Example 1, i.e., (R) -tetrahydrofuran-3-yl 4-methylbenzenesulfonate (2.2 g, 9.08 mmol) and m-hydroxybenzaldehyde (1.0 g, 8.19 mmol) were reacted in N, N-dimethylformamide (10 mL) , and the crude product was purified by silica gel chromatography (PE/EtOAc (v/v) = 10/1) to give the title compound as reddish brown oil (1.1 g, 70%) .
MS (ESI, pos. ion) m/z: 193.1 [M+H]  +.
Step 3) synthesis of (S, E) -3- (3- ( (tetrahydrofuran-3-yl) oxy) phenyl) acrylic acid
The title compound in this step was prepared by referring to the method described in step 3 of Example 1, i.e., (S) -3- ( (tetrahydrofuran-3-yl) oxy) benzaldehyde (1.1 g, 5.7 mmol) and malonate (1.8 g, 17 mmol) were reacted in pyridine (5 mL) , and the crude product was purified by silica gel chromatography (PE/EtOAc (v/v) = 4/1) to give the title compound as a white solid (1.0 g, 75%) .
MS (ESI, pos. ion) m/z: 235.2 [M+H]  +;
1H NMR (600 MHz, DMSO-d 6) δ (ppm) 12.40 (s, 1H) , 7.56 (d, J = 16.0 Hz, 1H) , 7.33 (t, J = 7.9 Hz, 1H) , 7.29 –7.22 (m, 2H) , 6.97 (dd, J = 8.1, 1.9 Hz, 1H) , 6.56 (d, J = 16.0 Hz, 1H) , 5.10 (dd, J = 5.8, 4.7 Hz, 1H) , 3.91 (dd, J = 10.1, 4.6 Hz, 1H) , 3.84 (dd, J = 15.5, 7.9 Hz, 1H) , 3.80 – 3.73 (m, 2H) , 2.24 (td, J = 14.3, 8.2 Hz, 1H) , 2.00 –1.92 (m, 1H) .
Step 4) synthesis of (S, E) -N-  (6-amino-1, 3-diethyl-2, 4-dioxo-1, 2, 3, 4-tetrahydropyrimidin-5-yl) -3- (3- ( (tetrahydrofuran-3-yl) oxy) phenyl)  acrylamide
The title compound of this step was prepared by referring to the method described in step 4 of example 1, i.e., 5, 6-diamino-1, 3-diethylpyrimidine-2, 4 (1H, 3H) -dione (350 mg, 1.76 mmol) , (S, E) -3- (3- ( (tetrahydrofuran-3-yl) oxy) phenyl) acrylic acid (500 mg, 2.13 mmol) , 2- (7-azabenzotriazol-1-yl) -N, N, N', N'-tetramethyluronium hexafluorophosphate (1.0 g, 2.6 mmol) and N, N-diisopropylethylamine (0.7 mL, 4 mmol) were reacted in dichloromethane (10 mL) to prepare it. The crude product was purified by silica gel column chromatography (dichloromethane/methanol (v/v) = 20/1) to give the title compound as a yellow solid (0.55 g, 75.2%) .
MS (ESI, pos. ion) m/z: 415.3 [M+H]  +;
1H NMR (400 MHz, CDCl 3) δ (ppm) 7.80 – 7.70 (m, 1H) , 7.61 (d, J = 15.6 Hz, 1H) , 7.31 (t, J = 6.7 Hz, 1H) , 7.14 (d, J = 7.0 Hz, 1H) , 7.01 (s, 1H) , 6.90 (d, J = 8.1 Hz, 1H) , 6.67 (d, J = 15.5 Hz, 1H) , 4.96 (brs, 1H) , 4.06 – 3.91 (m, 8H) , 2.29 –2.16 (m, 2H) , 1.37 (t, J = 7.1 Hz, 3H) , 1.23 (d, J = 6.8 Hz, 3H) .
Step 5) synthesis of (S, E) -1, 3-diethyl-8- (3- ( (tetrahydrofuran-3-yl) oxy) styryl) -1H-purine-2, 6 (3H, 7H) -dione
The title compound in this step was prepared by referring to the method described in step 5 of Example 1, i.e., (S, E) -N- (6-amino-1, 3-diethyl-2, 4-dioxo-1, 2, 3, 4-tetrahydropyrimidin-5-yl) -3- (3 - ( (tetrahydrofuran-3-yl) oxy) phenyl) acrylamide (570 mg, 1.37 mmol) and sodium hydroxide (550 mg, 13.7 mmol) were reacted in methanol (10 mL) , and the crude product was dried to give the title compound as a yellow solid (0.42 g, 77.0%) .
MS (ESI, pos. ion) m/z: 397.3 [M+H]  +;
Step 6) synthesis of  (S, E) -1, 3-diethyl-7-methyl-8- (3- ( (tetrahydrofuran-3-yl) oxy) styryl) -1H-purine-2, 6 (3H, 7H) -dione
The title compound in this step was prepared by referring to the method described in step 6 of Example 1, i.e., (S, E) -1, 3-diethyl-8- (3- ( (tetrahydrofuran-3-yl) oxy) styryl) -1H-purine-2, 6 (3H, 7H) -dione (470 mg, 1.18  mmol) , methyl iodide (350 mg, 2.46 mmol) and sodium hydride (100 mg, 2.5 mmol) were reacted in N, N-dimethylformamide (10 mL) , and the crude product was purified by silica gel chromatography (PE/EtOAc (v/v) = 3/1) to give the title compound as a white solid (0.34 g, 69.9%) .
MS (ESI, pos. ion) m/z: 411.4 [M+H]  +;
1H NMR (400 MHz, CDCl 3) δ (ppm) 7.75 (d, J = 15.7 Hz, 1H) , 7.33 (t, J = 7.9 Hz, 1H) , 7.21 (d, J = 7.6 Hz, 1H) , 7.09 (s, 1H) , 6.96 –6.82 (m, 2H) , 4.99 (br, 1H) , 4.22 (q, J = 7.0 Hz, 2H) , 4.13 – 4.07 (m, 5H) , 4.04 – 3.91 (m, 4H) , 2.33 –2.15 (m, 2H) , 1.43 –1.34 (m, 3H) , 1.27 (t, J = 7.0 Hz, 3H) .
Example 4 synthesis of (E) -1, 3-diethyl-7-methyl-8- (3- ( (tetrahydro-2H-pyran-4-yl) oxy) styryl) -1H-purine-2, 6 (3H, 7H) -dione
Figure PCTCN2019127192-appb-000028
Step 1) synthesis of tetrahydro-2H-pyran-4-yl4-methylbenzenesulfonate
The title compound in this step was prepared by referring to the method described in step 1 of Example 1, i.e., p-toluene sulfonyl chloride (2.8 g, 14.7 mmol) , tetrahydro-2H-pyran-4-ol (1.6 g, 15.7 mmol) and triethylamine (3.5 mL, 24.9 mmol) were reacted in DCM (20 mL) , and the crude product was purified by silica gel column chromatography eluted with PE/EtOAc (v/v = 20/1) to give the title compound as reddish brown oil (2.2 g, 58.0%) .
MS (ESI, pos. ion) m/z: 257.1 [M+H]  +;
1H NMR (400 MHz, CDCl 3) δ (ppm) 7.81 (d, J = 8.2 Hz, 2H) , 7.35 (d, J = 8.2 Hz, 2H) , 4.69 (tt, J = 8.2, 4.1 Hz, 1H) , 3.91 – 3.82 (m, 2H) , 3.47 (ddd, J = 11.7, 8.4, 3.2 Hz, 2H) , 2.45 (s, 3H) , 1.90 – 1.81 (m, 2H) , 1.75 (ddd, J = 17.0, 8.3, 4.1 Hz, 2H) .
Step 2) synthesis of 3- ( (tetrahydro-2H-pyran-4-yl) oxy) benzaldehyde
The title compound in this step was prepared by referring to the method described in step 2 of Example 1, i.e., tetrahydro-2H-pyran-4-yl-4-methylbenzenesulfonate (2.2 g, 8.6 mmol) , potassium carbonate (2.3 g, 16.7 mmol) and m-hydroxybenzaldehyde (1.0 g, 8.19 mmol) were reacted in N, N-dimethylformamide (10 mL) , and the crude product was purified by silica gel chromatography (PE/EtOAc (v/v) = 10/1) to give the title compound as reddish brown oil (1.2 g, 71.0%) .
MS (ESI, pos. ion) m/z: 207.1 [M+H]  +;
Step 3) synthesis of (E) -3- (3- ( (tetrahydro-2H-pyran-4-yl) oxy) phenyl) acrylic acid
The title compound in this step was prepared by referring to the method described in step 3 of Example 1, i.e., 3- ( (tetrahydro-2H-pyran-4-yl) oxy) benzaldehyde (1.2 g, 5.8 mmol) and malonic acid (1.84 g, 17.7 mmol) were reacted in pyridine (5 mL) , and the crude product was purified by silica gel chromatography (PE/EtOAc (v/v)  = 4/1) to give the title compound as a white solid (820 mg, 57%) .
MS (ESI, pos. ion) m/z: 249.1 [M+H]  +;
1H NMR (400 MHz, CDCl 3) δ (ppm) 7.75 (d, J = 15.9 Hz, 1H) , 7.33 (t, J = 7.9 Hz, 1H) , 7.15 (t, J = 9.0 Hz, 1H) , 7.11 (s, 1H) , 6.99 (dd, J = 8.2, 1.7 Hz, 1H) , 6.45 (d, J = 16.0 Hz, 1H) , 4.57 – 4.53 (m, 1H) , 4.06 – 3.98 (m, 2H) , 3.67 –3.58 (m, 2H) , 2.07 –2.01 (m, 2H) , 1.88 –1.78 (m, 2H) .
Step 4) synthesis of (E) -N-  (6-amino-1, 3-diethyl-2, 4-dioxo-1, 2, 3, 4-tetrahydropyrimidin-5-yl) -3- (3- ( (tetrahydro-2H-pyran-4-yl) oxy)  phenyl) acrylamide
The title compound of this step was prepared by referring to the method described in step 4 of example 1, i.e., 5, 6-diamino-1, 3-diethylpyrimidine-2, 4 (1H, 3H) -dione (300 mg, 1.51 mmol) , (E) -3- (3- ( (tetrahydro-2H-pyran-4-yl) oxy) phenyl) acrylic acid (450 mg, 1.81 mmol) , 2- (7-azabenzotriazol-1-yl) -N, N, N', N'-tetramethyluronium hexafluorophosphate (860 mg, 2.26 mmol) and N, N-diisopropylethylamine (0.7 mL, 4 mmol) were reacted in dichloromethane (10 mL) to prepare it. The crude product was purified by silica gel column chromatography (dichloromethane/methanol (v/v) = 20/1) to give the title compound as a yellow solid (0.45 g, 69.4%) .
MS (ESI, pos. ion) m/z: 429.2 [M+H]  +;
1H NMR (400 MHz, CDCl 3) δ (ppm) 7.72 (s, 1H) , 7.62 (d, J = 15.5 Hz, 1H) , 7.13 (d, J = 7.6 Hz, 1H) , 7.07 (s, 1H) , 6.95 (d, J = 8.1 Hz, 1H) , 6.66 (d, J = 15.5 Hz, 1H) , 4.54 (td, J = 7.6, 3.8 Hz, 1H) , 4.06 –3.98 (m, 6H) , 3.62 (ddd, J = 11.5, 8.4, 3.1 Hz, 2H) , 2.06 (d, J = 8.4 Hz, 2H) , 1.83 –1.80 (m, 2H) , 1.37 (t, J = 7.2 Hz, 3H) , 1.24 (t, J = 7.0 Hz, 3H) .
Step 5) synthesis of (E) -1, 3-diethyl-8- (3- ( (tetrahydro-2H-pyran-4-yl) oxy) styryl) -1H-purine-2, 6 (3H, 7H) -dione
The title compound of this step was prepared by referring to the method described in step 5 of example 1, i.e., (E) -N- (6-amino-1, 3-diethyl-2, 4-dioxo-1, 2, 3, 4-tetrahydropyrimidin-5-yl) -3- (3 - ( (tetrahydro-2H-pyran-4-yl) oxy) phenyl) acrylamide (450 mg, 1.05 mmol) and sodium hydroxide (550 mg, 13.7 mmol) were reacted in methanol (10 mL) , and the crude product was dried to give the title compound as a yellow solid (0.38 g, 88.2%) .
MS (ESI, pos. ion) m/z: 411.1 [M+H]  +;
Step 6) synthesis of  (E) -1, 3-diethyl-7-methyl-8- (3- ( (tetrahydro-2H-pyran-4-yl) oxy) styryl) -1H-purine-2, 6 (3H, 7H) -dione
The title compound of this step was prepared by referring to the method described in step 6 of example 1, i.e., (E) -1, 3-diethyl-8- (3- ( (tetrahydro-2H-pyran-4-yl) oxy) styryl) -1H-purine-2, 6 (3H, 7H) -dione (380 mg, 0.92 mmol) , methyl iodide (300 mg, 2.11 mmol) and sodium hydride (80 mg, 2.0 mmol) were reacted in N, N-dimethylformamide (10 mL) , and the crude product was purified by silica gel chromatography (PE/EtOAc (v/v) = 3/1) to give the title compound as a white solid (0.28 g, 71.3%) .
MS (ESI, pos. ion) m/z: 425.1 [M+H]  +;
1H NMR (400 MHz, CDCl 3) δ (ppm) 7.73 (d, J = 15.7 Hz, 1H) , 7.31 (t, J = 8.0 Hz, 1H) , 7.18 (d, J = 7.6 Hz, 1H) ,  7.12 (s, 1H) , 6.96 – 6.82 (m, 2H) , 4.60 – 4.46 (m, 1H) , 4.20 (t, J = 6.9 Hz, 2H) , 4.13 – 4.04 (m, 5H) , 4.03 – 3.95 (m, 2H) , 3.64 – 3.53 (m, 2H) , 2.11 – 1.97 (m, 2H) , 1.85 – 1.77 (m, 2H) , 1.38 (t, J = 7.0 Hz, 3H) , 1.25 (t, J = 7.0 Hz, 3H) .
Example 5 synthesis of (E) -1, 3-diethyl-7-methyl-8- (4- (oxetan-3-yloxy) styryl) -1H-purine-2, 6 (3H, 7H) -dione
Figure PCTCN2019127192-appb-000029
Step 1) synthesis of 4- (oxetan-3-yloxy) benzaldehyde
The title compound of this step was prepared by referring to the method described in step 2 of example 1, i.e., oxetan-3-yl-4-methylbenzenesulfonate (0.62 g, 2.7 mmol) , cesium carbonate (3.2 g, 9.8 mmol) and p-hydroxybenzaldehyde (0.3 g, 2.45 mmol) were reacted in N, N-dimethylformamide (10 mL) , and the crude product was purified by silica gel chromatography (PE/EtOAc (v/v) = 10/1) to give the title compound as a yellow solid (0.32 g, 73%) .
MS (ESI, pos. ion) m/z: 179.1 [M+H]  +.
Step 2) synthesis of (E) -3- (4- (oxetan-3-yloxy) phenyl) acrylic acid
The title compound of this step was prepared by referring to the method described in step 3 of example 1, i.e., 4- (oxetan-3-yloxy) benzaldehyde (0.45 g, 2.5 mmol) , malonic acid (0.39 g, 3.7 mmol) and piperidine (0.22 g, 2.6 mmol) were reacted in pyridine (5 mL) , and the crude product was purified by silica gel chromatography (PE/EtOAc (v/v) = 4/1) to give the title compound as a white solid (490 mg, 88%) .
MS (ESI, pos. ion) m/z: 221.1 [M+H]  +;
1H NMR (400 MHz, CDCl 3) δ (ppm) 7.60 (d, J = 15.9 Hz, 1H) , 7.47 (d, J = 8.5 Hz, 2H) , 6.70 (d, J = 8.5 Hz, 2H) , 6.35 (d, J = 15.9 Hz, 1H) , 5.29 –5.15 (m, 1H) , 4.99 (t, J = 6.7 Hz, 2H) , 4.83 –4.63 (m, 2H) .
Step 3) synthesis of (E) -N-  (6-amino-1, 3-diethyl-2, 4-dioxo-1, 2, 3, 4-tetrahydropyrimidin-5-yl) -3- (4- (oxetan-3-yloxy) phenyl) acrylamide
The title compound of this step was prepared by referring to the method described in step 4 of example 1, i.e., 5, 6-diamino-1, 3-diethylpyrimidine-2, 4 (1H, 3H) -dione (250 mg, 1.3 mmol) , (E) -3- (4- (oxetan-3-yloxy) phenyl) acrylic acid (350 mg, 1.59 mmol) , 2- (7-azabenzotriazol-1-yl) -N, N, N', N'-tetramethyluronium hexafluorophosphate (560 mg, 1.4 mmol) and N, N-diisopropylethylamine (0.98 g, 7.6 mmol) were reacted in dichloromethane (10 mL) to prepare it. The crude product was purified by silica gel column chromatography (dichloromethane/methanol (v/v) = 20/1) to give the title compound as a yellow solid (0.45 g, 89%) .
MS (ESI, pos. ion) m/z: 401.1 [M+H]  +;
1H NMR (400 MHz, CDCl 3) δ (ppm) 7.97 (s, 1H) , 7.55 (d, J = 15.5 Hz, 1H) , 7.41 (d, J = 8.4 Hz, 2H) , 6.66 (d, J =  8.4 Hz, 2H) , 6.60 (d, J = 15.5 Hz, 1H) , 5.25 –5.18 (m, 1H) , 4.98 (t, J = 6.7 Hz, 2H) , 4.80 –4.73 (m, 2H) , 3.99 –3.96 (m, 4H) , 1.31 (t, J = 7.1 Hz, 3H) , 1.20 (t, J = 7.0 Hz, 3H) .
Step 4) synthesis of (E) -1, 3-diethyl-8- (4- (oxetan-3-yloxy) styryl) -1H-purine-2, 6 (3H, 7H) -dione
The title compound of this step was prepared by referring to the method described in step 5 of example 1, i.e., (E) -N- (6-amino-1, 3-diethyl-2, 4-dioxo-1, 2, 3, 4-tetrahydropyrimidin-5-yl) -3- (4 - ( (oxetan-3-yloxy) phenyl) acrylamide (400 mg, 0.99 mmol) and sodium hydroxide (300 mg, 7.5 mmol) were reacted in methanol (10 mL) , and the crude product was dried to give the title compound as a yellow solid (0.2 g, 53.6%) .
MS (ESI, pos. ion) m/z: 383.2 [M+H]  +;
1H NMR (400 MHz, DMSO-d 6) δ (ppm) 7.52 (d, J = 8.5 Hz, 2H) , 7.40 (d, J = 16.2 Hz, 1H) , 6.92 (d, J = 16.3 Hz, 1H) , 6.80 (d, J = 8.5 Hz, 2H) , 5.36 –5.25 (m, 1H) , 4.94 (t, J = 6.6 Hz, 2H) , 4.60 –4.50 (m, 2H) , 4.04 (q, J = 6.7 Hz, 2H) , 3.92 (q, J = 6.7 Hz, 2H) , 1.24 (t, J = 6.9 Hz, 3H) , 1.12 (t, J = 6.9 Hz, 3H) .
Step 5) synthesis of (E) -1, 3-diethyl-7-methyl-8- (4- (oxetan-3-yloxy) styryl) -1H-purine-2, 6 (3H, 7H) -dione
The title compound of this step was prepared by referring to the method described in step 6 of example 1, i.e., (E) -1, 3-diethyl-8- (4- ( (oxetan-3-yloxy) styryl) -1H-purine-2, 6 (3H, 7H) -dione (350 mg, 0.91 mmol) , methyl iodide (0.2 mL, 3.2 mmol) and cesium carbonate (390 mg, 1.18 mmol) were reacted in N, N-dimethylformamide (10 mL) , and the crude product was purified by silica gel chromatography (PE/EtOAc (v/v) = 3/1) to give the title compound as a light yellow solid (0.27 g, 88%) .
MS (ESI, pos. ion) m/z: 397.3 [M+H]  +;
1H NMR (400 MHz, CDCl 3) δ (ppm) 7.75 (d, J = 15.7 Hz, 1H) , 7.54 (d, J = 8.6 Hz, 2H) , 6.80 (d, J = 15.7 Hz, 1H) , 6.75 (d, J = 8.6 Hz, 2H) , 5.31 –5.22 (m, 1H) , 5.01 (t, J = 6.7 Hz, 2H) , 4.85 – 4.76 (m, 2H) , 4.23 (q, J = 7.0 Hz, 2H) , 4.10 (q, J = 7.1 Hz, 2H) , 4.06 (s, 3H) , 1.40 (t, J = 7.1 Hz, 3H) , 1.31 –1.25 (m, 3H) .
Example 6 synthesis of (R, E) -1, 3-diethyl-7-methyl-8- (4- ( (tetrahydrofuran-3-yl) oxy) styryl) -1H-purine-2, 6 (3H, 7H) -dione
Figure PCTCN2019127192-appb-000030
Step 1) synthesis of (R) -4- ( (tetrahydrofuran-3-yl) oxy) benzaldehyde
The title compound of this step was prepared by referring to the method described in step 2 of example 1, i.e., (S) -tetrahydrofuran-3-yl-4-methylbenzenesulfonate (1.0 g, 4.13 mmol) , cesium carbonate (5 g, 15.3 mmol) and p-hydroxybenzaldehyde (0.6 g, 4.92 mmol) were reacted in N, N-dimethylformamide (10 mL) , and the crude product was purified by silica gel chromatography (PE/EtOAc (v/v) = 10/1) to give the title compound as a light yellow solid (502 mg, 50%) .
MS (ESI, pos. ion) m/z: 193.2 [M+H]  +;
1H NMR (400 MHz, DMSO-d 6) δ (ppm) 9.88 (s, 1H) , 7.87 (d, J = 8.7 Hz, 2H) , 7.11 (d, J = 8.7 Hz, 2H) , 5.17 (dd, J = 6.0, 4.6 Hz, 1H) , 3.98 –3.68 (m, 4H) , 2.42 –1.82 (m, 2H) .
Step 2) synthesis of (R, E) -3- (4- ( (tetrahydrofuran-3-yl) oxy) phenyl) acrylic acid
The title compound of this step was prepared by referring to the method described in step 3 of example 1, i.e., (R) -4- ( (tetrahydrofuran-3-yl) oxy) benzaldehyde (500 mg, 2.6 mmol) and malonic acid (572 mg, 5.5 mmol) were reacted in pyridine (3 mL) , and the crude product was purified by silica gel chromatography (PE/EtOAc (v/v) = 4/1) to give the title compound as a white solid (0.5 g, 82.1%) .
MS (ESI, pos. ion) m/z: 235.1 [M+H]  +;
1H NMR (400 MHz, DMSO-d 6) δ (ppm) 12.22 (s, 1H) , 7.63 (d, J = 8.6 Hz, 2H) , 7.55 (d, J = 16.0 Hz, 1H) , 6.95 (d, J = 8.6 Hz, 2H) , 6.38 (d, J = 16.0 Hz, 1H) , 5.09 (br, 1H) , 4.00 –3.65 (m, 4H) , 2.31 –1.86 (m, 2H) .
Step 3) synthesis of (R, E) -N-  (6-amino-1, 3-diethyl-2, 4-dioxo-1, 2, 3, 4-tetrahydropyrimidin-5-yl) -3- (4- ( (tetrahydrofuran-3-yl) oxy)  phenyl) acrylamide
The title compound of this step was prepared by referring to the method described in step 4 of example 1, i.e., 5, 6-diamino-1, 3-diethylpyrimidine-2, 4 (1H, 3H) -dione (300 mg, 1.51 mmol) , (R, E) -3- (4- ( (tetrahydrofuran-3-yl) oxy) phenyl) acrylic acid (500 mg, 2.13 mmol) , 2- (7-azabenzotriazol-1-yl) -N, N, N', N'-tetramethyluronium hexafluorophosphate (0.7 g, 1.84 mmol) and N, N-diisopropylethylamine (1.0 g, 7.71 mmol) were reacted in dichloromethane (10 mL) to prepare it. The crude product was purified by silica gel column chromatography (dichloromethane/methanol (v/v) = 20/1) to give the title compound as a yellow solid (0.54 g, 90%) .
MS (ESI, pos. ion) m/z: 415.1 [M+H]  +.
Step 4) synthesis of (R, E) -1, 3-diethyl-8- (4- ( (tetrahydrofuran-3-yl) oxy) styryl) -1H-purine-2, 6 (3H, 7H) -dione
The title compound of this step was prepared by referring to the method described in step 5 of example 1, i.e., (R, E) -N- (6-amino-1, 3-diethyl-2, 4-dioxo-1, 2, 3, 4-tetrahydropyrimidin-5-yl) -3- (4 - ( (tetrahydrofuran-3-yl) oxy) phenyl) acrylamide (530 mg, 1.28 mmol) and sodium hydroxide (400 mg, 10.0 mmol) were reacted in methanol (10 mL) , and the crude product was purified by silica gel column chromatography (dichloromethane/methanol (v/v) = 20/1) to give the title compound as a yellow solid (0.489 g, 96.5%) .
MS (ESI, pos. ion) m/z: 397.1 [M+H]  +;
1H NMR (400 MHz, DMSO-d 6) δ (ppm) 7.52 (d, J = 8.2 Hz, 2H) , 7.43 (d, J = 16.2 Hz, 1H) , 6.98 –6.85 (m, 3H) , 5.06 (br, 1H) , 4.11 –3.70 (m, 8H) , 2.26 – 2.21 (m, 1H) , 2.03 –1.91 (m, 1H) , 1.24 (t, J = 6.5 Hz, 4H) , 1.12 (t, J = 6.6 Hz, 3H) .
Step 5) synthesis of  (R, E) -1, 3-diethyl-7-methyl-8- (4- ( (tetrahydrofuran-3-yl) oxy) styryl) -1H-purine-2, 6 (3H, 7H) -dione
The title compound of this step was prepared by referring to the method described in step 6 of example 1, i.e., (R, E) -1, 3-diethyl-8- (4- ( (tetrahydrofuran-3-yl) oxy) styryl) -1H-purine-2, 6 (3H, 7H) -dione (480 mg, 1.21  mmol) , methyl iodide (0.2 mL, 3.2 mmol) and sodium hydride (50 mg, 1.25 mmol) were reacted in N, N-dimethylformamide (10 mL) , and the crude product was purified by silica gel chromatography (PE/EtOAc (v/v) = 3/1) to give the title compound as a light yellow solid (0.488 g, 98.2%) .
MS (ESI, pos. ion) m/z: 411.2 [M+H]  +;
1H NMR (400 MHz, CDCl 3) δ (ppm) 7.75 (d, J = 15.7 Hz, 1H) , 7.54 (d, J = 8.6 Hz, 2H) , 6.90 (d, J = 8.7 Hz, 2H) , 6.79 (d, J = 15.7 Hz, 1H) , 4.99 (br, 1H) , 4.22 (q, J = 7.0 Hz, 2H) , 4.13 – 4.06 (m, 2H) , 4.06 (s, 3H) , 4.04 – 3.89 (m, 4H) , 2.90 (s, 3H) , 2.32 –2.12 (m, 2H) , 1.39 (t, J = 7.0 Hz, 3H) , 1.27 (t, J = 7.0 Hz, 3H) .
Example 7 synthesis of (S, E) -1, 3-diethyl-7-methyl-8- (4- ( (tetrahydrofuran-3-yl) oxy) styryl) -1H-purine-2, 6 (3H, 7H) -dione
Figure PCTCN2019127192-appb-000031
Step 1) synthesis of (S) -4- ( (tetrahydrofuran-3-yl) oxy) benzaldehyde
The title compound of this step was prepared by referring to the method described in step 2 of example 1, i.e., (R) -tetrahydrofuran-3-yl 4-methylbenzenesulfonate (1.0 g, 4.13 mmol) , cesium carbonate (5 g, 15.3 mmol) and p-hydroxybenzaldehyde (0.6 g, 4.92 mmol) were reacted in N, N-dimethylformamide (10 mL) , and the crude product was purified by silica gel chromatography (PE/EtOAc (v/v) = 10/1) to give the title compound as a light yellow solid (660 mg, 70%) .
MS (ESI, pos. ion) m/z: 193.2 [M+H]  +;
1H NMR (400 MHz, CDCl 3) δ (ppm) 9.88 (s, 1H) , 7.83 (d, J = 8.7 Hz, 2H) , 6.97 (d, J = 8.7 Hz, 2H) , 5.02 (td, J = 4.4, 2.3 Hz, 1H) , 4.06 –3.88 (m, 4H) , 2.50 –2.03 (m, 2H) .
Step 2) synthesis of (S, E) -3- (4- ( (tetrahydrofuran-3-yl) oxy) phenyl) acrylic acid
The title compound of this step was prepared by referring to the method described in step 3 of example 1, i.e., (S) -4- ( (tetrahydrofuran-3-yl) oxy) benzaldehyde (650 mg, 3.38 mmol) and malonic acid (572 mg, 5.5 mmol) were reacted in pyridine (3 mL) , and the crude product was purified by silica gel chromatography (PE/EtOAc (v/v) = 4/1) to give the title compound as a white solid (0.56 g, 71%) .
MS (ESI, pos. ion) m/z: 235.1 [M+H]  +;
1H NMR (400 MHz, CDCl 3) δ (ppm) 7.53 (d, J = 15.9 Hz, 1H) , 7.44 (d, J = 8.7 Hz, 2H) , 6.83 (d, J = 8.7 Hz, 2H) , 6.37 (d, J = 15.9 Hz, 1H) , 4.96 –4.87 (m, 1H) , 4.03 –3.84 (m, 4H) , 2.25 –2.09 (m, 2H) .
Step 3) synthesis of (S, E) -N-  (6-amino-1, 3-diethyl-2, 4-dioxo-1, 2, 3, 4-tetrahydropyrimidin-5-yl) -3- (4- ( (tetrahydrofuran-3-yl) oxy)  phenyl) acrylamide
The title compound of this step was prepared by referring to the method described in step 4 of example  1, i.e., 5, 6-diamino-1, 3-diethylpyrimidine-2, 4 (1H, 3H) -dione (350 mg, 1.8 mmol) , (S, E) -3- (4- ( (tetrahydrofuran-3-yl) oxy) phenyl) acrylic acid (540 mg, 2.31 mmol) , 2- (7-azabenzotriazol-1-yl) -N, N, N', N'-tetramethyluronium hexafluorophosphate (0.78 g, 1.9 mmol) and N, N-diisopropylethylamine (1.4 g, 10.8 mmol) were reacted in dichloromethane (10 mL) to prepare it. The crude product was purified by silica gel column chromatography (dichloromethane/methanol (v/v) = 20/1) to give the title compound as a yellow solid (0.55 g, 75%) .
MS (ESI, pos. ion) m/z: 415.1 [M+H]  +;
Step 4) synthesis of (S, E) -1, 3-diethyl-8- (4- ( (tetrahydrofuran-3-yl) oxy) styryl) -1H-purine-2, 6 (3H, 7H) -dione
The title compound of this step was prepared by referring to the method described in step 5 of example 1, i.e., (S, E) -N- (6-amino-1, 3-diethyl-2, 4-dioxo-1, 2, 3, 4-tetrahydropyrimidin-5-yl) -3- (4 - ( (tetrahydrofuran-3-yl) oxy) phenyl) acrylamide (500 mg, 1.21 mmol) and sodium hydroxide (400 mg, 10.0 mmol) were reacted in methanol (10 mL) , and the crude product was dried to give the title compound as a yellow solid (0.4 g, 83.6%) .
MS (ESI, pos. ion) m/z: 397.1 [M+H]  +;
1H NMR (400 MHz, DMSO-d 6) δ (ppm) 7.54 (d, J = 8.1 Hz, 2H) , 7.49 (d, J = 16.6 Hz, 1H) , 6.94 (d, J = 8.4 Hz, 2H) , 6.88 (d, J = 16.6 Hz, , 1H) , 5.06 (br, 1H) , 4.04 –3.75 (m, 8H) , 2.26 – 2.21 (m, 1H) , 2.03 –1.91 (m, 1H) , 1.25 (t, J = 6.4 Hz, 3H) , 1.12 (t, J = 6.2 Hz, 3H) .
Step 5) synthesis of  (S, E) -1, 3-diethyl-7-methyl-8- (4- ( (tetrahydrofuran-3-yl) oxy) styryl) -1H-purine-2, 6 (3H, 7H) -dione
The title compound of this step was prepared by referring to the method described in step 6 of example 1, i.e., (S, E) -1, 3-diethyl-8- (4- ( (tetrahydrofuran-3-yl) oxy) styryl) -1H-purine-2, 6 (3H, 7H) -dione (400 mg, 1.0 mmol) , methyl iodide (0.15 mL, 2.4 mmol) and sodium hydride (50 mg, 1.25 mmol) were reacted in N, N-dimethylformamide (10 mL) , and the crude product was purified by silica gel chromatography (PE/EtOAc (v/v) = 3/1) to give the title compound as a light yellow solid (0.4 g, 96.6%) .
MS (ESI, pos. ion) m/z: 411.2 [M+H]  +;
1H NMR (400 MHz, CDCl 3) δ (ppm) 7.76 (d, J = 15.7 Hz, 1H) , 7.54 (d, J = 8.6 Hz, 2H) , 6.91 (d, J = 8.6 Hz, 2H) , 6.79 (d, J = 15.7 Hz, 1H) , 4.99 (brs, 1H) , 4.23 (q, J = 7.0 Hz, 2H) , 4.10 (q, J = 7.1 Hz, 2H) , 4.06 (s, 3H) , 4.05 –3.90 (m, 4H) , 2.33 –2.14 (m, 2H) , 1.40 (t, J = 7.0 Hz, 3H) , 1.28 (t, J = 7.0 Hz, 3H) .
Example 8 synthesis of (E) -1, 3-diethyl-7-methyl-8- (4- ( (tetrahydro-2H-pyran-4-yl) oxy) styryl) -1H-purine-2, 6 (3H, 7H) -dione
Figure PCTCN2019127192-appb-000032
Step 1) synthesis of 4- ( (tetrahydro-2H-pyran-4-yl) oxy) benzaldehyde
The title compound of this step was prepared by referring to the method described in step 2 of example 1, i.e., tetrahydro-2H-pyran-4-yl 4-methylbenzenesulfonate (1.3 g, 5.1 mmol) , cesium carbonate (2.0 g, 14.5 mmol) and p-hydroxybenzaldehyde (0.6 g, 4.91 mmol) were reacted in N, N-dimethylformamide (10 mL) , and the crude product was purified by silica gel chromatography (PE/EtOAc (v/v) = 10/1) to give the title compound as light yellow oil (0.9 g, 90%) .
MS (ESI, pos. ion) m/z: 207.1 [M+H]  +;
1H NMR (400 MHz, CDCl 3) δ (ppm) 9.83 (s, 1H) , 7.78 (d, J = 8.7 Hz, 2H) , 6.97 (d, J = 8.7 Hz, 2H) , 4.65 –4.52 (m, 1H) , 3.99 –3.86 (m, 2H) , 3.56 (ddd, J = 11.6, 8.3, 3.2 Hz, 2H) , 2.02 (dd, J = 5.9, 3.8 Hz, 2H) , 1.85 –1.71 (m, 2H) .
Step 2) synthesis of (E) -3- (4- ( (tetrahydro-2H-pyran-4-yl) oxy) phenyl) acrylic acid
The title compound of this step was prepared by referring to the method described in step 3 of example 1, i.e., 4- ( (tetrahydro-2H-pyran-4-yl) oxy) benzaldehyde (0.7 g, 3.39 mmol) and malonic acid (1.06 g, 10.18 mmol) were reacted in pyridine (5 mL) , and the crude product was purified by silica gel chromatography (PE/EtOAc (v/v) = 4/1) to give the title compound as a white solid (350 mg, 41.5%) .
MS (ESI, pos. ion) m/z: 249.2 [M+H]  +;
1H NMR (400 MHz, CDCl 3) δ (ppm) 8.05 (s, 1H) , 7.74 (d, J = 15.9 Hz, 1H) , 7.51 (d, J = 8.6 Hz, 2H) , 6.94 (d, J = 8.6 Hz, 2H) , 6.34 (d, J = 15.9 Hz, 1H) , 4.65 –4.53 (m, 1H) , 4.02 (dd, J = 10.9, 4.2 Hz, 2H) , 3.66 –3.58 (m, 2H) , 2.05 (d, J = 4.0 Hz, 2H) , 1.87 –1.80 (m, 2H) .
Step 3) synthesis of (E) -N-  (6-amino-1, 3-diethyl-2, 4-dioxo-1, 2, 3, 4-tetrahydropyrimidin-5-yl) -3- (4- ( (tetrahydro-2H-pyran-4-yl) oxy)  phenyl) acrylamide
The title compound of this step was prepared by referring to the method described in step 4 of example 1, i.e., 5, 6-diamino-1, 3-diethylpyrimidine-2, 4 (1H, 3H) -dione (220 mg, 1.1 mmol) , (E) -3- (4- ( (tetrahydro-2H-pyran-4-yl) oxy) phenyl) acrylic acid (350 mg, 1.41 mmol) , 2- (7-azabenzotriazol-1-yl) -N, N, N', N'-tetramethyluronium hexafluorophosphate (500 mg, 1.31 mmol) and N, N-diisopropylethylamine (0.7 mL, 4 mmol) were reacted in dichloromethane (10 mL) to prepare it. The crude product was purified by silica gel column chromatography (dichloromethane/methanol (v/v) = 20/1) to give the title compound as a yellow solid (0.43 g, 91%) .
MS (ESI, pos. ion) m/z: 429.2 [M+H]  +;
1H NMR (400 MHz, CDCl 3) δ (ppm) 7.74 (d, J = 15.9 Hz, 1H) , 7.51 (d, J = 8.6 Hz, 2H) , 6.94 (d, J = 8.6 Hz, 2H) , 6.34 (d, J = 15.9 Hz, 1H) , 4.62 –4.52 (m, 1H) , 4.06 – 3.95 (m, 2H) , 3.74 (q, J = 7.0 Hz, 4H) , 3.68 –3.57 (m, 2H) , 2.11 –2.04 (m, 2H) , 1.87 –1.78 (m, 2H) , 1.26 (t, J = 7.0 Hz, 6H) .
Step 4) synthesis of (E) -1, 3-diethyl-8- (4- ( (tetrahydro-2H-pyran-4-yl) oxy) styryl) -1H-purine-2, 6 (3H, 7H) -dione
The title compound of this step was prepared by referring to the method described in step 5 of example 1, i.e., (E) -N- (6-amino-1, 3-diethyl-2, 4-dioxo-1, 2, 3, 4-tetrahydropyrimidin-5-yl) -3- (4  - ( (tetrahydro-2H-pyran-4-yl) oxy) phenyl) acrylamide (500 mg, 1.17 mmol) and sodium hydroxide (300 mg, 7.5 mmol) were reacted in methanol (10 mL) , and the crude product was dried to give the title compound as a yellow solid (0.28 g, 58.5%) .
MS (ESI, pos. ion) m/z: 411.2 [M+H]  +.
Step 5) synthesis of  (E) -1, 3-diethyl-7-methyl-8- (4- ( (tetrahydro-2H-pyran-4-yl) oxy) styryl) -1H-purine-2, 6 (3H, 7H) -dione
The title compound of this step was prepared by referring to the method described in step 6 of example 1, i.e., (E) -1, 3-diethyl-8- (4- ( (tetrahydro-2H-pyran-4-yl) oxy) styryl) -1H-purine-2, 6 (3H, 7H) -dione (280 mg, 0.68 mmol) , methyl iodide (300 mg, 2.11 mmol) and sodium hydride (60 mg, 1.5 mmol) were reacted in N, N-dimethylformamide (10 mL) , and the crude product was purified by silica gel chromatography (PE/EtOAc (v/v) = 3/1) to give the title compound as a light yellow solid (0.21 g, 72.7%) .
MS (ESI, pos. ion) m/z: 425.1 [M+H]  +;
1H NMR (400 MHz, CDCl 3) δ (ppm) 7.75 (d, J = 15.7 Hz, 1H) , 7.54 (d, J = 8.6 Hz, 2H) , 6.95 (d, J = 8.6 Hz, 2H) , 6.79 (d, J = 15.7 Hz, 1H) , 4.61 – 4.53 (m, 1H) , 4.23 (q, J = 7.0 Hz, 2H) , 4.10 (dd, J = 14.1, 7.1 Hz, 2H) , 4.06 (s, 3H) , 4.04 – 3.97 (m, 2H) , 3.62 (ddd, J = 11.4, 8.4, 3.0 Hz, 2H) , 2.12 –2.00 (m, 2H) , 1.89 –1.78 (m, 2H) , 1.40 (t, J = 7.0 Hz, 3H) , 1.28 (t, J = 7.0 Hz, 3H) .
Example 9 synthesis of (R, E) -1, 3-diethyl-8- (4-methoxy-3- ( (tetrahydrofuran-3-yl) oxy) styryl) -7-methyl-1H-purine-2, 6 (3H, 7H) -dione
Figure PCTCN2019127192-appb-000033
Step 1) synthesis of (R) -4-methoxy-3- ( (tetrahydrofuran-3-yl) oxy) benzaldehyde
The title compound of this step was prepared by referring to the method described in step 2 of example 1, i.e., (S) -tetrahydrofuran-3-yl -4-methylbenzenesulfonate (3.57 g, 14.7 mmol) , potassium carbonate (6.12 g, 44.2 mmol) and 3-hydroxy-4-methoxybenzaldehyde (2.24 g, 14.8 mmol) were reacted in N, N-dimethylformamide (20 mL) , and the crude product was purified by silica gel chromatography (PE/EtOAc (v/v) = 10/1) to give the title compound as light yellow oil (3.2 g, 98%) .
MS (ESI, pos. ion) m/z: 223.1 [M+H]  +;
1H NMR (400 MHz, CDCl 3) δ (ppm) 9.79 (s, 1H) , 7.44 (dd, J = 8.2, 1.7 Hz, 1H) , 7.29 (d, J = 1.7 Hz, 1H) , 6.96 (d, J = 8.2 Hz, 1H) , 5.03 –4.92 (m, 1H) , 4.01 –3.88 (m, 7H) , 2.25 –2.10 (m, 2H) .
Step 2) synthesis of (R, E) -3- (4-methoxy-3- ( (tetrahydrofuran-3-yl) oxy) phenyl) acrylic acid
The title compound of this step was prepared by referring to the method described in step 3 of example 1, i.e., (R) -4-methoxy-3- ( (tetrahydrofuran-3-yl) oxy) benzaldehyde (3.2 g, 14 mmol) and malonate (4.5 g, 43 mmol) were reacted in pyridine (7 mL) , and the crude product was purified by silica gel chromatography  (PE/EtOAc (v/v) = 4/1) to give the title compound as a light yellow solid (3.7 g, 99%) .
MS (ESI, pos. ion) m/z: 265.1 [M+H]  +;
1H NMR (400 MHz, DMSO-d 6) δ (ppm) 7.52 (d, J = 15.9 Hz, 1H) , 7.31 –7.21 (m, 2H) , 7.00 (d, J = 8.4 Hz, 1H) , 6.45 (d, J = 15.9 Hz, 1H) , 5.09 (br, 1H) , 3.92 –3.76 (m, 7H) , 2.26 –1.91 (m, 2H) .
Step 3) synthesis of (R, E) -N-  (6-amino-1, 3-diethyl-2, 4-dioxo-1, 2, 3, 4-tetrahydropyrimidin-5-yl) -3- (4-methoxy-3- ( (tetrahydrofuran-3-yl) oxy) phe nyl) acrylamide
The title compound of this step was prepared by referring to the method described in step 4 of example 1, i.e., 5, 6-diamino-1, 3-diethylpyrimidine-2, 4 (1H, 3H) -dione (466 mg, 2.35 mmol) , (R, E) -3- (4-methoxy-3- ( (tetrahydrofuran-3-yl) oxy) phenyl) acrylic acid (800 mg, 3.01 mmol) , 2- (7-azabenzotriazol-1-yl) -N, N, N', N'-tetramethyluronium hexafluorophosphate (1.15 g, 3.02 mmol) and N, N-diisopropylethylamine (1.63 mL, 9.3 mmol) were reacted in dichloromethane (10 mL) to prepare it. The crude product was purified by silica gel column chromatography (dichloromethane/methanol (v/v) = 20/1) to give the title compound as a yellow solid (0.92 g, 88%) .
MS (ESI, pos. ion) m/z: 445.3 [M+H]  +;
1H NMR (400 MHz, CDCl 3) δ (ppm) 7.55 (d, J = 15.5 Hz, 1H) , 7.12 (d, J = 8.4 Hz, 1H) , 7.02 (s, 1H) , 6.88 (d, J = 8.4 Hz, 1H) , 6.57 (d, J = 15.5 Hz, 1H) , 5.00 (br, 1H) , 4.09 – 3.87 (m, 11H) , 2.28 – 2.12 (m, 2H) , 1.35 (t, J = 7.2 Hz, 3H) , 1.22 (t, J = 7.0 Hz, 3H) .
Step 4) synthesis of  (R, E) -1, 3-diethyl-8- (4-methoxy-3- ( (tetrahydrofuran-3-yl) oxy) styryl) -1H-purine-2, 6 (3H, 7H) -dione
The title compound of this step was prepared by referring to the method described in step 5 of example 1, i.e., (R, E) -N- (6-amino-1, 3-diethyl-2, 4-dioxo-1, 2, 3, 4-tetrahydropyrimidin-5-yl) -3- (4-methoxy-3- ( (tetrahydrofuran-3-yl) oxy) phenyl) acrylamide (536 mg, 1.21 mmol) and sodium hydroxide (145 mg, 3.63 mmol) were reacted in methanol (10 mL) , and the crude product was purified by silica gel column chromatography (dichloromethane/methanol (v/v) = 20/1) to give the title compound as a yellow solid (0.521 g, 60%) .
MS (ESI, pos. ion) m/z: 427.3 [M+H]  +;
1H NMR (400 MHz, CDCl 3) δ (ppm) 7.72 (d, J = 16.2 Hz, 1H) , 7.21 (d, J = 8.1 Hz, 1H) , 7.10 (s, 1H) , 6.94 (dd, J = 12.3, 5.8 Hz, 2H) , 5.02 (br, 1H) , 4.33 –4.18 (m, 4H) , 4.11 –4.00 (m, 3H) , 3.98 –3.87 (m, 4H) , 2.26 – 2.21 (m, 2H) , 1.43 (t, J = 7.0 Hz, 3H) , 1.34 (t, J = 7.0 Hz, 3H) .
Step 5) synthesis of  (R, E) -1, 3-diethyl-8- (4-methoxy-3- ( (tetrahydrofuran-3-yl) oxy) styryl) -7-methyl-1H-purine-2, 6 (3H, 7H) -dione
The title compound of this step was prepared by referring to the method described in step 6 of example 1, i.e., (R, E) -1, 3-diethyl-8- (4-methoxy-3- ( (tetrahydrofuran-3-yl) oxy) styryl) -1H-purine-2, 6 (3H, 7H) -dione (300 mg, 0.7 mmol) , methyl iodide (0.2 mL, 1.0 mmol) and sodium hydride (60 mg, 1.5 mmol) were reacted in N,  N-dimethylformamide (10 mL) , and the crude product was purified by silica gel chromatography (PE/EtOAc (v/v) = 3/1) to give the title compound as a light yellow solid (0.28 g, 90%) .
MS (ESI, pos. ion) m/z: 441.4 [M+H]  +;
1H NMR (400 MHz, CDCl 3) δ (ppm) 7.74 –7.67 (m, 1H) , 7.23 (dd, J = 8.4, 1.6 Hz, 1H) , 7.08 (d, J = 1.7 Hz, 1H) , 6.92 (d, J = 8.4 Hz, 1H) , 6.76 (d, J = 15.7 Hz, 1H) , 5.10 –4.98 (m, 1H) , 4.22 (q, J = 7.0 Hz, 2H) , 4.16 –3.88 (m, 12H) , 2.29 –2.15 (m, 2H) , 1.39 (t, J = 7.0 Hz, 3H) , 1.28 –1.25 (m, 3H) .
Example 10 synthesis of (S, E) -1, 3-diethyl-8- (4-methoxy-3- ( (tetrahydrofuran-3-yl) oxy) styryl) -7-methyl-1H-purine-2, 6 (3H, 7H) -dione
Figure PCTCN2019127192-appb-000034
Step 1) synthesis of (S) -4-methoxy-3- ( (tetrahydrofuran-3-yl) oxy) benzaldehyde
The title compound of this step was prepared by referring to the method described in step 2 of example 1, i.e., (R) -tetrahydrofuran-3-yl-4-methylbenzenesulfonate (1.8 g, 7.4 mmol) , potassium carbonate (2.72 g, 19.7 mmol) and 3-hydroxy-4-methoxybenzaldehyde (0.94 g, 6.2 mmol) were reacted in N, N-dimethylformamide (15 mL) , and the crude product was purified by silica gel chromatography (PE/EtOAc (v/v) = 10/1) to give the title compound as light yellow oil (1.3 g, 99%) .
MS (ESI, pos. ion) m/z: 223.2 [M+H]  +;
1H NMR (600 MHz, CDCl 3) δ (ppm) 9.82 (s, 1H) , 7.46 (dd, J = 8.2, 1.8 Hz, 1H) , 7.32 (d, J = 1.7 Hz, 1H) , 6.98 (d, J = 8.2 Hz, 1H) , 5.03 –4.95 (m, 1H) , 3.93 –3.86 (m, 7H) , 2.28 –2.14 (m, 2H) .
Step 2) synthesis of (S, E) -3- (4-methoxy-3- ( (tetrahydrofuran-3-yl) oxy) phenyl) acrylic acid
The title compound of this step was prepared by referring to the method described in step 3 of example 1, i.e., (S) -4-methoxy-3- ( (tetrahydrofuran-3-yl) oxy) benzaldehyde (1.52 g, 6.84 mmol) and malonic acid (4.5 g, 43 mmol) were reacted in pyridine (10 mL) , and the crude product was purified by silica gel chromatography (PE/EtOAc (v/v) = 4/1) to give the title compound as a white solid (1.59 g, 88%) .
MS (ESI, pos. ion) m/z: 265.2 [M+H]  +;
1H NMR (400 MHz, CDCl 3) δ (ppm) 7.66 (d, J = 15.8 Hz, 1H) , 7.15 (d, J = 7.8 Hz, 1H) , 7.02 (s, 1H) , 6.88 (d, J = 8.1 Hz, 1H) , 6.29 (d, J = 15.8 Hz, 1H) , 4.97 (br, 1H) , 4.02 –3.69 (m, 7H) , 2.19 (br, 2H) .
Step 3) synthesis of (S, E) -N-  (6-amino-1, 3-diethyl-2, 4-dioxo-1, 2, 3, 4-tetrahydropyrimidin-5-yl) -3- (4-methoxy-3- ( (tetrahydrofuran-3-yl) oxy) phe nyl) acrylamide
The title compound of this step was prepared by referring to the method described in step 4 of example 1, i.e., 5, 6-diamino-1, 3-diethylpyrimidine-2, 4 (1H, 3H) -dione (480 mg, 2.4 mmol) , (S, E) -3- (4-methoxy-3- ( (tetrahydrofuran-3-yl) oxy) phenyl) acrylic acid (830 mg, 3.1 mmol) , 2- (7-azabenzotriazol-1-yl)  -N, N, N', N'-tetramethyluronium hexafluorophosphate (1.2 g, 3.2 mmol) and N, N-diisopropylethylamine (1.68 mL, 9.6 mmol) were reacted in dichloromethane (10 mL) to prepare it. The crude product was purified by silica gel column chromatography (dichloromethane/methanol (v/v) = 20/1) to give the title compound as a yellow solid (0.75 g, 70%) .
MS (ESI, pos. ion) m/z: 445.1 [M+H]  +;
1H NMR (400 MHz, CDCl 3) δ (ppm) 7.53 (d, J = 15.5 Hz, 1H) , 7.10 (d, J = 8.2 Hz, 1H) , 6.99 (s, 1H) , 6.86 (d, J = 8.4 Hz, 1H) , 6.57 (d, J = 15.5 Hz, 1H) , 4.98 (br, 1H) , 4.05 – 3.86 (m, 11H) , 2.23 – 2.18 (m, 2H) , 1.33 (t, J = 7.1 Hz, 3H) , 1.21 (t, J = 7.1 Hz, 3H) .
Step 4) synthesis of  (S, E) -1, 3-diethyl-8- (4-methoxy-3- ( (tetrahydrofuran-3-yl) oxy) styryl) -1H-purine-2, 6 (3H, 7H) -dione
The title compound of this step was prepared by referring to the method described in step 5 of example 1, i.e., (S, E) -N- (6-amino-1, 3-diethyl-2, 4-dioxo-1, 2, 3, 4-tetrahydropyrimidin-5-yl) -3- (4-methoxy-3- ( (tetrahydrofuran-3-yl) oxy) phenyl) acrylamide (1.9 g, 4.3 mmol) and sodium hydroxide (513 mg, 12.8 mmol) were reacted in methanol (10 mL) , and the crude product was purified by silica gel column chromatography (dichloromethane/methanol (v/v) = 20/1) to give the title compound as a yellow solid (1.37 g, 75%) .
MS (ESI, pos. ion) m/z: 427.2 [M+H]  +;
1H NMR (400 MHz, DMSO-d 6) δ (ppm) 7.58 (d, J = 16.3 Hz, 1H) , 7.24 (s, 1H) , 7.17 (d, J = 8.3 Hz, 1H) , 7.02 (d, J = 8.4 Hz, 1H) , 6.96 (d, J = 16.4 Hz, 1H) , 5.11 (brs, 1H) , 4.06 (q, J = 6.9 Hz, 2H) , 3.98 –3.73 (m, 9H) , 2.22 (td, J = 14.2, 8.1 Hz, 1H) , 2.05 –1.93 (m, 1H) . 1.26 (t, J = 7.0 Hz, 3H) , 1.14 (t, J = 6.9 Hz, 3H) .
Step 5) synthesis of  (S, E) -1, 3-diethyl-8- (4-methoxy-3- ( (tetrahydrofuran-3-yl) oxy) styryl) -7-methyl-1H-purine-2, 6 (3H, 7H) -dione
The title compound of this step was prepared by referring to the method described in step 6 of example 1, i.e., (S, E) -1, 3-diethyl-8- (4-methoxy-3- ( (tetrahydrofuran-3-yl) oxy) styryl) -1H-purine-2, 6 (3H, 7H) -dione (1.35 g, 3.17 mmol) , methyl iodide (0.9 g, 6 mmol) and sodium hydride (252 mg, 6.3 mmol) were reacted in N, N-dimethylformamide (10 mL) , and the crude product was purified by silica gel chromatography (PE/EtOAc (v/v) = 3/1) to give the title compound as a yellow solid (1.04 g, 74.6%) .
MS (ESI, pos. ion) m/z: 441.3 [M+H]  +;
1H NMR (400 MHz, CDCl 3) δ (ppm) 7.72 (d, J = 15.7 Hz, 1H) , 7.24 (dd, J = 8.4, 1.6 Hz, 1H) , 7.08 (d, J = 1.6 Hz, 1H) , 6.93 (d, J = 8.4 Hz, 1H) , 6.76 (d, J = 15.7 Hz, 1H) , 5.10 –4.99 (m, 1H) , 4.22 (q, J = 7.0 Hz, 2H) , 4.15 – 3.88 (m, 12H) , 2.30 –2.16 (m, 2H) , 1.40 (t, J = 7.0 Hz, 3H) , 1.29 (d, J = 7.1 Hz, 3H) .
Example 11 synthesis of (E) -1, 3-diethyl-8- (4-methoxy-3- ( (tetrahydro-2H-pyran-4-yl) oxy) styryl) -7-methyl-1H-purine-2, 6 (3H, 7H) -dione
Figure PCTCN2019127192-appb-000035
Step 1) synthesis of 4-methoxy -3- ( (tetrahydro-2H-pyran-4-yl) oxy) benzaldehyde
The title compound of this step was prepared by referring to the method described in step 2 of example 1, i.e., tetrahydro-2H-pyran-4-yl-4-methylbenzenesulfonate (2.14 g, 8.35 mmol) , potassium carbonate (2.88 g, 20.9 mmol) and 3-hydroxy-4-methoxybenzaldehyde (1.06 g, 6.95 mmol) were reacted in N, N-dimethylformamide (10 mL) , and the crude product was purified by silica gel chromatography (PE/EtOAc (v/v) = 10/1) to give the title compound as yellow oil (1.6 g, 97%) .
MS (ESI, pos. ion) m/z: 237.2 [M+H]  +;
1H NMR (400 MHz, CDCl 3) δ (ppm) 9.84 (s, 1H) , 7.51 – 7.40 (m, 3H) , 4.61 –4.47 (m, 1H) , 4.03 (dd, J = 11.7, 4.8 Hz, 2H) , 3.95 (s, 3H) , 3.57 (ddd, J = 11.8, 9.2, 2.8 Hz, 2H) , 2.04 (br, 2H) , 1.88 –1.80 (m, 2H) .
Step 2) synthesis of (E) -3- (4-methoxy-3- ( (tetrahydro-2H-pyran-4-yl) oxy) phenyl) acrylic acid
The title compound of this step was prepared by referring to the method described in step 3 of example 1, i.e., 4-methoxy-3- ( (tetrahydro-2H-pyran-4-yl) oxy) benzaldehyde (0.5 g, 2 mmol) and malonic acid (0.66 g, 6.3 mmol) were reacted in pyridine (10 mL) , and the crude product was purified by silica gel chromatography (PE/EtOAc (v/v) = 4/1) to give the title compound as a yellow solid (0.454 g, 80%) .
MS (ESI, pos. ion) m/z: 279.0 [M+H]  +.
Step 3) synthesis of (E) -N-  (6-amino-1, 3-diethyl-2, 4-dioxo-1, 2, 3, 4-tetrahydropyrimidin-5-yl) -3- (4-methoxy-3- ( (tetrahydro-2H-pyran-4-yl) ox y) phenyl) acrylamide
The title compound of this step was prepared by referring to the method described in step 4 of example 1, i.e., 5, 6-diamino-1, 3-diethylpyrimidine-2, 4 (1H, 3H) -dione (220 mg, 1.1 mmol) , (E) -3- (4-methoxy-3- ( (tetrahydro-2H-pyran-4-yl) oxy) phenyl) acrylic acid (400 mg, 1.4 mmol) , 2- (7-azabenzotriazol-1-yl) -N, N, N', N'-tetramethyluronium hexafluorophosphate (0.87 mL, 5.0 mmol) were reacted in dichloromethane (10 mL) to prepare it. The crude product was purified by silica gel column chromatography (dichloromethane/methanol (v/v) = 20/1) to give the title compound as a yellow solid (0.37 g, 73%) .
MS (ESI, pos. ion) m/z: 459.1 [M+H]  +;
1H NMR (400 MHz, CDCl 3) δ (ppm) 7.56 (d, J = 15.5 Hz, 1H) , 7.18 – 7.09 (m, 2H) , 6.90 (d, J = 8.3 Hz, 1H) , 6.54 (d, J = 15.5 Hz, 1H) , 4.53 – 4.40 (m, 1H) , 4.08 – 3.98 (m, 6H) , 3.89 (s, 3H) , 3.62 – 3.52 (m, 2H) , 2.06 (br, 2H) , 1.91 –1.81 (m, 2H) , 1.36 (t, J = 7.1 Hz, 3H) , 1.22 (d, J = 7.1 Hz, 3H) .
Step 4) synthesis of  (E) -1, 3-diethyl-8- (4-methoxy-3- ( (tetrahydro-2H-pyran-4-yl) oxy) styryl) -1H-purine-2, 6 (3H, 7H) -dione
The title compound of this step was prepared by referring to the method described in step 5 of example  1, i.e., (E) -N- (6-amino-1, 3-diethyl-2, 4-dioxo-1, 2, 3, 4-tetrahydropyrimidin-5-yl) -3- (4-methoxy-3- ( (tetrahydro-2H-pyran-4-yl) oxy) phenyl) acrylamide (0.23 g, 0.5 mmol) and sodium hydroxide (60 mg, 1.5 mmol) were reacted in methanol (5 mL) , and the crude product was purified by silica gel column chromatography (dichloromethane/methanol (v/v) = 20/1) to give the title compound as a yellow solid (0.2 g, 90%) .
MS (ESI, pos. ion) m/z: 441.3 [M+H]  +.
Step 5) synthesis of  (E) -1, 3-diethyl-8- (4-methoxy-3- ( (tetrahydro-2H-pyran-4-yl) oxy) styryl) -7-methyl-1H-purine-2, 6 (3H, 7H) -dione
The title compound of this step was prepared by referring to the method described in step 6 of example 1, i.e., (E) -1, 3-diethyl-8- (4-methoxy-3- ( (tetrahydro-2H-pyran-4-yl) oxo) styryl) -1H-purine-2, 6 (3H, 7H) -dione (0.365 g, 0.83 mmol) , methyl iodide (0.235 g, 1.66 mmol) and sodium hydride (40 mg, 1.0 mmol) were reacted in N, N-dimethylformamide (10 mL) , and the crude product was purified by silica gel chromatography (PE/EtOAc (v/v) = 3/1) to give the title compound as a yellow-green solid (0.21 g, 56%) .
MS (ESI, pos. ion) m/z: 455.2 [M+H]  +;
1H NMR (400 MHz, CDCl 3) δ (ppm) 7.71 (d, J = 15.7 Hz, 1H) , 7.25 (dd, J = 8.4, 1.6 Hz, 1H) , 7.17 (d, J = 1.6 Hz, 1H) , 6.93 (d, J = 8.4 Hz, 1H) , 6.76 (d, J = 15.7 Hz, 1H) , 4.49 (tt, J = 8.1, 3.8 Hz, 1H) , 4.22 (q, J = 7.0 Hz, 2H) , 4.13 –4.01 (m, 7H) , 3.91 (s, 3H) , 3.61 –3.52 (m, 2H) , 2.04 (dd, J = 12.1, 4.6 Hz, 2H) , 1.92 –1.84 (m, 2H) , 1.39 (t, J = 7.0 Hz, 3H) , 1.27 (t, J = 7.0 Hz, 3H) .
Example 12 synthesis of (R, E) -1, 3-diethyl-8- (3-methoxy-4- ( (tetrahydrofuran-3-yl) oxy) styryl) -7-methyl-1H-purine-2, 6 (3H, 7H) -dione
Figure PCTCN2019127192-appb-000036
Step 1) synthesis of (R) -3-methoxy-4- ( (tetrahydrofuran-3-yl) oxy) benzaldehyde
The title compound of this step was prepared by referring to the method described in step 2 of example 1, i.e., (S) -tetrahydrofuran-3-yl-4-methylbenzenesulfonate (1.0 g, 4.13 mmol) , potassium carbonate (2.0 g, 14.5 mmol) and 4-hydroxy-3-methoxy-benzaldehyde (0.6 g, 3.94 mmol) were reacted in N, N-dimethylformamide (10 mL) , and the crude product was purified by silica gel chromatography (PE/EtOAc (v/v) = 10/1) to give the title compound as a yellow solid (0.8 g, 91%) .
MS (ESI, pos. ion) m/z: 223.2 [M+H]  +.
Step 2) synthesis of (R, E) -3- (3-methoxy-4- ( (tetrahydrofuran-3-yl) oxy) phenyl) acrylic acid
The title compound of this step was prepared by referring to the method described in step 3 of example  1, i.e., (R) -3-methoxy-4- ( (tetrahydrofuran-3-yl) oxy) benzaldehyde (0.8 g, 3.6 mmol) and malonic acid (1.12 g, 10.8 mmol) were reacted in pyridine (5 mL) , and the crude product was purified by silica gel chromatography (PE/EtOAc (v/v) = 4/1) to give the title compound as a white solid (0.5 g, 52.5%) .
MS (ESI, pos. ion) m/z: 265.1 [M+H]  +.
Step 3) synthesis of (R, E) -N-  (6-amino-1, 3-diethyl-2, 4-dioxo-1, 2, 3, 4-tetrahydropyrimidin-5-yl) -3- (3-methoxy-4- ( (tetrahydrofuran-3-yl) oxy) phe nyl) acrylamide
The title compound of this step was prepared by referring to the method described in step 4 of example 1, i.e., 5, 6-diamino-1, 3-diethylpyrimidine-2, 4 (1H, 3H) -dione (550 mg, 2.8 mmol) , (R, E) -3- (3-methoxy-4- ( (tetrahydrofuran-3-yl) oxy) phenyl) acrylic acid (850 mg, 3.2 mmol) , 2- (7-benzotriazole) -N, N, N', N'-tetramethylurea hexafluorophosphate (1.2 g, 3.0 mmol) and N, N-diisopropylethylamine (1.63 mL, 9.3 mmol) were reacted in dichloromethane (10 mL) to prepare it. The crude product was purified by silica gel column chromatography (dichloromethane/methanol (v/v) = 20/1) to give the title compound as a yellow solid (1.0 g, 80%) .
MS (ESI, pos. ion) m/z: 445.1 [M+H]  +.
Step 4) synthesis of  (R, E) -1, 3-diethyl-8- (3-methoxy-4- ( (tetrahydrofuran-3-yl) oxy) styryl) -1H-purine-2, 6 (3H, 7H) -dione
The title compound of this step was prepared by referring to the method described in step 5 of example 1, i.e., (R, E) -N- (6-amino-1, 3-diethyl-2, 4-dioxo-1, 2, 3, 4-tetrahydropyrimidin-5-yl) -3- (3-methoxy-4- ( (tetrahydrofuran-3-yl) oxy) phenyl) acrylamide (1.0 g, 2.4 mmol) and sodium hydroxide (300 mg, 7.5 mmol) were reacted in methanol (10 mL) and water (3 mL) , and the crude product was purified by silica gel column chromatography (dichloromethane/methanol (v/v) = 50/1) to give the title compound as a yellow solid (0.31 g, 31.4%) .
MS (ESI, pos. ion) m/z: 427.1 [M+H]  +.
Step 5) synthesis of  (R, E) -1, 3-diethyl-8- (3-methoxy-4- ( (tetrahydrofuran-3-yl) oxy) styryl) -7-methyl-1H-purine-2, 6 (3H, 7H) -dione
The title compound of this step was prepared by referring to the method described in step 6 of example 1, i.e., (R, E) -1, 3-diethyl-8- (3-methoxy-4- ( (tetrahydrofuran-3-yl) oxy) styryl) -1H-purine-2, 6 (3H, 7H) -dione (300 mg, 0.7 mmol) , methyl iodide (0.2 mL, 1.0 mmol) and sodium hydride (60 mg, 1.5 mmol) were reacted in N, N-dimethylformamide (10 mL) , and the crude product was purified by silica gel chromatography (PE/EtOAc (v/v) = 3/1) to give the title compound as a light yellow solid (0.235 g, 78.8%) .
MS (ESI, pos. ion) m/z: 441.2 [M+H]  +;
1H NMR (400 MHz, CDCl 3) δ (ppm) 7.75 (d, J = 15.7 Hz, 1H) , 7.17 (d, J = 8.1 Hz, 1H) , 7.12 (s, 1H) , 6.86 (d, J = 8.2 Hz, 1H) , 6.79 (d, J = 15.7 Hz, 1H) , 5.02 (brs, 1H) , 4.23 (q, J = 6.7 Hz, 2H) , 4.15 – 4.01 (m, 8H) , 3.99 – 3.88  (m, 4H) , 2.29 –2.20 (m, 2H) , 1.40 (t, J = 7.0 Hz, 3H) , 1.27 (br, 3H) .
Example 13 synthesis of (S, E) -1, 3-diethyl-8- (3-methoxy-4- ( (tetrahydrofuran-3-yl) oxy) styryl) -7-methyl-1H-purine-2, 6 (3H, 7H) -dione
Figure PCTCN2019127192-appb-000037
Step 1) synthesis of (S) -3-methoxy-4- ( (tetrahydrofuran-3-yl) oxy) benzaldehyde
The title compound of this step was prepared by referring to the method described in step 2 of example 1, i.e., (R) -tetrahydrofuran-3-yl-4-methyl-benzenesulfonate (1.0 g, 4.13 mmol) , potassium carbonate (2.0 g, 14.5 mmol) and 4-hydroxy-3-methoxy-benzaldehyde (0.6 g, 3.94 mmol) were reacted in N, N-dimethylformamide (10 mL) , and the crude product was purified by silica gel chromatography (PE/EtOAc (v/v) = 10/1) to give the title compound as a yellow solid (0.78 g, 85%) .
MS (ESI, pos. ion) m/z: 223.2 [M+H]  +.
Step 2) synthesis of (S, E) -3- (3-methoxy-4- ( (tetrahydrofuran-3-yl) oxy) phenyl) acrylic acid
The title compound of this step was prepared by referring to the method described in step 3 of example 1, i.e., (S) -3-methoxy-4- ( (tetrahydrofuran-3-yl) oxy) benzaldehyde (0.8 g, 3.6 mmol) and malonic acid (1.12 g, 10.8 mmol) were reacted in pyridine (5 mL) , and the crude product was purified by silica gel chromatography (PE/EtOAc (v/v) = 4/1) to give the title compound as a white solid (0.65 g, 68%) .
MS (ESI, pos. ion) m/z: 265.1 [M+H]  +.
Step 3) synthesis of (S, E) -N-  (6-amino-1, 3-diethyl-2, 4-dioxo-1, 2, 3, 4-tetrahydropyrimidin-5-yl) -3- (3-methoxy-4- ( (tetrahydrofuran-3-yl) oxy) phe nyl) acrylamide
The title compound of this step was prepared by referring to the method described in step 4 of example 1, i.e., 5, 6-diamino-1, 3-diethylpyrimidine-2, 4 (1H, 3H) -dione (350 mg, 1.8 mmol) , (S, E) -3- (3-methoxy-4- ( (tetrahydrofuran-3-yl) oxy) phenyl) acrylic acid (500 mg, 1.89 mmol) , 2- (7-azabenzotriazol-1-yl) -N, N, N', N'-tetramethyluronium hexafluorophosphate (0.78 g, 1.9 mmol) and N, N-diisopropylethylamine (1.92 mL, 11.0 mmol) were reacted in dichloromethane (10 mL) to prepare it. The crude product was purified by silica gel column chromatography (dichloromethane/methanol (v/v) = 20/1) to give the title compound as a yellow solid (0.6 g, 76%) .
MS (ESI, pos. ion) m/z: 445.1 [M+H]  +.
Step 4) synthesis of  (S, E) -1, 3-diethyl-8- (3-methoxy-4- ( (tetrahydrofuran-3-yl) oxy) styryl) -1H-purine-2, 6 (3H, 7H) -dione
The title compound of this step was prepared by referring to the method described in step 5 of example 1, i.e., (S, E) -N- (6-amino-1, 3-diethyl-2, 4-dioxo-1, 2, 3, 4-tetrahydropyrimidin-5-yl) -3- (3-methoxy-4- ( (tetrahydrofuran-3-yl) oxy) phenyl) acrylamide (0.6 g, 1.35 mmol) and sodium hydroxide (200 mg, 5.0 mmol) were reacted in methanol (6 mL) and water (3 mL) , and the crude product was purified by silica gel column chromatography (dichloromethane/methanol (v/v) = 50/1) to give the title compound as a yellow solid (0.55 g, 95.5%) .
MS (ESI, pos. ion) m/z: 427.1 [M+H]  +.
Step 5) synthesis of  (S, E) -1, 3-diethyl-8- (3-methoxy-4- ( (tetrahydrofuran-3-yl) oxy) styryl) -7-methyl-1H-purine-2, 6 (3H, 7H) -dione
The title compound of this step was prepared by referring to the method described in step 6 of example 1, i.e., (S, E) -1, 3-diethyl-8- (3-methoxy-4- ( (tetrahydrofuran-3-yl) oxy) styryl) -1H-purine-2, 6 (3H, 7H) -dione (550 mg, 1.29 mmol) , methyl iodide (0.68 g, 4.8 mmol) and sodium hydride (80 mg, 2.0 mmol) were reacted in N, N-dimethylformamide (10 mL) , and the crude product was purified by silica gel chromatography (PE/EtOAc (v/v) = 3/1) to give the title compound as a light yellow solid (0.3 g, 52.8%) .
MS (ESI, pos. ion) m/z: 441.2 [M+H]  +;
1H NMR (400 MHz, CDCl 3) δ (ppm) 7.74 (d, J = 15.7 Hz, 1H) , 7.16 (d, J = 8.3 Hz, 1H) , 7.11 (s, 1H) , 6.85 (d, J = 8.2 Hz, 1H) , 6.79 (d, J = 15.7 Hz, 1H) , 5.01 (s, 1H) , 4.23 (q, J = 6.8 Hz, 2H) , 4.15 – 4.00 (m, 8H) , 3.98 –3.89 (m, 4H) , 2.29 –2.18 (m, 2H) , 1.40 (t, J = 7.0 Hz, 3H) , 1.29 –1.24 (m, 3H) .
Example 14 synthesis of (E) -1, 3-diethyl-8- (3-methoxy-4- ( (tetrahydro-2H-pyran-4-yl) oxy) styryl) -7-methyl-1H-purine-2, 6 (3H, 7H) -dione
Figure PCTCN2019127192-appb-000038
Step 1) synthesis of 3-methoxy-4- ( (tetrahydro-2H-pyran-4-yl) oxy) benzaldehyde
The title compound of this step was prepared by referring to the method described in step 2 of example 1, i.e., tetrahydro-2H-pyran-4-yl-4-methylbenzenesulfonate (0.9 g, 3.51 mmol) , potassium carbonate (1.0 g, 7.24 mmol) and 4-hydroxy-3-methoxybenzaldehyde (0.5 g, 3.28 mmol) were reacted in N, N-dimethylformamide (10 mL) , and the crude product was purified by silica gel chromatography (PE/EtOAc (v/v) = 10/1) to give the title compound as yellow oil (0.62 g, 80%) .
MS (ESI, pos. ion) m/z: 237.2 [M+H]  +;
1H NMR (400 MHz, CDCl 3) δ (ppm) 9.84 (s, 1H) , 7.44 – 7.40 (m, 2H) , 7.00 (d, J = 8.6 Hz, 1H) , 4.73 – 4.48 (m,  1H) , 4.06 – 3.98 (m, 2H) , 3.91 (s, 3H) , 3.57 (ddd, J = 11.7, 8.9, 3.0 Hz, 2H) , 2.10 – 2.01 (m, 2H) , 1.87 (dtd, J = 12.8, 8.5, 3.9 Hz, 2H) .
Step 2) synthesis of (E) -3- (3-methoxy-4- ( (tetrahydro-2H-pyran-4-yl) oxy) phenyl) acrylic acid
The title compound of this step was prepared by referring to the method described in step 3 of example 1, i.e., 3-methoxy-4- ( (tetrahydro-2H-pyran-4-yl) oxy) benzaldehyde (0.6 g, 2.54 mmol) and malonic acid (0.79 g, 7.61 mmol) were reacted in pyridine (5 mL) , and the crude product was purified by silica gel chromatography (PE/EtOAc (v/v) = 4/1) to give the title compound as a white solid (0.58 g, 82%) .
MS (ESI, pos. ion) m/z: 279.1 [M+H]  +;
1H NMR (400 MHz, DMSO-d 6) δ (ppm) 7.52 (d, J = 15.9 Hz, 1H) , 7.33 (s, 1H) , 7.18 (d, J = 8.3 Hz, 1H) , 7.06 (d, J = 8.3 Hz, 1H) , 6.44 (d, J = 15.9 Hz, 1H) , 4.65 – 4.49 (m, 1H) , 3.89 – 3.83 (m, 2H) , 3.81 (s, 3H) , 3.51 –3.41 (m, 2H) , 2.00 –1.87 (m, 2H) , 1.65 –1.52 (m, 2H) .
Step 3) synthesis of (E) -N-  (6-amino-1, 3-diethyl-2, 4-dioxo-1, 2, 3, 4-tetrahydropyrimidin-5-yl) -3- (3-methoxy-4- ( (tetrahydro-2H-pyran-4-yl) ox y) phenyl) acrylamide
The title compound of this step was prepared by referring to the method described in step 4 of example 1, i.e., 5, 6-diamino-1, 3-diethylpyrimidine-2, 4 (1H, 3H) -dione (510 mg, 2.6 mmol) , (E) -3- (3-methoxy-4- ( (tetrahydro-2H-pyran-4-yl) oxy) phenyl) acrylic acid (550 mg, 1.97 mmol) , 2- (7-azabenzotriazol-1-yl) -N, N, N', N'-tetramethyluronium hexafluorophosphate (0.87 g, 2.2 mmol) and N, N-diisopropylethylamine (1.74 mL, 10 mmol) were reacted in dichloromethane (10 mL) to prepare it. The crude product was purified by silica gel column chromatography (dichloromethane/methanol (v/v) = 20/1) to give the title compound as a yellow solid (0.77 g, 91%) .
MS (ESI, pos. ion) m/z: 459.3 [M+H]  +.
Step 4) synthesis of  (E) -1, 3-diethyl-8- (3-methoxy-4- ( (tetrahydro-2H-pyran-4-yl) oxy) styryl) -1H-purine-2, 6 (3H, 7H) -dione
The title compound of this step was prepared by referring to the method described in step 5 of example 1, i.e., (E) -N- (6-amino-1, 3-diethyl-2, 4-dioxo-1, 2, 3, 4-tetrahydropyrimidin-5-yl) -3- (3-methoxy-4- ( (tetrahydro-2H-pyran-4-yl) oxy) phenyl) acrylamide (0.75 g, 1.64 mmol) and sodium hydroxide (300 mg, 7.5 mmol) were reacted in methanol (6 mL) and water (3 mL) , and the crude product was purified by silica gel column chromatography (dichloromethane/methanol (v/v) = 20/1) to give the title compound as a yellow solid (0.62 g, 82%) .
MS (ESI, pos. ion) m/z: 441.1 [M+H]  +.
Step 5) synthesis of  (E) -1, 3-diethyl-8- (3-methoxy-4- ( (tetrahydro-2H-pyran-4-yl) oxy) styryl) -7-methyl-1H-purine-2, 6 (3H, 7H) -dione
The title compound of this step was prepared by referring to the method described in step 6 of example 1, i.e., (E) -1, 3-diethyl-8- (3-methoxy-4- ( (tetrahydro-2H-pyran-4-yl) oxy) styryl) -1H-purine-2, 6 (3H, 7H) -dione  (0.6 g, 1.36 mmol) , methyl iodide (0.55 g, 3.85 mmol) and sodium hydride (68 mg, 1.7 mmol) were reacted in N, N-dimethylformamide (5 mL) , and the crude product was purified by silica gel chromatography (PE/EtOAc (v/v) = 5/1) to give the title compound as a light yellow solid (0.48 g, 78%) .
MS (ESI, pos. ion) m/z: 455.2 [M+H]  +;
1H NMR (400 MHz, CDCl 3) δ (ppm) 7.74 (d, J = 15.7 Hz, 1H) , 7.16 (d, J = 8.3 Hz, 1H) , 7.12 (s, 1H) , 6.95 (d, J = 8.3 Hz, 1H) , 6.79 (d, J = 15.7 Hz, 1H) , 4.58 –4.49 (m, 1H) , 4.23 (q, J = 7.0 Hz, 2H) , 4.14 – 4.09 (m, 2H) , 4.07 (s, 3H) , 4.06 –4.01 (m, 2H) , 3.94 (s, 3H) , 3.67 –3.53 (m, 2H) , 2.12 – 2.02 (m, 2H) , 1.92 –1.84 (m, 2H) , 1.40 (t, J = 7.0 Hz, 3H) , 1.27 (d, J = 7.2 Hz, 3H) .
Example 15 synthesis of (E) -1, 3-diethyl-8- (3-fluoro-4- (oxetan-3-yloxy) styryl) -7-methyl-1H-purine-2, 6 (3H, 7H) -dione
Figure PCTCN2019127192-appb-000039
Step 1) synthesis of 3-fluoro-4- (oxetan-3-yloxy) benzaldehyde
The title compound of this step was prepared by referring to the method described in step 2 of example 1, i.e., oxetan-3-yl-4-methylbenzenesulfonate (1.9 g, 8.31 mmol) , cesium carbonate (6.78 g, 20.8 mmol) and 3-fluoro-4-hydroxy-benzaldehyde (1.22 g, 8.73 mmol) were reacted in N, N-dimethylformamide (10 mL) , and the crude product was purified by silica gel chromatography (PE/EtOAc (v/v) = 10/1) to give the title compound as a yellow solid (1.0 g, 61.3%) .
MS (ESI, pos. ion) m/z: 197.1 [M+H]  +;
1H NMR (400 MHz, CDCl 3) δ (ppm) 9.85 (d, J = 2.0 Hz, 1H) , 7.64 –7.58 (m, 2H) , 6.68 (t, J = 8.0 Hz, 1H) , 5.35 –5.30 (m, 1H) , 5.00 (t, J = 7.0 Hz, 2H) , 4.84 –4.81 (m, 2H) .
Step 2) synthesis of (E) -3- (3-fluoro-4- (oxetan-3-yloxy) phenyl) acrylic acid
The title compound of this step was prepared by referring to the method described in step 3 of example 1, i.e., 3-fluoro-4- (oxetan-3-yloxy) benzaldehyde (1.0 g, 5.1 mmol) , malonic acid (1.01 g, 9.71 mmol) and piperidine (0.22 g, 4.1 mmol) were reacted in pyridine (5 mL) , and the crude product was purified by silica gel chromatography (PE/EtOAc (v/v) = 4/1) to give the title compound as a white solid (972 mg, 80%) .
MS (ESI, pos. ion) m/z: 237.4 [M-H]  -;
1H NMR (400 MHz, CDCl 3) δ (ppm) 7.65 (d, J = 15.8 Hz, 1H) , 7.33 (dd, J = 11.9, 1.7 Hz, 1H) , 7.22 (d, J = 8.4 Hz, 1H) , 6.60 (t, J = 8.4 Hz, 1H) , 6.31 (d, J = 15.9 Hz, 1H) , 5.30 –5.25 (m, 1H) , 4.99 (t, J = 6.9 Hz, 2H) , 4.83 (dd, J = 7.3, 5.4 Hz, 2H) .
Step 3) synthesis of (E) -N-  (6-amino-1, 3-diethyl-2, 4-dioxo-1, 2, 3, 4-tetrahydropyrimidin-5-yl) -3- (3-fluoro-4- (oxetan-3-yloxy) phenyl)  acrylamide
The title compound of this step was prepared by referring to the method described in step 4 of example 1, i.e., 5, 6-diamino-1, 3-diethylpyrimidine-2, 4 (1H, 3H) -dione hydrochloride (300 mg, 1.28 mmol) , (E) -3-(3-fluoro-4- (oxetan-3-yloxy) phenyl) acrylic acid (365 mg, 1.53 mmol) , 2- (7-azabenzotriazol-1-yl) -N, N, N', N'-tetramethyluronium hexafluorophosphate (551 mg, 1.41 mmol) and N, N-diisopropylethylamine (0.98 g, 7.67 mmol) were reacted in dichloromethane (10 mL) to prepare it. The crude product was purified by silica gel column chromatography (dichloromethane/methanol (v/v) = 20/1) to give the title compound as a light yellow solid (0.475 g, 88.8%) .
MS (ESI, pos. ion) m/z: 419.2 [M+H]  +;
1H NMR (400 MHz, CDCl 3) δ (ppm) 7.78 (s, 1H) , 7.49 (d, J = 15.5 Hz, 1H) , 7.25 (d, J = 10.2 Hz, 1H) , 7.16 (d, J = 8.2 Hz, 1H) , 6.59 (d, J = 5.3 Hz, 1H) , 6.55 (d, J = 8.0 Hz, 1H) , 5.75 (s, 2H) , 5.27 –5.22 (m, 1H) , 4.97 (t, J = 6.8 Hz, 2H) , 4.82 –4.79 (m, 2H) , 3.98 (dq, J = 14.1, 7.0 Hz, 4H) , 1.32 (t, J = 7.2 Hz, 3H) , 1.18 (t, J = 7.0 Hz, 3H) .
Step 4) synthesis of (E) -1, 3-diethyl-8- (3-fluoro-4- (oxetan-3-yloxy) styryl) -1H-purine-2, 6 (3H, 7H) -dione
The title compound of this step was prepared by referring to the method described in step 5 of example 1, i.e., (E) -N- (6-amino-1, 3-diethyl-2, 4-dioxo-1, 2, 3, 4-tetrahydropyrimidin-5-yl) -3- (3-fluoro-4- (oxetan-3-yloxy) phenyl) acrylamide (475 mg, 1.14 mmol) and sodium hydroxide (500 mg, 11.9 mmol) were reacted in methanol (6 mL) and water (3 mL) , and the crude product was dried to give the title compound as a white solid (0.419 g, 92.2%) .
MS (ESI, pos. ion) m/z: 401.1 [M+H]  +;
1H NMR (400 MHz, DMSO-d 6) δ (ppm) 13.54 (s, 1H) , 7.61 – 7.53 (m, 2H) , 7.33 (d, J = 8.4 Hz, 1H) , 6.95 (d, J = 16.3 Hz, 1H) , 6.85 (t, J = 8.7 Hz, 1H) , 5.39 –5.36 (m, 1H) , 4.95 (t, J = 6.7 Hz, 2H) , 4.61 – 4.58 (m, 2H) , 4.05 (dd, J = 13.8, 6.8 Hz, 2H) , 3.93 (q, J = 6.8 Hz, 2H) , 1.25 (t, J = 7.0 Hz, 3H) , 1.13 (t, J = 6.9 Hz, 3H) .
Step 5) synthesis of (E) -1, 3-diethyl-8- (3-fluoro-4- (oxetan-3-yloxy) styryl) -7-methyl-1H-purine-2, 6 (3H, 7H) -dione
The title compound of this step was prepared by referring to the method described in step 6 of example 1, i.e., (E) -1, 3-diethyl-8- (3-fluoro-4- (oxetan-3-yloxy) styryl) -1H-purine-2, 6 (3H, 7H) -dione (410 mg, 1.02 mmol) , methyl iodide (0.128 mL, 2.05 mmol) and sodium hydride (40 mg, 1.0 mmol) were reacted in N, N-dimethylformamide (10 mL) , and the crude product was purified by silica gel chromatography (PE/EtOAc (v/v) = 3/1) to give the title compound as a white solid (0.34 g, 80.1%) .
MS (ESI, pos. ion) m/z: 415.1 [M+H]  +;
1H NMR (400 MHz, CDCl 3) δ (ppm) 7.66 (d, J = 15.7 Hz, 1H) , 7.36 (dd, J = 12.1, 1.4 Hz, 1H) , 7.22 (d, J = 8.4 Hz, 1H) , 6.76 (d, J = 15.7 Hz, 1H) , 6.60 (t, J = 8.4 Hz, 1H) , 5.27 (p, J = 5.5 Hz, 1H) , 4.98 (t, J = 6.8 Hz, 2H) , 4.84 –4.81 (m, 2H) , 4.19 (q, J = 7.0 Hz, 2H) , 4.10 – 4.06 (m, 2H) , 4.04 (s, 3H) , 1.36 (t, J = 7.0 Hz, 3H) , 1.25 (t, J = 7.0 Hz, 3H) .
Example 16 synthesis of (E) -1, 3-diethyl-8- (3-fluoro-4- ( (tetrahydro-2H-pyran-4-yl) oxy) styryl) -7-methyl-1H-purine-2, 6 (3H, 7H) -dione
Figure PCTCN2019127192-appb-000040
Step 1) synthesis of 3-fluoro-4- ( (tetrahydro-2H-pyran-4-yl) oxy) benzaldehyde
The title compound of this step was prepared by referring to the method described in step 2 of example 1, i.e., tetrahydro-2H-pyran-4-yl-4-methylbenzenesulfonate (2.01 g, 7.85 mmol) , potassium carbonate (2.49 g, 17.8 mmol) and 3-fluoro-4-hydroxy-methoxybenzaldehyde (1.0 g, 7.14 mmol) were reacted in N, N-dimethylformamide (10 mL) , and the crude product was purified by silica gel chromatography (PE/EtOAc (v/v) = 10/1) to give the title compound as yellow oil (0.96 g, 60%) .
MS (ESI, pos. ion) m/z: 225.1 [M+H]  +;
1H NMR (400 MHz, CDCl 3) δ (ppm) 9.85 (d, J = 1.9 Hz, 1H) , 7.62 (d, J = 1.7 Hz, 1H) , 7.60 (s, 1H) , 7.08 (t, J = 7.9 Hz, 1H) , 4.65 (dq, J = 11.4, 3.7 Hz, 1H) , 4.03 – 3.97 (m, 2H) , 3.60 (ddd, J = 11.5, 8.1, 3.2 Hz, 2H) , 2.08 –2.03 (m, 2H) , 1.86 (dtd, J = 12.1, 7.9, 3.8 Hz, 2H) .
Step 2) synthesis of (E) -3- (3-fluoro-4- ( (tetrahydro-2H-pyran-4-yl) oxy) phenyl) acrylic acid
The title compound of this step was prepared by referring to the method described in step 3 of example 1, i.e., 3-fluoro-4- ( (tetrahydro-2H-pyran-4-yl) oxy) benzaldehyde (0.93 g, 4.15 mmol) and malonic acid (1.29 g, 12.4 mmol) were reacted in pyridine (10 mL) , and the crude product was purified by silica gel chromatography (PE/EtOAc (v/v) = 4/1) to give the title compound as a yellow solid (360 mg, 32.6%) .
MS (ESI, pos. ion) m/z: 267.1 [M+H]  +;
1H NMR (400 MHz, CDCl 3) δ (ppm) 7.67 (d, J = 15.9 Hz, 1H) , 7.31 (dd, J = 11.8, 1.7 Hz, 1H) , 7.25 (d, J = 10.0 Hz, 1H) , 6.99 (t, J = 8.4 Hz, 1H) , 6.31 (d, J = 15.9 Hz, 1H) , 4.56 (dq, J = 11.4, 3.7 Hz, 1H) , 4.03 –3.98 (m, 2H) , 3.59 (ddd, J = 11.5, 8.1, 3.0 Hz, 2H) , 2.06 –2.02 (m, 2H) , 1.89 –1.81 (m, 2H) .
Step 3) synthesis of (E) -N-  (6-amino-1, 3-diethyl-2, 4-dioxo-1, 2, 3, 4-tetrahydropyrimidin-5-yl) -3- (3-fluoro-4- ( (tetrahydro-2H-pyran-4-yl) oxy) p henyl) acrylamide
The title compound of this step was prepared by referring to the method described in step 4 of example 1, i.e., 5, 6-diamino-1, 3-diethylpyrimidine-2, 4 (1H, 3H) -dione hydrochloride (300 mg, 1.28 mmol) , (E) -3- (3-fluoro-4- ( (tetrahydro-2H-pyran-4-yl) oxy) phenyl) acrylic acid (409 mg, 1.54 mmol) , 2- (7-azabenzotriazol-1-yl) -N, N, N', N'-tetramethyluronium hexafluorophosphate (551 mg, 1.41 mmol) and N, N-diisopropylethylamine (1.35 mL, 7.67 mmol) were reacted in dichloromethane (10 mL) to prepare it. The crude product was purified by silica gel column chromatography (dichloromethane/methanol (v/v) = 20/1) to give the title compound as a yellow solid (0.435 g, 76.2%) .
MS (ESI, pos. ion) m/z: 447.2 [M+H]  +;
1H NMR (400 MHz, CDCl 3) δ (ppm) 7.89 (s, 1H) , 7.49 (d, J = 15.5 Hz, 1H) , 7.20 (t, J = 11.0 Hz, 2H) , 6.95 (t, J = 8.3 Hz, 1H) , 6.59 (d, J = 15.5 Hz, 1H) , 5.76 (s, 2H) , 4.55 –4.51 (m, 1H) , 4.04 – 3.93 (m, 6H) , 3.59 (ddd, J = 11.5, 8.3, 3.0 Hz, 2H) , 1.86 (ddd, J = 13.0, 11.5, 7.4 Hz, 4H) , 1.31 (t, J = 7.7 Hz, 3H) , 1.19 (t, J = 7.0 Hz, 3H) .
Step 4) synthesis of  (E) -1, 3-diethyl-8- (3-fluoro-4- ( (tetrahydro-2H-pyran-4-yl) oxy) styryl) -1H-purine-2, 6 (3H, 7H) -dione
The title compound of this step was prepared by referring to the method described in step 5 of example 1, i.e., (E) -N- (6-amino-1, 3-diethyl-2, 4-dioxo-1, 2, 3, 4-tetrahydropyrimidin-5-yl) -3- (3-fluoro-4- ( (tetrahydro-2H-pyran-4-yl) oxy) phenyl) acrylamide (425 mg, 0.95 mmol) and sodium hydroxide (500 mg, 11.9 mmol) were reacted in methanol (6 mL) and water (3 mL) , and the crude product was dried to give the title compound as a white solid (0.355 g, 87%) .
MS (ESI, pos. ion) m/z: 429.2 [M+H]  +;
1H NMR (400 MHz, DMSO-d 6) δ (ppm) 13.54 (s, 1H) , 7.59 (s, 1H) , 7.55 (s, 1H) , 7.37 (d, J = 8.7 Hz, 1H) , 7.29 (t, J = 8.6 Hz, 1H) , 6.96 (d, J = 16.4 Hz, 1H) , 4.68 –4.64 (m, 1H) , 4.06 (dd, J = 13.8, 6.8 Hz, 2H) , 3.93 (dd, J = 13.7, 6.8 Hz, 2H) , 3.86 (dt, J = 8.7, 4.1 Hz, 2H) , 3.52 – 3.46 (m, 2H) , 1.99 (d, J = 9.8 Hz, 2H) , 1.67 – 1.58 (m, 2H) , 1.25 (t, J = 7.0 Hz, 3H) , 1.14 (t, J = 7.0 Hz, 3H) .
Step 5) synthesis of  (E) -1, 3-diethyl-8- (3-fluoro-4- ( (tetrahydro-2H-pyran-4-yl) oxy) styryl) -7-methyl-1H-purine-2, 6 (3H, 7H) -dione
The title compound of this step was prepared by referring to the method described in step 6 of example 1, i.e., (E) -1, 3-diethyl-8- (3-fluoro-4- ( (tetrahydro-2 H-pyran-4-yl) oxy) styryl) -1H-purine-2, 6 (3H, 7H) -dione (345 mg, 0.81 mmol) , methyl iodide (0.1 mL, 1.6 mmol) and sodium hydride (33 mg, 0.83 mmol) were reacted in N, N-dimethylformamide (10 mL) , and the crude product was purified by silica gel chromatography (PE/EtOAc (v/v) = 3/1) to give the title compound as a light yellow solid (0.339 g, 95.2%) .
MS (ESI, pos. ion) m/z: 443.3 [M+H]  +;
1H NMR (400 MHz, CDCl 3) δ (ppm) 7.67 (d, J = 15.7 Hz, 1H) , 7.34 (d, J = 12.0 Hz, 1H) , 7.25 (d, J = 9.7 Hz, 1H) , 6.99 (t, J = 8.4 Hz, 1H) , 6.76 (d, J = 15.7 Hz, 1H) , 4.55 –4.52 (m, 1H) , 4.19 (q, J = 7.0 Hz, 2H) , 4.10 –4.06 (m, 2H) , 4.04 (s, 3H) , 3.99 (dd, J = 11.2, 6.0 Hz, 2H) , 3.60 –3.54 (m, 2H) , 2.05 –2.02 (m, 2H) , 1.88 –1.82 (m, 2H) , 1.36 (t, J = 7.0 Hz, 3H) , 1.25 (t, J = 7.0 Hz, 3H) .
Example 17 synthesis of (E) -8- (3-chloro-4- ( (tetrahydro-2H-pyran-4-yl) oxy) styryl) -1, 3-diethyl-7-methyl-1H-purine-2, 6 (3H, 7H) -dione
Figure PCTCN2019127192-appb-000041
Step 1) synthesis of 3-chloro-4- ( (tetrahydro-2H-pyran-4-yl) oxy) benzaldehyde
The title compound of this step was prepared by referring to the method described in step 2 of example  1, i.e., tetrahydro-2H-pyran-4-yl-4-methylbenzenesulfonate (1.0 g, 3.9 mmol) , potassium carbonate (4.0 g, 12.3 mmol) and 3-chloro-4-hydroxy-methoxybenzaldehyde (0.6 g, 3.83 mmol) were reacted in N, N-dimethylformamide (10 mL) , and the crude product was purified by silica gel chromatography (PE/EtOAc (v/v) = 10/1) to give the title compound as a white solid (0.62 g, 78%) .
MS (ESI, pos. ion) m/z: 241.2 [M+H]  +.
Step 2) synthesis of (E) -3- (3-chloro-4- ( (tetrahydro-2H-pyran-4-yl) oxy) phenyl) acrylic acid
The title compound of this step was prepared by referring to the method described in step 3 of example 1, i.e., 3-chloro-4- ( (tetrahydro-2H-pyran-4-yl) oxy) benzaldehyde (0.6 g, 2.49 mmol) and malonic acid (0.4 g, 3.84 mmol) were reacted in pyridine (8 mL) , and the crude product was purified by silica gel chromatography (PE/EtOAc (v/v) = 4/1) to give the title compound as a light yellow solid (0.3 g, 45%) .
MS (ESI, pos. ion) m/z: 283.0 [M+H]  +.
Step 3) synthesis of (E) -N-  (6-amino-1, 3-diethyl-2, 4-dioxo-1, 2, 3, 4-tetrahydropyrimidin-5-yl) -3- (3-chloro-4- ( (tetrahydro-2H-pyran-4-yl) oxy)  phenyl) acrylamide
The title compound of this step was prepared by referring to the method described in step 4 of example 1, i.e., 5, 6-diamino-1, 3-diethylpyrimidine-2, 4 (1H, 3H) -dione (0.18 g, 0.91 mmol) , (E) -3- (3-chloro-4- ( (tetrahydro-2H-pyran-4-yl) oxy) phenyl) acrylic acid (0.31 g, 1.1 mmol) , 2- (7-azabenzotriazol-1-yl) -N, N, N', N'-tetramethyluronium hexafluorophosphate (0.33 g, 0.82 mmol) and N, N-diisopropylethylamine (0.67 mL, 3.8 mmol) were reacted in dichloromethane (10 mL) to prepare it. The crude product was purified by silica gel column chromatography (dichloromethane/methanol (v/v) = 20/1) to give the title compound as a yellow solid (0.38 g, 90%) .
MS (ESI, pos. ion) m/z: 463.2 [M+H]  +.
Step 4) synthesis of  (E) -8- (3-chloro-4- ( (tetrahydro-2H-pyran-4-yl) oxy) styryl) -1, 3-diethyl-1H-purine-2, 6 (3H, 7H) -dione
The title compound of this step was prepared by referring to the method described in step 5 of example 1, i.e., (E) -N- (6-amino-1, 3-diethyl-2, 4-dioxo-1, 2, 3, 4-tetrahydropyrimidin-5-yl) -3- (3-chloro-4- ( (tetrahydro-2H-pyran-4-yl) oxy) phenyl) acrylamide (0.35 mg, 0.76 mmol) and sodium hydroxide (300 mg, 7.5 mmol) were reacted in methanol (6 mL) and water (3 mL) , and the crude product was dried to give the title compound as a yellow solid (0.227 g, 72%) .
MS (ESI, pos. ion) m/z: 445.1 [M+H]  +.
Step 5) synthesis of  (E) -8- (3-chloro-4- ( (tetrahydro-2H-pyran-4-yl) oxy) styryl) -1, 3-diethyl-7-methyl-1H-purine-2, 6 (3H, 7H) -dione
The title compound of this step was prepared by referring to the method described in step 6 of example 1, i.e., (E) -8- (3-chloro-4- ( (tetrahydro-2H-pyran-4-yl) oxy) styryl) -1, 3-diethyl-1H-purine-2, 6 (3H, 7H) -dione (0.2 g,  0.45 mmol) , methyl iodide (0.15 g, 1.0 mmol) and sodium hydride (20 mg, 0.5 mmol) were reacted in N, N-dimethylformamide (5 mL) , and the crude product was purified by silica gel chromatography (PE/EtOAc (v/v) = 3/1) to give the title compound as a light yellow solid (0.19 g, 90%) .
MS (ESI, pos. ion) m/z: 459.2 [M+H]  +;
1H NMR (400 MHz, CDCl 3) δ (ppm) 7.70 (d, J = 16.4 Hz, 1H) , 7.67 (s, 1H) , 7.41 (d, J = 7.4 Hz, 1H) , 6.98 (d, J = 8.6 Hz, 1H) , 6.80 (d, J = 15.6 Hz, 1H) , 4.64 (brs, 1H) , 4.22 (q, J = 6.6 Hz, 2H) , 4.15 – 3.98 (m, 7H) , 3.69 – 3.62 (m, 2H) , 2.05 (br, 2H) , 1.91 (br, 2H) , 1.40 (t, J = 6.8 Hz, 3H) , 1.29 –1.24 (m, 3H) .
Example 18 synthesis of (E) -7- (difluoromethyl) -1, 3-diethyl-8- (4- (oxetan-3-yloxy) styryl) -1H-purine-2, 6 (3H, 7H) -dione
Figure PCTCN2019127192-appb-000042
The title compound of this step was prepared by referring to the method described in step 6 of example 1, i.e., (E) -1, 3-diethyl-8- (4- (oxetan-3-yloxy) styryl) -1H-purine-2, 6 (3H, 7H) -dione (200 mg, 0.52 mmol) , sodium chlorodifluoroacetate (103 mg, 0.67 mmol) and cesium carbonate (255 mg, 0.78 mmol) were reacted in N, N-dimethylformamide (10 mL) at 90 ℃ in an oil bath , and the crude product was purified by silica gel chromatography (PE/EtOAc (v/v) = 5/1) to give the title compound as a yellow solid (0.189 g, 83.6%) .
MS (ESI, pos. ion) m/z: 433.2 [M+H]  +;
1H NMR (400 MHz, CDCl 3) δ (ppm) 8.20 (t, J = 58.5 Hz, 1H) , 7.89 (d, J = 15.7 Hz, 1H) , 7.57 (d, J = 8.6 Hz, 2H) , 7.06 (d, J = 15.7 Hz, 1H) , 6.76 (d, J = 8.6 Hz, 2H) , 5.31 –5.23 (m, 1H) , 5.02 (t, J = 6.7 Hz, 2H) , 4.89 –4.72 (m, 2H) , 4.25 (q, J = 7.0 Hz, 2H) , 4.11 (q, J = 7.0 Hz, 2H) , 1.41 (t, J = 7.0 Hz, 3H) , 1.29 (t, J = 6.9 Hz, 3H) .
Example 19 synthesis of (E) -1, 3-diethyl-7-deuterated methyl-8- (4- (oxetan-3-yloxy) styryl) -1H-purine-2, 6 (3H, 7H) -dione
Figure PCTCN2019127192-appb-000043
The title compound of this step was prepared by referring to the method described in step 6 of example 1, i.e., (E) -1, 3-diethyl-8- (4- (oxetan-3-yloxy) styryl) -1H-purine-2, 6 (3H, 7H) -dione (150 mg, 0.39 mmol) , deuterated methyl iodide (75 mg, 0.51 mmol) and cesium carbonate (191 mg, 0.59 mmol) were reacted in N, N-dimethylformamide (10 mL) , and the crude product was purified by silica gel chromatography (PE/EtOAc (v/v) = 5/1) to give the title compound as a yellow solid (0.139 g, 88.7%) .
MS (ESI, pos. ion) m/z: 400.3 [M+H]  +;
1H NMR (400 MHz, CDCl 3) δ (ppm) 7.75 (d, J = 15.7 Hz, 1H) , 7.54 (d, J = 8.3 Hz, 2H) , 6.79 (d, J = 15.9 Hz, 1H) , 6.75 (d, J = 8.3 Hz, 2H) , 5.30 –5.22 (m, 1H) , 5.01 (t, J = 6.5 Hz, 2H) , 4.84 – 4.74 (m, 2H) , 4.23 (q, J = 6.7 Hz, 2H) , 4.10 (q, J = 6.8 Hz, 2H) , 1.40 (t, J = 6.9 Hz, 3H) , 1.28 (t, J = 6.7 Hz, 3H) .
Example 20 synthesis of (E) -1, 3-diethyl-7-methyl-8- (4- (oxetan-3-yl-methoxy) styryl) -1H-purine-2, 6 (3H, 7H) -dione
Figure PCTCN2019127192-appb-000044
Step 1) synthesis of oxetan-3-ylmethyl-4-methylbenzenesulfonate
The title compound of this step was prepared by referring to the method described in step 1 of example 1, i.e., p-toluene sulfonyl chloride (2.8 g, 14.7 mmol) , oxetan-3-ylmethanol (1.0 g, 11.3 mmol) and triethylamine (4.8 mL, 34.1 mmol) were reacted in DCM (20 mL) , and the crude product was purified by silica gel column chromatography eluted with PE/EtOAc (v/v = 20/1) to give the title compound as a light yellow solid (1.88 g, 68.4%) .
MS (ESI, pos. ion) m/z: 243.1 [M+H]  +.
Step 2) synthesis of 4- (oxetan-3-ylmethoxy) benzaldehyde
The title compound of this step was prepared by referring to the method described in step 2 of example 1, i.e., oxetan-3-ylmethyl-4-methylbenzenesulfonate (0.9 g, 3.7 mmol) , cesium carbonate (2.0 g, 6.14 mmol) and p-hydroxybenzaldehyde (0.6 g, 4.9 mmol) were reacted in N, N-dimethylformamide (10 mL) , and the crude product was purified by silica gel chromatography (PE/EtOAc (v/v) = 10/1) to give the title compound as light yellow oil (0.63 g, 90%) .
MS (ESI, pos. ion) m/z: 193.1 [M+H]  +;
1H NMR (400 MHz, CDCl 3) δ (ppm) 8.01 (s, 1H) , 7.85 (d, J = 8.7 Hz, 2H) , 7.03 (d, J = 8.6 Hz, 2H) , 4.94 –4.86 (m, 2H) , 4.58 (t, J = 6.1 Hz, 2H) , 4.30 (d, J = 6.7 Hz, 2H) , 3.53 –3.43 (m, 1H) .
Step 3) synthesis of (E) -3- (4- (oxetan-3-ylmethoxy) phenyl) acrylic acid
The title compound of this step was prepared by referring to the method described in step 3 of example 1, i.e., 4- (oxetan-3-yloxy) benzaldehyde (0.6 g, 3.1 mmol) , malonic acid (0.39 g, 3.7 mmol) and piperidine (0.22 g, 2.6 mmol) were reacted in pyridine (5 mL) , and the crude product was purified by silica gel chromatography (PE/EtOAc (v/v) = 4/1) to give the title compound as a white solid (0.55 g, 80%) .
MS (ESI, pos. ion) m/z: 235.2 [M+H]  +;
1H NMR (400 MHz, DMSO-d 6) δ (ppm) 7.64 (d, J = 8.6 Hz, 2H) , 7.55 (d, J = 16.0 Hz, 1H) , 7.00 (d, J = 8.6 Hz, 2H) , 6.38 (d, J = 16.0 Hz, 1H) , 4.71 (dd, J = 7.7, 6.2 Hz, 2H) , 4.42 (t, J = 6.0 Hz, 2H) , 4.25 (d, J = 6.7 Hz, 2H) , 3.45 –3.33 (m, 1H) .
Step 4) synthesis of (E) -N-  (6-amino-1, 3-diethyl-2, 4-dioxo-1, 2, 3, 4-tetrahydropyrimidin-5-yl) -3- (4- (oxetan-3-ylmethoxy) phenyl) acrylamide
The title compound of this step was prepared by referring to the method described in step 4 of example 1, i.e., 5, 6-diamino-1, 3-diethylpyrimidine-2, 4 (1H, 3H) -dione (0.56 g, 2.8 mmol) , (E) -3- (4- (oxetan-3-ylmethoxy) phenyl) acrylic acid (0.55 g, 2.3 mmol) , 2- (7-azabenzotriazol-1-yl) -N, N, N', N'-tetramethyluronium hexafluorophosphate (1.0 g, 2.5 mmol) and N, N-diisopropylethylamine (1.2 g, 9.3 mmol) were reacted in dichloromethane (10 mL) to prepare it. The crude product was purified by silica gel column chromatography (dichloromethane/methanol (v/v) = 20/1) to give the title compound as a yellow solid (0.67 g, 69%) .
MS (ESI, pos. ion) m/z: 415.1 [M+H]  +.
Step 5) synthesis of (E) -1, 3-diethyl-8- (4- (oxetan-3-ylmethoxy) styryl) -1H-purine-2, 6 (3H, 7H) -dione
The title compound of this step was prepared by referring to the method described in step 5 of example 1, i.e., (E) -N- (6-amino-1, 3-diethyl-2, 4-dioxo-1, 2, 3, 4-tetrahydropyrimidin-5-yl) -3- (4 - (oxetan-3-ylmethoxy) phenyl) acrylamide (0.65 g, 1.6 mmol) and sodium hydroxide (300 mg, 7.5 mmol) were reacted in methanol (10 mL) , and the crude product was dried to give the title compound as a yellow solid (0.5 g, 78.7%) .
MS (ESI, pos. ion) m/z: 397.2 [M+H]  +;
1H NMR (400 MHz, DMSO-d 6) δ (ppm) 7.64 –7.53 (m, 3H) , 7.01 (d, J = 8.5 Hz, 2H) , 6.90 (d, J = 16.4 Hz, 1H) , 4.77 –4.67 (m, 2H) , 4.43 (t, J = 6.0 Hz, 2H) , 4.25 (d, J = 6.6 Hz, 2H) , 4.06 (q, J = 6.6 Hz, 2H) , 3.93 (q, J = 6.7 Hz, 2H) , 3.44 –3.31 (m, 1H) , 1.25 (t, J = 7.0 Hz, 3H) , 1.13 (t, J = 6.9 Hz, 3H) .
Step 6) synthesis of (E) -1, 3-diethyl-7-methyl-8- (4- (oxetan-3-ylmethoxy) styryl) -1H-purine-2, 6 (3H, 7H) -dione
The title compound of this step was prepared by referring to the method described in step 6 of example 1, i.e., (E) -1, 3-diethyl-8- (4- (oxetan-3-ylmethoxy) styryl) -1H-purine-2, 6 (3H, 7H) -dione (0.5 g, 1.25 mmol) , methyl iodide (0.2 mL, 3.2 mmol) and cesium carbonate (550 mg, 1.7 mmol) were reacted in N, N-dimethylformamide (10 mL) , and the crude product was purified by silica gel chromatography (PE/EtOAc (v/v) = 3/1) to give the title compound as a light yellow solid (0.28 g, 54.6%) .
MS (ESI, pos. ion) m/z: 411.5 [M+H]  +;
1H NMR (400 MHz, DMSO-d 6) δ (ppm) 7.74 (d, J = 8.1 Hz, 2H) , 7.61 (d, J = 15.8 Hz, 1H) , 7.19 (d, J = 15.8 Hz, 1H) , 7.01 (d, J = 8.1 Hz, 2H) , 4.72 (t, J = 6.8 Hz, 2H) , 4.44 (t, J = 5.8 Hz, 2H) , 4.26 (d, J = 6.5 Hz, 2H) , 4.10 –4.02 (m, 2H) , 4.01 (s, 3H) , 3.91 (q, J = 6.9 Hz, 2H) , 3.42 –3.31 (m, 1H) , 1.25 (t, J = 6.8 Hz, 3H) , 1.12 (t, J = 6.7 Hz, 3H) .
Example 21 synthesis of (E) -1, 3-diethyl-7-methyl-8- (4- ( (tetrahydro-2H-pyran-4-yl) methoxy) styryl) -1H-purine-2, 6 (3H, 7H) -dione
Figure PCTCN2019127192-appb-000045
Step 1) synthesis of (tetrahydro-2H-pyran-4-yl) methyl-4-methylbenzenesulfonate
The title compound of this step was prepared by referring to the method described in step 1 of example 1, i.e., p-toluene sulfonyl chloride (2.13 g, 11.2 mmol) , tetrahydropyran-4-ylmethanol (1.0 g, 8.6 mmol) and triethylamine (3.5 mL, 24.9 mmol) were reacted in DCM (20 mL) , and the crude product was purified by silica gel column chromatography eluted with PE/EtOAc (v/v = 20/1) to give the title compound as light yellow oil (1.65 g, 70.9%) .
MS (ESI, pos. ion) m/z: 271.1 [M+H]  +;
1H NMR (400 MHz, CDCl 3) δ (ppm) 7.79 (d, J = 8.2 Hz, 2H) , 7.36 (d, J = 8.1 Hz, 2H) , 3.95 (dd, J = 11.4, 4.0 Hz, 2H) , 3.87 (d, J = 6.6 Hz, 2H) , 3.36 (dd, J = 16.9, 6.7 Hz, 2H) , 2.47 (s, 3H) , 1.94 (ddd, J = 11.4, 8.1, 4.3 Hz, 1H) , 1.63 –1.55 (m, 2H) , 1.28 (dd, J = 12.6, 3.8 Hz, 2H) .
Step 2) synthesis of 4- ( (tetrahydro-2H-pyran-4-yl) methoxy) benzaldehyde
The title compound of this step was prepared by referring to the method described in step 2 of example 1, i.e., (tetrahydro-2H-pyran-4-yl) methyl-4-methylbenzenesulfonate (0.9 g, 3.3 mmol) , cesium carbonate (2.0 g, 6.13 mmol) and p-hydroxybenzaldehyde (0.5 g, 4.1 mmol) were reacted in N, N-dimethylformamide (10 mL) , and the crude product was purified by silica gel chromatography (PE/EtOAc (v/v) = 10/1) to give the title compound as light yellow oil (0.6 g, 77%) .
MS (ESI, pos. ion) m/z: 221.1 [M+H]  +;
1H NMR (600 MHz, CDCl 3) δ (ppm) 9.82 (s, 1H) , 7.77 (d, J = 7.8 Hz, 2H) , 6.94 (d, J = 8.0 Hz, 2H) , 3.96 (dd, J = 11.3, 3.7 Hz, 2H) , 3.84 (d, J = 6.3 Hz, 2H) , 3.39 (t, J = 11.8 Hz, 2H) , 2.04 (dd, J = 13.3, 8.3 Hz, 1H) , 1.71 (d, J = 12.9 Hz, 2H) , 1.42 (qd, J = 12.3, 4.3 Hz, 2H) .
Step 3) synthesis of (E) -3- (4- ( (tetrahydro-2H-pyran-4-yl) methoxy) phenyl) acrylic acid
The title compound of this step was prepared by referring to the method described in step 3 of example 1, i.e., 4- ( (tetrahydro-2H-pyran-4-yl) methoxy) benzaldehyde (0.6 g, 2.55 mmol) and malonic acid (0.4 g, 3.84 mmol) were reacted in pyridine (5 mL) , and the crude product was purified by silica gel chromatography (PE/EtOAc (v/v) = 4/1) to give the title compound as a white solid (0.6 g, 89%) .
MS (ESI, pos. ion) m/z: 263.2 [M+H]  +;
1H NMR (400 MHz, DMSO-d 6) δ (ppm) 7.62 (d, J = 8.5 Hz, 2H) , 7.53 (d, J = 15.9 Hz, 1H) , 6.96 (d, J = 8.6 Hz, 2H) , 6.37 (d, J = 16.0 Hz, 1H) , 3.87 (d, J = 6.5 Hz, 2H) , 3.32 (t, J = 11.1 Hz, 4H) , 2.07 –1.91 (m, 1H) , 1.67 (d, J = 12.5 Hz, 2H) , 1.32 (qd, J = 12.5, 4.3 Hz, 2H) .
Step 4) synthesis of (E) -N-  (6-amino-1, 3-diethyl-2, 4-dioxo-1, 2, 3, 4-tetrahydropyrimidin-5-yl) -3- (4- ( (tetrahydro-2H-pyran-4-yl) methoxy) phen yl)acrylamide
The title compound of this step was prepared by referring to the method described in step 4 of example 1, i.e., 5, 6-diamino-1, 3-diethylpyrimidine-2, 4 (1H, 3H) -dione (500 mg, 2.5 mmol) , (E) -3- (4- ( (tetrahydro-2H-pyran-4-yl) methoxy) phenyl) acrylic acid (0.6 g, 2.28 mmol) , 2- (7-azabenzotriazol-1-yl) -N,  N, N', N'-tetramethyluronium hexafluorophosphate (1.0 g, 2.6 mmol) and N, N-diisopropylethylamine (1.24 mL, 7.1 mmol) were reacted in dichloromethane (10 mL) to prepare it. The crude product was purified by silica gel column chromatography (dichloromethane/methanol (v/v) = 20/1) to give the title compound as a yellow solid (0.85 g, 84%) .
MS (ESI, pos. ion) m/z: 443.1 [M+H]  +.
Step 5) synthesis of  (E) -1, 3-diethyl-8- (4- ( (tetrahydro-2H-pyran-4-yl) methoxy) styryl) -1H-purine-2, 6 (3H, 7H) -dione
The title compound of this step was prepared by referring to the method described in step 5 of example 1, i.e., (E) -N- (6-amino-1, 3-diethyl-2, 4-dioxo-1, 2, 3, 4-tetrahydropyrimidin-5-yl) -3- (4- ( (tetrahydro-2H-pyran-4-yl) methoxy) phenyl) acrylamide (0.8 g, 1.8 mmol) and sodium hydroxide (400 mg, 10 mmol) were reacted in tert-butanol (8 mL) , and the crude product was dried to give the title compound as a yellow solid (0.68 g, 88.9%) .
MS (ESI, pos. ion) m/z: 425.2 [M+H]  +;
1H NMR (400 MHz, DMSO-d 6) δ (ppm) 7.59 (d, J = 17.0 Hz, 1H) , 7.56 (d, J = 9.0 Hz, 2H) , 6.98 (d, J = 8.4 Hz, 2H) , 6.89 (d, J = 16.4 Hz, 1H) , 4.06 (q, J = 7.0 Hz, 2H) , 3.93 (q, J = 6.9 Hz, 2H) , 3.87 (d, J = 6.4 Hz, 4H) , 3.31 (t, J = 11.1 Hz, 2H) , 2.00 (brs, 1H) , 1.69 – 1.65 (m, 2H) , 1.37 – 1.31 (m, 2H) , 1.25 (t, J = 7.0 Hz, 3H) , 1.13 (t, J = 6.8 Hz, 3H) .
Step 6) synthesis of  (E) -1, 3-diethyl-7-methyl-8- (4- ( (tetrahydro-2H-pyran-4-yl) methoxy) styryl) -1H-purine-2, 6 (3H, 7H) -dione
The title compound of this step was prepared by referring to the method described in step 6 of example 1, i.e., (E) -1, 3-diethyl-8- (4- ( (tetrahydro-2H-pyran-4-yl) methoxy) styryl) -1H-purine-2, 6 (3H, 7H) -dione (650 mg, 1.53 mmol) , methyl iodide (570 mg, 4.0 mmol) and cesium carbonate (650 mg, 2.0 mmol) were reacted in N, N-dimethylformamide (10 mL) , and the crude product was purified by silica gel chromatography (PE/EtOAc (v/v) = 3/1) to give the title compound as a light yellow solid (0.59 g, 87.8%) .
MS (ESI, pos. ion) m/z: 439.1 [M+H]  +;
1H NMR (400 MHz, CDCl 3) δ (ppm) 7.73 (d, J = 15.7 Hz, 1H) , 7.51 (d, J = 8.5 Hz, 2H) , 6.91 (d, J = 8.5 Hz, 2H) , 6.76 (d, J = 15.7 Hz, 1H) , 4.20 (q, J = 6.9 Hz, 2H) , 4.11 –4.05 (m, 2H) , 4.04 –3.99 (m, 5H) , 3.84 (d, J = 6.4 Hz, 2H) , 3.45 (t, J = 11.3 Hz, 2H) , 2.07 (brs, 1H) , 1.70 – 1.67 (m, 2H) , 1.38 –1.31 (m, 2H) , 1.37 (t, J = 7.0 Hz, 3H) , 1.25 (t, J = 6.9 Hz, 3H) .
Example 22 synthesis of (E) -1, 3-diethyl-8- (4- ( (3-fluorooxetan-3-yl) methoxy) styryl) -7-methyl-1H-purine-2, 6 (3H, 7H) -dione
Figure PCTCN2019127192-appb-000046
Step 1) synthesis of (3-fluorooxetan-3-yl) methyl-4-methylbenzenesulfonate
The title compound of this step was prepared by referring to the method described in step 1 of example 1, i.e., p-toluene sulfonyl chloride (2.34 g, 12.2 mmol) , (3-fluorooxetan-3-yl) methanol (1.0 g, 9.4 mmol) and triethylamine (3.96 mL, 28.3 mmol) were reacted in DCM (20 mL) , and the crude product was purified by silica gel column chromatography eluted with PE/EtOAc (v/v = 20/1) to give the title compound as light yellow oil (2.2 g, 89.8%) .
MS (ESI, pos. ion) m/z: 261.1 [M+H]  +;
1H NMR (400 MHz, CDCl 3) δ (ppm) 7.82 (d, J = 8.3 Hz, 2H) , 7.38 (d, J = 8.1 Hz, 2H) , 4.75 (dd, J = 18.4, 8.4 Hz, 2H) , 4.51 (dd, J = 17.1, 8.8 Hz, 2H) , 4.37 (d, J = 20.6 Hz, 2H) , 2.47 (s, 3H) .
Step 2) synthesis of 4- ( (3-fluorooxetan-3-yl) methoxy) benzaldehyde
The title compound of this step was prepared by referring to the method described in step 2 of example 1, i.e., (3-fluorooxetan-3-yl) methyl-4-methylbenzenesulfonate (0.9 g, 3.5 mmol) , cesium carbonate (2.0 g, 6.14 mmol) and p-hydroxybenzaldehyde (0.55 g, 4.5 mmol) were reacted in N, N-dimethylformamide (10 mL) , and the crude product was purified by silica gel chromatography (PE/EtOAc (v/v) = 10/1) to give the title compound as light yellow oil (0.65 g, 88%) .
MS (ESI, pos. ion) m/z: 211.1 [M+H]  +;
1H NMR (600 MHz, CDCl 3) δ (ppm) 9.87 (s, 1H) , 7.83 (d, J = 8.6 Hz, 2H) , 7.03 (d, J = 8.5 Hz, 2H) , 4.85 (dd, J = 18.9, 8.1 Hz, 2H) , 4.69 (dd, J = 17.6, 8.3 Hz, 2H) , 4.39 (d, J = 19.8 Hz, 2H) .
Step 3) synthesis of (E) -3- (4- ( (3-fluorooxetan-3-yl) methoxy) phenyl) acrylic acid
The title compound of this step was prepared by referring to the method described in step 3 of example 1, i.e., 4- ( (3-fluorooxetan-3-yl) methoxy) benzaldehyde (0.63 g, 3.0 mmol) , malonic acid (0.41 g, 3.9 mmol) and piperidine (0.21 g, 2.4 mmol) were reacted in pyridine (5 mL) , and the crude product was purified by silica gel chromatography (PE/EtOAc (v/v) = 2/1) to give the title compound as a white solid (0.7 g, 92.2%) .
MS (ESI, pos. ion) m/z: 253.2 [M+H]  +;
1H NMR (400 MHz, DMSO-d 6) δ (ppm) 7.66 (d, J = 8.7 Hz, 2H) , 7.55 (d, J = 16.0 Hz, 1H) , 7.03 (d, J = 8.7 Hz, 2H) , 6.41 (d, J = 16.0 Hz, 1H) , 4.71 (dd, J = 19.8, 10.0 Hz, 4H) , 4.49 (d, J = 22.2 Hz, 2H) .
Step 4) synthesis of (E) -N-  (6-amino-1, 3-diethyl-2, 4-dioxo-1, 2, 3, 4-tetrahydropyrimidin-5-yl) -3- (4- ( (3-fluorooxetan-3-yl) methoxy) phenyl)  acrylamide
The title compound of this step was prepared by referring to the method described in step 4 of example 1, i.e., 5, 6-diamino-1, 3-diethylpyrimidine-2, 4 (1H, 3H) -dione (0.5 g, 2.5 mmol) , (E) -3- (4- ( (3-fluorooxetan-3-yl) methoxy) phenyl) acrylic acid (0.5 g, 1.98 mmol) , 2- (7-azabenzotriazol-1-yl) -N, N, N', N'-tetramethyluronium hexafluorophosphate (1.0 g, 2.5 mmol) and N, N-diisopropylethylamine (1.0 g, 7.7 mmol) were reacted in dichloromethane (10 mL) to prepare it. The crude product was purified by silica gel column chromatography (dichloromethane/methanol (v/v) = 20/1) to give the title compound as a yellow solid (0.7 g,  81.6%) .
MS (ESI, pos. ion) m/z: 433.1 [M+H]  +;
1H NMR (400 MHz, CDCl 3) δ (ppm) 7.74 (s, 1H) , 7.56 (d, J = 15.5 Hz, 1H) , 7.47 (d, J = 8.4 Hz, 2H) , 6.93 (d, J = 8.5 Hz, 2H) , 6.63 (d, J = 15.6 Hz, 1H) , 5.79 (s, 2H) , 4.89 (dd, J = 19.0, 8.1 Hz, 2H) , 4.73 (dd, J = 17.9, 8.2 Hz, 2H) , 4.35 (d, J = 19.8 Hz, 2H) , 3.69 (q, J = 6.6 Hz, 2H) , 3.14 (q, J = 7.3 Hz, 2H) , 1.31 (t, J = 7.1 Hz, 3H) , 1.19 (t, J = 7.0 Hz, 3H) .
Step 5) synthesis of (E) -1, 3-diethyl-8- (4- ( (3-fluorooxetan-3-yl) methoxy) styryl) -1H-purine-2, 6 (3H, 7H) -dione
The title compound of this step was prepared by referring to the method described in step 5 of example 1, i.e., (E) -N- (6-amino-1, 3-diethyl-2, 4-dioxo-1, 2, 3, 4-tetrahydropyrimidin-5-yl) -3- (4 - ( (3-fluorooxetan-3-yl) methoxy) phenyl) acrylamide (0.65 g, 1.5 mmol) and sodium hydroxide (300 mg, 7.5 mmol) were reacted in methanol (10 mL) , and the crude product was dried to give the title compound as a yellow solid (0.56 g, 90%) .
MS (ESI, pos. ion) m/z: 415.2 [M+H]  +.
Step 6) synthesis of  (E) -1, 3-diethyl-8- (4- ( (3-fluorooxetan-3-yl) methoxy) styryl) -7-methyl-1H-purine-2, 6 (3H, 7H) -dione
The title compound of this step was prepared by referring to the method described in step 6 of example 1, i.e., (E) -1, 3-diethyl-8- (4- ( (3-fluorooxetan-3-yl) methoxy) styryl) -1H-purine-2, 6 (3H, 7H) -dione (0.56 g, 1.35 mmol) , methyl iodide (0.3 mL, 4.8 mmol) and cesium carbonate (550 mg, 1.7 mmol) were reacted in N, N-dimethylformamide (10 mL) , and the crude product was purified by silica gel chromatography (PE/EtOAc (v/v) = 3/1) to give the title compound as a light yellow solid (0.55 g, 94.9%) .
MS (ESI, pos. ion) m/z: 429.2 [M+H]  +;
1H NMR (400 MHz, DMSO-d 6) δ (ppm) 7.77 (d, J = 8.6 Hz, 2H) , 7.63 (d, J = 15.7 Hz, 1H) , 7.22 (d, J = 15.8 Hz, 1H) , 7.05 (d, J = 8.6 Hz, 2H) , 4.78 – 4.67 (m, 4H) , 4.49 (d, J = 22.1 Hz, 2H) , 4.06 (q, J = 6.9 Hz, 2H) , 4.01 (s, 3H) , 3.91 (q, J = 6.7 Hz, 2H) , 1.26 (t, J = 7.0 Hz, 3H) , 1.13 (t, J = 6.9 Hz, 3H) .
Example 23 synthesis of (E) -1, 3-diethyl-8- (4- ( (4-fluorotetrahydro-2H-pyran-4-yl) methoxy) styryl) -7-methyl-1H-purine-2, 6 (3H, 7H) -di one
Figure PCTCN2019127192-appb-000047
Step 1) synthesis of (4-fluorotetrahydro-2H-pyran-4-yl) methyl-4-methylbenzenesulfonate
The title compound of this step was prepared by referring to the method described in step 1 of example 1, i.e., p-toluene sulfonyl chloride (1.85 g, 9.7 mmol) , (4-fluorotetrahydro-2H-pyran-4-yl) methanol (1.0 g, 7.45 mmol) and triethylamine (3.13 mL, 22.3 mmol) were reacted in DCM (20 mL) , and the crude product was  purified by silica gel column chromatography eluted with PE/EtOAc (v/v = 20/1) to give the title compound as a white solid (1.8 g, 83.7%) .
MS (ESI, pos. ion) m/z: 289.1 [M+H]  +;
1H NMR (600 MHz, CDCl 3) δ (ppm) 7.82 (d, J = 8.3 Hz, 2H) , 7.38 (d, J = 8.1 Hz, 2H) , 4.02 (d, J = 19.0 Hz, 2H) , 3.81 (ddd, J = 11.5, 4.8, 2.3 Hz, 2H) , 3.69 (td, J = 11.6, 2.5 Hz, 2H) , 2.48 (s, 3H) , 1.78 –1.68 (m, 4H) .
Step 2) synthesis of 4- ( (4-fluorotetrahydro-2H-pyran-4-yl) methoxy) benzaldehyde
The title compound of this step was prepared by referring to the method described in step 2 of example 1, i.e., (4-fluorotetrahydro-2H-pyran-4-yl) methyl-4-methylbenzenesulfonate (0.9 g, 3.1 mmol) , cesium carbonate (2.0 g, 6.13 mmol) and p-hydroxybenzaldehyde (0.5 g, 4.1 mmol) were reacted in N, N-dimethylformamide (10 mL) , and the crude product was purified by silica gel chromatography (PE/EtOAc (v/v) = 10/1) to give the title compound as light yellow oil (0.62 g, 78.9%) .
MS (ESI, pos. ion) m/z: 239.2 [M+H]  +.
Step 3) synthesis of (E) -3- (4- ( (4-fluorotetrahydro-2H-pyran-4-yl) methoxy) phenyl) acrylic acid
The title compound of this step was prepared by referring to the method described in step 3 of example 1, i.e., 4- ( (tetrahydro-2H-pyran-4-yl) methoxy) benzaldehyde (0.6 g, 2.37 mmol) and malonic acid (0.3 g, 2.88 mmol) were reacted in pyridine (5 mL) , and the crude product was purified by silica gel chromatography (PE/EtOAc (v/v) = 4/1) to give the title compound as a light yellow solid (0.57 g, 85.5%) .
MS (ESI, pos. ion) m/z: 281.1 [M+H]  +;
Step 4) synthesis of (E) -N-  (6-amino-1, 3-diethyl-2, 4-dioxo-1, 2, 3, 4-tetrahydropyrimidin-5-yl) -3- (4- ( (4-fluorotetrahydro-2H-pyran-4-yl) metho xy)phenyl) acrylamide
The title compound of this step was prepared by referring to the method described in step 4 of example 1, i.e., 5, 6-diamino-1, 3-diethylpyrimidine-2, 4 (1H, 3H) -dione (470 mg, 2.4 mmol) , (E) -3- (4- ( (4-fluorotetrahydro-2H-pyran-4-yl) methoxy) phenyl) acrylic acid (0.55 g, 1.96 mmol) , 2- (7-azabenzotriazol-1-yl) -N, N, N', N'-tetramethyluronium hexafluorophosphate (0.86 g, 2.1 mmol) and N, N-diisopropylethylamine (1.24 mL, 7.1 mmol) were reacted in dichloromethane (10 mL) to prepare it. The crude product was purified by silica gel column chromatography (dichloromethane/methanol (v/v) = 20/1) to give the title compound as a yellow solid (0.677 g, 75%) .
MS (ESI, pos. ion) m/z: 461.1 [M+H]  +.
Step 5) synthesis of  (E) -1, 3-diethyl-8- (4- ( (4-fluorotetrahydro-2H-pyran-4-yl) methoxy) styryl) -1H-purine-2, 6 (3H, 7H) -dione
The title compound of this step was prepared by referring to the method described in step 5 of example 1, i.e., (E) -N- (6-amino-1, 3-diethyl-2, 4-dioxo-1, 2, 3, 4-tetrahydropyrimidin-5-yl) -3- (4- ( (4-fluorotetrahydro-2H-pyran-4-yl) methoxy) phenyl) acrylamide (0.65 g, 1.4 mmol) and sodium hydroxide  (300 mg, 7.5 mmol) were reacted in tert-butanol (8 mL) and water (4 mL) , and the crude product was dried to give the title compound as a yellow solid (0.32 g, 51.7%) .
MS (ESI, pos. ion) m/z: 443.2 [M+H]  +.
Step 6) synthesis of  (E) -1, 3-diethyl-8- (4- ( (4-fluorotetrahydro-2H-pyran-4-yl) methoxy) styryl) -7-methyl-1H-purine-2, 6 (3H, 7H) -dione
The title compound of this step was prepared by referring to the method described in step 6 of example 1, i.e., (E) -1, 3-diethyl-8- (4- ( (4-fluorotetrahydro-2H-pyran-4-yl) methoxy) styryl) -1H-purine-2, 6 (3H, 7H) -dione (0.3 g, 0.68 mmol) , methyl iodide (456 mg, 3.2 mmol) and cesium carbonate (300 mg, 0.92 mmol) were reacted in N, N-dimethylformamide (5 mL) , and the crude product was purified by silica gel chromatography (PE/EtOAc (v/v) = 2/1) to give the title compound as a light yellow solid (0.26 g, 83.8%) .
MS (ESI, pos. ion) m/z: 457.5 [M+H]  +;
1H NMR (400 MHz, DMSO-d 6) δ (ppm) 7.72 (d, J = 15.7 Hz, 1H) , 7.50 (d, J = 8.5 Hz, 2H) , 6.93 (d, J = 8.4 Hz, 2H) , 6.77 (d, J = 15.7 Hz, 1H) , 4.21 (q, J = 6.9 Hz, 2H) , 4.13 –4.06 (m, 2H) , 4.04 –3.99 (m, 5H) , 3.84 –3.80 (m, 2H) , 3.71 –3.66 (m, 2H) , 1.79 –1.67 (m, 4H) , 1.35 (t, J = 7.0 Hz, 3H) , 1.24 (t, J = 6.9 Hz, 3H) .
Biological Assay
Example A: Evaluation of the antagonizing effect of the compound of the present invention on human adenosine A 2A receptor.
Test method:
The experimental system uses human recombinant adenosine A 2A receptor, which is stably expressed in HEK-293 cell line. HEK-293 cells were inoculated into culture plate at a density of 1.25 × 10 5 cells/mL. The medium was changed by modified HBSS solution with pH 7.4, different concentrations of test compound (10 μM, 1 μM, 0.1 μM, 10 nM, 1 nM, 0.1 nM) and solvents (PBS with 0.1%DMSO) were added, and the plate was incubated at 37 ℃ for 10 min. cAMP (cyclic adenosine monophosphate) concentration in culture medium was detected by TR-FRET method. NECA was used as a positive control in this experiment, (1) test compounds alone were used to stimulate cells to produce a certain amount of cAMP, and then NECA (0.1 μM) alone was used to stimulate cells to produce a certain amount of cAMP. A test compound is considered to have agonistic activity on adenosine A 2A receptor if the test compound alone stimulates cells to produce cAMP more than 50%of the amount of cAMP produced by NECA (0.1 μM) alone. (2) All cells were first incubated with test compounds and then stimulated with NECA (3 nM) . In addition, NECA (3 nM) alone was used to stimulate cells to produce a certain amount of cAMP. If the amount of cAMP produced by cells incubated with the test compound and then stimulated with NECA (3 nM) was less than 50%of the amount of cAMP produced by NECA (3 nM) alone, i.e., the inhibiton rate of the test compound on the amount of cAMP produced by NECA (3 nM) is more than 50%, it is indicated that the test compound has antagonistic activity on adenosine A 2A receptor. IC 50 was calculated using MathIQ  TM (ID Business Solutions Ltd., UK) through nonlinear, least squares regression equation analysis. The experimental results were shown in Table A.
Table A Experimental results of antagonizing effect of the compound of the present invention on human adenosine A 2A receptor.
Example No. IC 50 (μM) Example No. IC 50 (μM)
Example 1 0.63 Example 13 1.6
Example 2 1.1 Example 15 1.53
Example 4 0.81 Example 16 0.70
Example 5 1.03 Example 18 2.46
Example 6 0.98 Example 19 0.37
Example 7 0.58 Example 21 1.71
Example 8 0.56 Example 22 2.42
Example 12 1.5 Example 23 3.14
The experimental results show that the compound of the present invention has a strong antagonistic effect on adenosine A 2A receptor.
Example B: Pharmacokinetic evaluation after administering a certain amount of the compound of the present invention by intravenous or gavage to rats
(1) Test animal
The test animals are rats, as shown in Table 1:
Table 1
Germline Grade sex Weight Week age Source
SD rats Cleaning class male 180 ~ 220 g 8 weeks Cavins, Changzhou
(2) Analytical method
The LC-MS/MS system for analysis includes the Agilent 1200 series vacuum degasser, a quaternary pump, an orifice plate sampler, a thermostatted column oven, and an API4000Qtrap triple quadrupole mass spectrometer with an electrospray ionization source (ESI) . Quantitative analysis is performed in MRM mode, where the source parameters of MRM conversion are shown in Table 2:
Table 2
Curtain gas/CUR: 30 psi
Atomizing gas/GS1: 55 psi
Auxiliary heating gas/GS2: 60 psi
Ion transmission voltage/IS: 5000 mA
Atomization temperature/TEM: 500 ℃
Waters ACQUITY UPLC CSH C18, 2.1 × 50 mm, 1.7 μm column was used for analysis, and 0.8 μL of sample was injected. Analytical conditions: mobile phase is H 2O + 2 mM HCOONH 4 (ammonium formate) + 0.1%FA (formic acid) (mobile phase A) and MeOH (methanol) + 2 mM HCOONH 4 (ammonium formate) + 0.1%FA (formic acid) (mobile phase B) . Flow rate was 0.7 mL/min. The column temperature was 40 ℃, and the mobile phase gradient was shown in Table 3:
Table 3
Time Gradient of mobile phase B
0.4 min 10 %
0.6 min 95 %
1.6 min 95 %
1.61 min 10 %
2.50 min STOP
(3) Test method
The pharmacokinetic evaluation of the compound of the present invention on rats in vivo was performed as follows:
The experiment was divided into two groups: one was administered by intravenous injection, and the other was administered by intragastric administration. The compound of the present invention was administered to a test animal (overnight fast for 12 hours) in the form of 10%DMA (heating) + 60%PEG400 + 30%saline solution. For the group of intravenous administration, the administration dose is 1 mg/kg, and vein blood samples (0.3 mL) were collected at the time points of 0.083, 0.25, 0.5, 1.0, 2.0, 5.0, 7.0 and 24 h after rat administration. EDTA-K 2 as anticoagulant was added into the blood vessel. The plasma solutions were collected by centrifuging each blood sample at 3,000 rpm or 4,000 rpm for 10 minutes and kept at -20 ℃ or -70 ℃. For the group of intragastric administration, the administration dose is 5 mg/kg, and vein blood samples (0.3 mL) were collected at the time points of 0.25, 0.5, 1.0, 2.0, 5.0, 7.0 and 24 h after rat administration. EDTA-K 2 as anticoagulant was added into the blood vessel. The plasma solutions were collected by centrifuging each blood sample at 3,000 rpm or 4,000 rpm for 10 minutes and kept at -20 ℃ or -70 ℃.
20 μL of plasma was taken, 120 μL of IS working solution was added to the plasma, and the plasma was vortexed for 2 min. The mixed solution was then centrifuged at 12,000 rpm for 2 min. 100 μL of the supernatant was taken, 110 μL of MeOH/H 2O (v/v = 1/1) was added, and the solution was vortexed for 2 minutes, then 5 μL was taken for injection into the LC-MS/MS system. LC-MS/MS method was used to detect the concentration of target compounds, and non-compartment model was used to calculate pharmacokinetic parameters. The experimental results are shown in Table B. The analysis results show that the compound of the invention has good pharmacokinetic properties in rats.
Table B Pharmacokinetic parameters of the compound of the present invention in rats in vivo
Figure PCTCN2019127192-appb-000048
Figure PCTCN2019127192-appb-000049
Reference throughout this specification to “an embodiment, ” “some embodiments, ” “one embodiment" , “another example, ” “an example, ” “a specific example, ” or “some examples, ” means that a particular feature, structure, material, or characteristic described in connection with the embodiment or example is included in at least one embodiment or example of the present disclosure. Thus, the appearances of the phrases such as “in some embodiments, ” “in one embodiment" , “in an embodiment" , “in another example, “in an example, ” “in a specific example, ” or “in some examples, ” in various places throughout this specification are not necessarily referring to the same embodiment or example of the present disclosure. Furthermore, the particular features, structures, materials, or characteristics may be combined in any suitable manner in one or more embodiments or examples. In addition, those skilled in the art can integrate and combine different embodiments, examples or the features of them as long as they are not contradictory to one another.
Although explanatory embodiments have been shown and described, it would be appreciated by those skilled in the art that the above embodiments cannot be construed to limit the present disclosure, and changes, alternatives, and modifications can be made in the embodiments without departing from spirit, principles and scope of the present disclosure.

Claims (20)

  1. A compound having Formula (I) or a stereoisomer, a tautomer, an N-oxide, a hydrate, a solvate, a metabolite, a pharmaceutically acceptable salt or a prodrug thereof,
    Figure PCTCN2019127192-appb-100001
    wherein
    each of R 1, R 2 and R 3 is independently H, D, F, Cl, Br, I, -CD 3, -CN, -NO 2, -NH 2, -OH, -SH, -COOH, -C (=O) NH 2, -C (=O) NHCH 3, -C (=O) N (CH 32, -C (=O) - (C 1-C 6 alkyl) , -C (=O) - (C 1-C 6 alkoxy) , C 1-C 6 alkyl, C 2-C 6 alkenyl, C 2-C 6 alkynyl, C 1-C 6 haloalkyl, C 1-C 6 alkoxy, C 1-C 6 haloalkoxy, C 1-C 6 alkylthio, C 1-C 6 alkylamino, hydroxyl-substituted C 1-C 6 alkyl, C 3-C 8 cycloalkyl, 3-8 membered heterocyclyl, C 6-C 10 aryl or 5-10 membered heteroaryl;
    At least one of R 4, R 5, R 6, R 7 and R 8 is -O-R 0, the remaining groups are independently H, D, F, Cl, Br, I, -CN, -NO 2, -NH 2, -OH, -SH, -COOH, -C (=O) NH 2, -C (=O) NHCH 3, -C (=O) N (CH 32, -C (=O) - (C 1-C 6 alkyl) , -C (=O) - (C 1-C 6 alkoxy) , C 1-C 6 alkyl, C 2-C 6 alkenyl, C 2-C 6 alkynyl, C 1-C 6 haloalkyl, C 1-C 6 alkoxy, C 1-C 6 haloalkoxy, C 1-C 6 alkylthio, C 1-C 6 alkylamino, hydroxy substituted C 1-C 6 alkyl, C 3-C 8 cycloalkyl, 3-8 membered heterocyclyl, C 6-C 10 aryl or 5-10 membered heteroaryl;
    R 0 is - (CH 2m- (3-8 membered oxygen-containing heterocyclic ring) , wherein the 3-8 membered oxygen-containing heterocyclic ring is optionally substituted with 1, 2 or 3 R 9 groups;
    each R 9 is independently D, F, Cl, Br, I, -CN, -NO 2, -NH 2, -OH, -COOH, -C (=O) NH 2, C 1-C 4 alkyl, C 1-C 4 haloalkyl, C 1-C 4 alkoxy, C 1-C 4 haloalkoxy, hydroxy-substituted C 1-C 4 alkyl; and
    m is 0, 1, 2 or 3.
  2. The compound of claim 1, wherein R 0 is
    Figure PCTCN2019127192-appb-100002
    is optionally substituted by 1, 2 or 3 R 9 groups, x is 0, 1, 2 or 3, y is 1, 2 or 3;
    each R 9 is independently D, F, Cl, Br, I, -CN, -NO 2, -NH 2, -OH, -COOH, -C (=O) NH 2, methyl, ethyl, n-propyl, i-propyl, -CF 3, -CH 2CF 3, methoxy, ethoxy, n-propoxy or i-propoxy.
  3. The compound of claim 1 or 2, wherein R 0 is
    Figure PCTCN2019127192-appb-100003
    Figure PCTCN2019127192-appb-100004
  4. The compound of any one of claims 1 to 3, wherein each of R 1, R 2 and R 3 is independently H, D, F, Cl, Br, I, -CD 3, -CN, -NO 2, -NH 2, -OH, -SH, -COOH, -C (=O) NH 2, -C (=O) NHCH 3, -C (=O) N (CH 32, -C (=O) - (C 1-C 4 alkyl) , -C (=O) - (C 1-C 4 alkoxy) , C 1-C 4 alkyl, C 2-C 4 alkenyl, C 2-C 4 alkynyl, C 1-C 4 haloalkyl, C 1-C 4 alkoxy, C 1-C 4  haloalkoxy, C 1-C 4 alkylthio, C 1-C 4 alkylamino, hydroxyl-substituted C 1-C 4 alkyl, C 3-C 6 cycloalkyl, 3-6 membered heterocyclyl, C 6-C 10 aryl or 5-10 membered heteroaryl.
  5. The compound of any one of claims 1 to 4, wherein each of R 1, R 2 and R 3 is independently H, D, F, Cl, Br, I, -CD 3, -CN, -NO 2, -NH 2, -OH, -SH, -COOH, -C (=O) NH 2, -C (=O) NHCH 3, -C (=O) N (CH 32, -C (=O) -CH 3, -C (=O) -OCH 3, methyl, ethyl, n-propyl, isopropyl, allyl, propenyl, propargyl, propynyl, -CHF 2, -CF 3, -CHFCH 2F, -CF 2CHF 2, -CH 2CF 3, -CH 2CF 2CHF 2, methoxy, ethoxy, n-propyloxy, isopropyloxy, -OCHF 2, -OCF 3, -OCHFCH 2F, -OCF 2CHF 2, -OCH 2CF 3, -OCH 2CF 2CHF 2, methylthio, ethylthio, methylamino, dimethylamino, ethylamino, hydroxymethyl, 2-hydroxyethyl, cyclopropyl, cyclobutyl, cyclopentyl, cyclohexyl, azetidinyl, pyrrolidinyl, tetrahydrofuranyl, piperidinyl, piperazinyl, morpholinyl, phenyl, indenyl, naphthyl, pyrrolyl, pyrazolyl, imidazolyl, triazolyl, tetrazolyl, furyl, thienyl, thiazolyl, oxazolyl, pyridyl, pyrimidinyl, pyrazinyl, pyridazinyl, benzimidazolyl, indoyl or quinolyl.
  6. The compound of any one of claims 1 to 5, wherein at least one of R 4, R 5, R 6, R 7 and R 8 is -O-R 0, the remaining groups are independently H, D, F, Cl, Br, I, -CN, -NO 2, -NH 2, -OH, -SH, -COOH, -C (=O) NH 2, -C (=O) NHCH 3, -C (=O) N (CH 32, -C (=O) - (C 1-C 4 alkyl) , -C (=O) - (C 1-C 4 alkoxy) , C 1-C 4 alkyl, C 2-C 4 alkenyl, C 2-C 4 alkynyl, C 1-C 4 haloalkyl, C 1-C 4 alkoxy, C 1-C 4 haloalkoxy, C 1-C 4 alkylthio, C 1-C 4 alkylamino, hydroxy substituted C 1-C 4 alkyl, C 3-C 6 cycloalkyl, 3-6 membered heterocyclyl, C 6-C 10 aryl or 5-10 membered heteroaryl.
  7. The compound of any one of claims 1 to 6, wherein at least one of R 4, R 5, R 6, R 7 and R 8 is -O-R 0, the remaining groups are independently H, D, F, Cl, Br, I, -CN, -NO 2, -NH 2, -OH, -SH, -COOH, -C (=O) NH 2, -C (=O) NHCH 3, -C (=O) N (CH 32, -C (=O) -CH 3, -C (=O) -OCH 3, methyl, ethyl, n-propyl, isopropyl, allyl, propenyl, propargyl, propynyl, -CHF 2, -CF 3, -CHFCH 2F, -CF 2CHF 2, -CH 2CF 3, -CH 2CF 2CHF 2, methoxy, ethoxy, n-propyloxy, isopropyloxy, -OCHF 2, -OCF 3, -OCHFCH 2F, -OCF 2CHF 2, -OCH 2CF 3, -OCH 2CF 2CHF 2, methylthio, ethylthio, methylamino, dimethylamino, ethylamino, hydroxymethyl, 2-hydroxyethyl, cyclopropyl, cyclobutyl, cyclopentyl, cyclohexyl, azetidinyl, pyrrolidinyl, tetrahydrofuranyl, piperidinyl, piperazinyl, morpholinyl, phenyl, indenyl, naphthyl, pyrrolyl, pyrazolyl, imidazolyl, triazolyl, tetrazolyl, furyl, thienyl, thiazolyl, oxazolyl, pyridyl, pyrimidinyl, pyrazinyl, pyridazinyl, benzimidazolyl, indoyl or quinolyl.
  8. The compound of any one of claims 1 to 7 having Formula (II) , Formula (III) , Formula (IV) , or a stereoisomer, a tautomer, an N-oxide, a hydrate, a solvate, a metabolite, a pharmaceutically acceptable salt or a prodrug thereof,
    Figure PCTCN2019127192-appb-100005
    Figure PCTCN2019127192-appb-100006
  9. The compound of any one of claims 1 to 8 having one of the following structures or a stereoisomer, a tautomer, an N-oxide, a hydrate, a solvate, a metabolite, a pharmaceutically acceptable salt or a prodrug thereof:
    Figure PCTCN2019127192-appb-100007
    Figure PCTCN2019127192-appb-100008
    Figure PCTCN2019127192-appb-100009
  10. A pharmaceutical composition comprising the compound of any one of claims 1 to 9; and
    wherein the pharmaceutical composition optionally further comprises a pharmaceutically acceptable excipient, carrier, or adjuvant or a combination thereof.
  11. The pharmaceutical composition of claim 10 further comprising an additional therapeutic agent, wherein the additional therapeutic agent is monoamine oxidase type B inhibitor, dopamine agonist, anticholinergic, glutamate antagonist, levodopa or any combination thereof.
  12. Use of the compound of any one of claims 1 to 9 or the pharmaceutical composition of any one of claims 10 to 11 in the manufacture of a medicament for preventing, treating or lessening an adenosine A 2A receptor-related disease in a subject.
  13. The use of claim 12, wherein an adenosine A 2A receptor-related disease is Parkinson's disease, pain, depression, dementia, stroke, myocardial ischemia, asthma, alcohol withdrawal, dyskinesia syndrome, restless leg syndrome, dystonia, systemic stiffness, neurodegenerative disorders or osteoporosis.
  14. Use of the compound of any one of claims 1 to 9 or the pharmaceutical composition of any one of claims 10 to 11 in the manufacture of a medicament for antagonizing adenosine A 2A receptor.
  15. The compound of any one of claims 1 to 9 or the pharmaceutical composition of any one of claims 10 to 11 for use in preventing, treating or lessening an adenosine A 2A receptor-related disease in a subject.
  16. The compound of claim 15, wherein an adenosine A 2A receptor-related disease is Parkinson's disease, pain, depression, dementia, stroke, myocardial ischemia, asthma, alcohol withdrawal, dyskinesia syndrome, restless leg syndrome, dystonia, systemic stiffness, neurodegenerative disorders or osteoporosis.
  17. The compound of any one of claims 1 to 9 or the pharmaceutical composition of any one of claims 10 to 11 for use in antagonizing adenosine A 2A receptor.
  18. A method of preventing, treating or lessening an adenosine A 2A receptor-related disease, comprising administering a therapeutically effective dose of the compound of any one of claims 1 to 9 or the pharmaceutical composition of any one of claims 10 to 11 to a subject.
  19. The method of claim 18, wherein an adenosine A 2A receptor-related disease is Parkinson's disease, pain, depression, dementia, stroke, myocardial ischemia, asthma, alcohol withdrawal, dyskinesia syndrome, restless leg syndrome, dystonia, systemic stiffness, neurodegenerative disorders or osteoporosis.
  20. The method of antagonizing adenosine A 2A receptor, comprising administering a therapeutically effective dose of the compound of any one of claims 1 to 9 or the pharmaceutical composition of any one of claims 10 to 11 to a subject.
PCT/CN2019/127192 2018-12-21 2019-12-20 8-substituted styryl xanthine derivatives and uses thereof WO2020125779A1 (en)

Applications Claiming Priority (2)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
CN201811569929 2018-12-21
CN201811569929.0 2018-12-21

Publications (1)

Publication Number Publication Date
WO2020125779A1 true WO2020125779A1 (en) 2020-06-25

Family

ID=70073820

Family Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
PCT/CN2019/127192 WO2020125779A1 (en) 2018-12-21 2019-12-20 8-substituted styryl xanthine derivatives and uses thereof

Country Status (2)

Country Link
CN (1) CN110981876B (en)
WO (1) WO2020125779A1 (en)

Cited By (1)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
WO2022174351A1 (en) * 2021-02-19 2022-08-25 Marvel Biotechnology Purine compounds for treating disorders

Families Citing this family (2)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
CN111333648B (en) * 2019-04-24 2021-05-11 东莞市东阳光新药研发有限公司 8-substituted aromatic ring vinyl xanthine derivative and application thereof
CN112300165B (en) * 2019-11-11 2022-03-04 广东东阳光药业有限公司 8-substituted styrylxanthine derivatives and uses thereof

Citations (4)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
CA2094270C (en) * 1990-10-18 1997-01-21 Fumio Suzuki Xanthine derivatives
US5670498A (en) * 1992-12-24 1997-09-23 Kyowa Hakko Kogyo Co., Ltd. 8-substituted styryl xanthine derivatives
CA2561383A1 (en) * 2004-03-30 2005-10-13 Kyowa Hakko Kogyo Co., Ltd. Prophylactic and/or therapeutic agents for chronic musculoskeletal pain
WO2013058681A2 (en) * 2011-10-18 2013-04-25 Общество С Ограниченной Ответственностью "Ньювак" (Ооо "Ньювак") Substituted phenoxyacetic acids and esters and amides thereof, comprising a 2,6-dioxo-2,3,6,7-tetrahydro-1н-purine-8-yl fragment and constituting а2a adenosine receptor antagonists, and the use thereof

Family Cites Families (4)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
CA2093403C (en) * 1992-04-08 1999-08-10 Fumio Suzuki Therapeutic agent for parkinson's disease
US5543415A (en) * 1992-07-08 1996-08-06 Kyowa Hakko Kogyo Co., Ltd. Antidepressants
JP2613355B2 (en) * 1992-09-28 1997-05-28 協和醗酵工業株式会社 Parkinson's disease treatment
CN110041331B (en) * 2019-05-17 2020-08-07 广东东阳光药业有限公司 Styrylxanthine derivative and use thereof

Patent Citations (4)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
CA2094270C (en) * 1990-10-18 1997-01-21 Fumio Suzuki Xanthine derivatives
US5670498A (en) * 1992-12-24 1997-09-23 Kyowa Hakko Kogyo Co., Ltd. 8-substituted styryl xanthine derivatives
CA2561383A1 (en) * 2004-03-30 2005-10-13 Kyowa Hakko Kogyo Co., Ltd. Prophylactic and/or therapeutic agents for chronic musculoskeletal pain
WO2013058681A2 (en) * 2011-10-18 2013-04-25 Общество С Ограниченной Ответственностью "Ньювак" (Ооо "Ньювак") Substituted phenoxyacetic acids and esters and amides thereof, comprising a 2,6-dioxo-2,3,6,7-tetrahydro-1н-purine-8-yl fragment and constituting а2a adenosine receptor antagonists, and the use thereof

Cited By (1)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
WO2022174351A1 (en) * 2021-02-19 2022-08-25 Marvel Biotechnology Purine compounds for treating disorders

Also Published As

Publication number Publication date
CN110981876B (en) 2021-10-01
CN110981876A (en) 2020-04-10

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
AU2018340376B2 (en) Substituted pyrimidine piperazine compound and use thereof
US11858910B2 (en) Pyridinylmethylenepiperidine derivatives and uses thereof
WO2020216152A1 (en) 8-substituted aryl vinyl xanthine derivatives and uses thereof
CN110041331B (en) Styrylxanthine derivative and use thereof
US10316025B2 (en) Substituted piperazine compounds and methods of use and use thereof
AU2019230883B2 (en) Pyrrolidineamide derivatives and uses thereof
WO2020125779A1 (en) 8-substituted styryl xanthine derivatives and uses thereof
WO2021093701A1 (en) 8-substituted styryl xanthine derivatives and uses thereof
CN111018856B (en) 8-substituted styrylxanthine derivatives and uses thereof
CN111072676B (en) Nitrogen-containing fused tricyclic derivatives and uses thereof
CN112010818B (en) Morpholinamide derivatives and uses thereof
CN111072675A (en) Nitrogen-containing fused tricyclic derivatives and uses thereof
CN108912029B (en) Nitrogen-containing heterocyclic amide derivative and use thereof
CN111072663B (en) 8-substituted styrylxanthine derivatives and uses thereof
CN110922408B (en) 3H- [1,2,3] triazolo [4,5-d ] pyrimidin-5-amine derivatives and uses thereof
CN111072604A (en) α -aminoamide derivatives and uses thereof
CN118063445A (en) Pyrrolidine amide derivatives and use thereof
CN118063444A (en) Azetidinamide derivatives and uses thereof

Legal Events

Date Code Title Description
121 Ep: the epo has been informed by wipo that ep was designated in this application

Ref document number: 19899676

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A1

NENP Non-entry into the national phase

Ref country code: DE

122 Ep: pct application non-entry in european phase

Ref document number: 19899676

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A1